Index of /wp-content/uploads/2023/01
Volvo XC60 Owner's Manual - Warning Signs
VOLVO XC60
Owner's Manual
Web Edition
Welcome to the world-wide family of Volvo owners. We trust that you will enjoy many years of safe driving in your Volvo, an automobile designed with your safety and comfort in mind. We encourage you to familiarize yourself with the equipment descriptions and operating instructions in this manual. We also urge you and your passengers to wear seat belts at all times in this (or any other) vehicle. And, of course, please do not operate a vehicle if you may be affected by alcohol, medication or any impairment that could hinder your ability to drive.
Your Volvo is designed to meet all applicable federal safety and emission standards. For further information please contact your retailer, or:
In the USA: Volvo Cars of North America, LLC Customer Care Center
1 Volvo Drive
P.O. Box 914
Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647
1-800-458-1552
www.volvocars.us
In Canada: Volvo Cars of Canada Corp
National Customer Service
175 Gordon Baker Road
North York, Ontario M2H 2N7
1-800-663-8255
www.volvocanada.com
2009 © Volvo Car Corporation, All rights reserved.
Contents
00 Introduction
Important information................................. 8 Important warnings................................... 10 Environment.............................................. 11
00
01 Safety
Occupant safety........................................ 14 Reporting safety defects........................... 15 Seat belts ................................................. 16 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) .... 19
01Occupant Weight Sensor ......................... 24
Side impact protection (SIPS) airbags ..... 28 Volvo Inflatable Curtain (VIC) ................... 30 Whiplash Protection System WHIPS..... 31 Rollover Protection System (ROPS) ......... 33 Crash mode.............................................. 34 Child safety............................................... 35 Child restraint systems............................. 37 Infant seats............................................... 39 Convertible seats...................................... 41 Booster cushions...................................... 43 ISOFIX lower anchors............................... 44 Top tether anchors.................................... 45 Child restraint registration and recalls...... 46 Integrated booster cushion....................... 47 Child safety locks...................................... 50
02 Locks and alarm
Remote key and key blade....................... 54 Keyless drive............................................. 61 Locks........................................................ 64 Alarm......................................................... 66
02
4
Contents
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls.......................... 72 Ignition modes.......................................... 79 Seats......................................................... 81 Steering wheel.......................................... 87
03Lighting..................................................... 88
Wipers and washers................................. 94 Power windows......................................... 97 Mirrors....................................................... 99 Laminated panoramic roof* ................... 101 HomeLink® Wireless Control System*... 103 Starting the engine.................................. 106 Transmission........................................... 110 Brakes..................................................... 113 Hill Descent Control (HDC)..................... 115 Parking brake.......................................... 117
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Menus and messages............................. 122 Climate system....................................... 126 Audio system.......................................... 133 Bluetooth® hands-free connection......... 147
04Trip computer......................................... 153
Compass................................................. 155 Stability system....................................... 156 Active chassis systemFour C................ 158 Cruise control.......................................... 159 Collision warning with Auto-brake*......... 161 City SafetyTM .......................................... 167 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*.............. 173 Distance alert ......................................... 180 Driver Alert System* ............................... 183 Park assist*............................................. 188 Park Assist Camera (PAC)* .................... 191 Blind Spot Information System*.............. 194 Passenger compartment convenience... 198
05 During your trip
Driving recommendations....................... 204 Refueling................................................. 208 Loading................................................... 212 Cargo area ............................................. 215
05Towing a trailer....................................... 219
Emergency towing.................................. 221
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
5
Contents
06 Maintenance and specifications
Volvo maintenance.................................. 226 Maintaining your car............................... 227 Hood and engine compartment.............. 229
06Engine oil................................................ 230
Fluids...................................................... 232 Replacing bulbs...................................... 234 Wiper blades and washer fluid................ 242 Battery..................................................... 244 Fuses...................................................... 247 Wheels and tires..................................... 255 Vehicle care............................................. 276 Label information.................................... 281 Specifications......................................... 283 Volvo programs....................................... 290
07 Index
Index....................................................... 292
07
6
Contents
7
Introduction
Important information
About this manual · Before you operate your vehicle for the first
time, please familiarize yourself with the information in chapter 3.
· Information contained in the balance of the
manual is extremely useful and should be read after operating the vehicle for the first time.
· The manual is structured so that it can be
used for reference. For this reason, it should be kept in the vehicle for ready access.
Options and accessories Optional or accessory equipment described in this manual is indicated by an asterisk.
Optional or accessory equipment may not be available in all countries or markets. Please note that some vehicles may be equipped differently, depending on special legal requirements.
NOTE
· All information, illustrations and specifi-
cations contained in this manual are based on the latest product information available at the time of publication.
· Volvo reserves the right to make model
changes at any time, or to change specifications or design without notice and without incurring obligation.
· Do not export your Volvo to another
country before investigating that country's applicable safety and emission control requirements. In some cases it may be difficult or impossible to comply with these requirements. Modifications to the emission control system(s) may render your Volvo not certifiable for legal operation in the U.S., Canada and other countries.
WARNING
If your vehicle is involved in an accident, unseen damage may affect its driveability and safety.
WARNING
Certain components of this vehicle such as air bag modules, seat belt pretensioners, adaptive steering columns, and button cell batteries may contain Perchlorate material. Special handling may apply for service or vehicle end of life disposal.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/ perchlorate.
Points to keep in mind
· The manual is structured so that it can be
used for reference. For this reason, it should be kept in the vehicle for ready access.
· Do not export your Volvo to another coun-
try before investigating that country's applicable safety and exhaust emission requirements. In some cases it may be difficult or impossible to comply with these requirements. Modifications to the emission control system(s) may render your Volvo not certifiable for legal operation in the U.S., Canada and other countries.
· All information, illustrations and specifica-
tions contained in this manual are based on the latest product information available at the time of publication. Please note that some vehicles may be equipped differently, depending on special legal requirements. Optional equipment described in
8
this manual may not be available in all markets.
· Volvo reserves the right to make model
changes at any time, or to change specifications or design without notice and without incurring obligation.
Vehicle event data (Black box) Your vehicle's driving and safety systems employ computers that monitor, and share with each other, information about your vehicle's operation. One or more of these computers may store what they monitor, either during normal vehicle operation or in a crash or nearcrash event. Stored information may be read and used by:
· Volvo Car Corporation · service and repair facilities · law enforcement or government agencies · others who may assert a legal right to
know, or who obtain your consent to know such information.
Introduction
Important information
9
Introduction
Important warnings
Driver distraction
A driver has a responsibility to do everything possible to ensure his or her own safety and the safety of passengers in the vehicle and others sharing the roadway. Avoiding distractions is part of that responsibility.
Driver distraction results from driver activities that are not directly related to controlling the vehicle in the driving environment. Your new Volvo is, or can be, equipped with many feature-rich entertainment and communication systems. These include hands-free cellular telephones, navigation systems, and multipurpose audio systems. You may also own other portable electronic devices for your own convenience. When used properly and safely, they enrich the driving experience. Improperly used, any of these could cause a distraction.
For all of these systems, we want to provide the following warning that reflects the strong Volvo concern for your safety. Never use these devices or any feature of your vehicle in a way that distracts you from the task of driving safely. Distraction can lead to a serious accident. In addition to this general warning, we offer the following guidance regarding specific newer features that may be found in your vehicle
· Never use a hand-held cellular telephone
while driving. Some jurisdictions prohibit
cellular telephone use by a driver while the vehicle is moving.
· If your vehicle is equipped with a naviga-
tion system, set and make changes to your travel itinerary only with the vehicle parked.
· Never program your audio system while
the vehicle is moving. Program radio presets with the vehicle parked, and use your programmed presets to make radio use quicker and simpler.
· Never use portable computers or personal
digital assistants while the vehicle is moving.
Accessory installation · We strongly recommend that Volvo owners
install only genuine, Volvo-approved accessories, and that accessory installations be performed only by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
· Genuine Volvo accessories are tested to
ensure compatibility with the performance, safety, and emission systems in your vehicle. Additionally, a trained and qualified Volvo service technician knows where accessories may and may not be safely installed in your Volvo. In all cases, please consult a trained and qualified Volvo service technician before installing any accessory in or on your vehicle.
· Accessories that have not been approved
by Volvo may or may not be specifically tested for compatibility with your vehicle. Additionally, an inexperienced installer may not be familiar with some of your car's systems.
· Any of your car's performance and safety
systems could be adversely affected if you install accessories that Volvo has not tested, or if you allow accessories to be installed by someone unfamiliar with your vehicle.
· Damage caused by unapproved or
improperly installed accessories may not be covered by your new vehicle warranty. See your Warranty and Service Records Information booklet for more warranty information. Volvo assumes no responsibility for death, injury, or expenses that may result from the installation of non-genuine accessories.
10
Introduction
Environment
Volvo and the environment
Volvo is committed to the well being of its customers. As a natural part of this commitment, we care about the environment in which we all live. Caring for the environment means an everyday involvement in reducing our environmental impact. Volvo's environmental activities are based on a holistic view, which means we consider the overall environmental impact of a product throughout its complete life cycle. In this context, design, production, product use, and recycling are all important considerations. In production, Volvo has partly or completely phased out several chemicals including CFCs, lead chromates, asbestos, and cadmium; and reduced the number of chemicals used in our plants 50% since 1991.
Volvo was the first in the world to introduce into production a three-way catalytic converter with a Lambda sond, now called the heated oxygen sensor, in 1976. The current version of this highly efficient system reduces emissions of harmful substances (CO, HC, NOx) from the exhaust pipe by approximately 95 99% and the search to eliminate the remaining emissions continues. Volvo is the only automobile manufacturer to offer CFC-free retrofit kits for the air conditioning system of all models as far back as the 1975 model 240. Advanced electronic engine controls and cleaner fuels are bringing us closer to our goal. After Volvo vehi-
cles and parts have fulfilled their use, recycling is the next critical step in completing the life cycle. The metal content is about 75% of the total weight of a vehicle, which makes the vehicle among the most recycled industrial products. In order to have efficient and well-controlled recycling, dismantling information is available for all Volvo models. For Volvo, all homogeneous plastic parts weighing more than 3.4 oz. (100 grams) are marked with international symbols that indicate how the component is to be sorted for recycling. In addition to continuous environmental refinement of conventional gasoline-powered internal combustion engines, Volvo is actively looking at advanced technology alternative-fuel vehicles.
When you drive a Volvo, you become our partner in the work to lessen the car's impact on the environment. To reduce your vehicle's environmental impact, you can:
· Maintain proper air pressure in your tires.
Tests have shown decreased fuel economy with improperly inflated tires.
· Follow the recommended maintenance
schedule in your Warranty and Service Records Information booklet.
· Drive at a constant speed whenever pos-
sible.
· See a trained and qualified Volvo service
technician as soon as possible for inspection if the check engine (malfunction indi-
cator) light illuminates, or stays on after the vehicle has started.
· Properly dispose of any vehicle-related
waste such as used motor oil, used batteries, brake pads, etc.
· When cleaning your vehicle, please use
genuine Volvo car care products. All Volvo car care products are formulated to be environmentally friendly.
WARNING
PROPOSITION 65 WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the state of California to cause cancer, and birth defects or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer, and birth defects or other reproductive harm.
11
Occupant safety...................................................................................... 14 Reporting safety defects......................................................................... 15 Seat belts ............................................................................................... 16 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ................................................... 19 Occupant Weight Sensor ....................................................................... 24 Side impact protection (SIPS) airbags ................................................... 28 Volvo Inflatable Curtain (VIC) ................................................................. 30 Whiplash Protection System WHIPS................................................... 31 Rollover Protection System (ROPS) ....................................................... 33 Crash mode............................................................................................ 34 Child safety............................................................................................. 35 Child restraint systems........................................................................... 37 Infant seats.............................................................................................. 39 Convertible seats.................................................................................... 41 Booster cushions.................................................................................... 43 ISOFIX lower anchors............................................................................. 44 Top tether anchors.................................................................................. 45 Child restraint registration and recalls.................................................... 46 Integrated booster cushion..................................................................... 47 Child safety locks.................................................................................... 50
12
G020871
SAFETY
01
01 Safety
01
Occupant safety
Volvo's concern for safety Safety is Volvo's cornerstone. Our concern dates back to 1927 when the first Volvo rolled off the production line. Three-point seat belts (a Volvo invention), safety cages, and energyabsorbing impact zones were designed into Volvo vehicles long before it was fashionable or required by government regulation.
We will not compromize our commitment to safety. We continue to seek out new safety features and to refine those already in our vehicles. You can help. We would appreciate hearing your suggestions about improving automobile safety. We also want to know if you ever have a safety concern with your vehicle. Call us in the U.S. at: 1-800-458-1552 or in Canada at: 1-800-663-8255.
Occupant safety reminders How safely you drive doesn't depend on how old you are but rather on:
· How well you see. · Your ability to concentrate. · How quickly you make decisions under
stress to avoid an accident.
The following suggestions are intended to help you cope with the ever changing traffic environment.
· Never drink and drive.
· If you are taking any medication, consult
your physician about its potential effects on your driving abilities.
· Take a driver-retraining course.
· Have your eyes checked regularly.
· Keep your windshield and headlights
clean.
· Replace wiper blades when they start to
leave streaks.
· Take into account the traffic, road, and
weather conditions, particularly with regard to stopping distance.
14
01 Safety
Reporting safety defects
01
Reporting safety defects in the U.S.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Volvo Cars of North America, LLC. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your retailer, or Volvo Cars of North America, LLC. To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at
1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153) or write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington D.C. 20590.
You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from:
http://www.safercar.gov
Volvo strongly recommends that if your vehicle is covered under a service campaign, safety or emission recall or similar action, it should be completed as soon as possible. Please check with your local retailer or Volvo Cars of North America, LLC if your vehicle is covered under these conditions.
NHTSA can be reached at:
Internet:
http://www.nhtsa.gov
Telephone:
1-888-DASH-2-DOT (1-888-327-4236).
Reporting safety defects in Canada If you believe your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Transport Canada in addition to notifying Volvo Cars of Canada Corp.
To contact Transport Canada, call (800) 333 0510, or (613) 993 9851 if you are calling from the Ottawa region.
15
01 Safety
01
Seat belts
General information
Adjusting the seat belt Seat belts should always be worn by all occupants of your vehicle. Children should be properly restrained, using an infant, car, or booster seat determined by age, weight and height. Volvo also believes no child should sit in the front seat of a vehicle. Most states and provinces make it mandatory for occupants of a vehicle to use seat belts. Seat belt pretensioners All seat belts are equipped with pretensioners that reduce slack in the belts. These pretensioners are triggered in situations where the front or side impact airbags deploy, and in certain impacts from the rear. The front seat belts also include a tension reducing device which,
in the event of a collision, limits the peak forces exerted by the seat belt on the occupant.
Buckling a seat belt Pull the belt out far enough to insert the latch plate into the receptacle until a distinct click is heard. The seat belt retractor is normally "unlocked" and you can move freely, provided that the shoulder belt is not pulled out too far.
The retractor will lock up as follows:
· if the belt is pulled out rapidly · during braking and acceleration · if the vehicle is leaning excessively · when driving in turns.
To make child seat installation easier, each seat belt (except for the driver's belt) is equipped with a locking mechanism to help keep the seat belt taut. See page 36 for more information regarding the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR).
When wearing the seat belt remember:
· The belt should not be twisted or turned. · The lap section of the belt must be posi-
tioned low on the hips (not pressing against the abdomen).
· Make sure that the shoulder belt is rolled
up into its retractor and that the shoulder and lap belts are taut.
Unbuckling the seat belt To remove the seat belt, press the red section on the seat belt receptacle. Before exiting the vehicle, check that the seat belt retracts fully after being unbuckled. If necessary, guide the belt back into the retractor slot.
Seat belt maintenance Check periodically that the seat belts are in good condition. Use water and a mild detergent for cleaning. Check seat belt mechanism function as follows: attach the seat belt and pull rapidly on the strap.
WARNING
Never use a seat belt for more than one occupant. Never wear the shoulder portion of the belt under the arm, behind the back or otherwise out of position. Such use could cause injury in the event of an accident. As seat belts lose much of their strength when exposed to violent stretching, they should be replaced after any collision, even if they appear to be undamaged.
16
01 Safety
WARNING
· Never repair the belt yourself; have this
work done by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician only.
· Any device used to induce slack into the
shoulder belt portion of the three-point belt system will have a detrimental effect on the amount of protection available to you in the event of a collision.
· The seat back should not be tilted too
far back. The shoulder belt must be taut in order to function properly.
· Do not use child safety seats or child
booster cushions/backrests in the front passenger's seat. We also recommend that children who have outgrown these devices sit in the rear seat with the seat belt properly fastened.
Seat belts
01
Seat belt reminder
Seat belt reminder light in ceiling console The seat belt reminder consists of an audible signal, an indicator light near the rearview mirror and a symbol in the instrument panel that alert all occupants of the vehicle to fasten their seat belts. The audible signal and warning light will be on for a total of 6 seconds from the time the ignition is switched on, regardless of whether or not the seat belts are fastened. If the front seat belts are unbuckled while the vehicle is in motion, the audible signal and warning light will be active for a total of 6 seconds. Rear seats The seat belt reminder in the rear seat has two additional functions:
G017726
· It provides information about which seat
belts are fastened in the rear seat. A message will appear in the information display when a belt is being used. This message will disappear after approximately 6 seconds or can be erased by pressing the READ button on the left steering wheel lever.
· It also provides a reminder if one of the
occupants of the rear seat has unbuckled his/her seat belt while the vehicle is in motion. A visual and audible signal will be given. These signals will stop when the seat belt has been re-buckled or can be stopped by pressing the READ button.
The message in the information display can always be accessed, even if it has been erased, by pressing the READ button to display stored messages.
`` 17
01 Safety
01
Seat belts
Seat belt use during pregnancy
a distance as possible between their belly and the steering wheel.
Child seats Please refer to page 37 for information on securing child seats with the seat belts.
G020998
The seat belt should always be worn during pregnancy. But it is crucial that it be worn in the correct way. The diagonal section should wrap over the shoulder then be routed between the breasts and to the side of the belly. The lap section should lay flat over the thighs and as low as possible under the belly. It must never be allowed to ride upward. Remove all slack from the belt and ensure that it fits close to the body without any twists.
As a pregnancy progresses, pregnant drivers should adjust their seats and steering wheel such that they can easily maintain control of the vehicle as they drive (which means they must be able to easily operate the foot pedals and steering wheel). Within this context, they should strive to position the seat with as large
18
01 Safety
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
01
General information
Warning symbols in the instrument panel As an enhancement to the three-point seat belts, your Volvo is equipped with a Supplemental Restraint System (SRS). Volvo's SRS consists of seat belt pretensioners, front airbags, side impact airbags, a front passenger occupant weight sensor, and inflatable curtains. All of these systems are monitored by the SRS control module. An SRS warning light in the instrument panel (see the illustration) illuminates when the ignition is in modes I, II, or III, and will normally go out after approximately 6 seconds if no faults are detected in the system. Where applicable, a text message will also be displayed when the SRS warning light illuminates. If this warning symbol is not functioning
G022831
properly, the general warning symbol illuminates and a text message will be displayed. See also page 74 and page 76 for more information about indicator and warning symbols.
WARNING
· If the SRS warning light stays on after
the engine has started or if it illuminates while you are driving, have the vehicle inspected by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician as soon as possible.
· Never try to repair any component or
part of the SRS yourself. Any interference in the system could cause malfunction and serious injury. All work on these systems should be performed by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
WARNING
If your vehicle has been subjected to flood conditions (e.g., soaked carpeting/standing water on the floor of the vehicle) or if your vehicle has become flood-damaged in any way, do not attempt to start the vehicle or insert the remote key into the ignition slot before disconnecting the battery (see below). This may cause airbag deployment which could result in personal injury. Have the vehicle towed to a trained and qualified Volvo service technician for repairs. Automatic transmission: Before attempting to tow the vehicle: 1. Switch off the ignition for at least
10 minutes and disconnect the battery. 2. Follow the instructions for manually
overriding the shiftlock system on page 111. Please be aware that overriding the shiftlock system does not release the steering wheel lock.
``
19
01 Safety
01
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Front airbags
The front airbag system The front airbags supplement the three-point seat belts. For these airbags to provide the protection intended, seat belts must be worn at all times. The front airbag system includes gas generators surrounded by the airbags, and deceleration sensors that activate the gas generators, causing the airbags to be inflated with nitrogen gas.
G018665
Location of the passenger's side front airbag
As the movement of the seats' occupants compresses the airbags, some of the gas is expelled at a controlled rate to provide better cushioning. Both seat belt pretensioners also deploy, minimizing seat belt slack. The entire process, including inflation and deflation of the airbags, takes approximately one fifth of a second.
The location of the front airbags is indicated by SRS AIRBAG embossed on the steering wheel pad and above the glove compartment, and by decals on both sun visors and on the front and far right side of the dash.
The driver's side front airbag is folded and located in the steering wheel hub.
The passenger's side front airbag is folded behind a panel located above the glove compartment.
WARNING
· The airbags in the vehicle are designed
to be a SUPPLEMENT tonot a replacement forthe three-point seat belts. For maximum protection, wear seat belts at all times. Be aware that no system can prevent all possible injuries that may occur in an accident.
· Never drive a vehicle with a steering
wheel-mounted airbag with your hands on the steering wheel pad/airbag housing.
· The front airbags are designed to help
prevent serious injury. Deployment occurs very quickly and with considerable force. During normal deployment and depending on variables such as seating position, one may experience abrasions, bruises, swellings, or other injuries as a result from deployment of one or both of the airbags.
· When installing any accessory equip-
ment, make sure that the front airbag system is not damaged. Any interference in the system could cause malfunction.
20
01 Safety
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
01
Front airbag deployment
· The front airbags are designed to deploy
during certain frontal or front-angular collisions, impacts, or decelerations, depending on the crash severity, angle, speed and object impacted. The airbags may also deploy in certain non-frontal collisions where rapid deceleration occurs.
· The SRS sensors, which trigger the front
airbags, are designed to react to both the impact of the collision and the inertial forces generated by it, and to determine if the intensity of the collision is sufficient for the seat belt pretensioners and/or airbags to be deployed.
However, not all frontal collisions activate the front airbags.
· If the collision involves a nonrigid object
(e.g., a snow drift or bush), or a rigid, fixed object at a low speed, the front airbags will not necessarily deploy.
· Front airbags do not normally deploy in a
side impact collision, in a collision from the rear or in a rollover situation.
· The amount of damage to the bodywork
does not reliably indicate if the airbags should have deployed or not.
WARNING
· Do not use child safety seats or child
booster cushions/backrests in the front passenger's seat. We also recommend that occupants under 4 feet 7 inches (140 cm) in height who have outgrown these devices sit in the rear seat with the seat belt fastened1.
· Never drive with the airbags deployed.
The fact that they hang out can impair the steering of your vehicle. Other safety systems can also be damaged.
· The smoke and dust formed when the
airbags are deployed can cause skin and eye irritation in the event of prolonged exposure.
Should you have questions about any component in the SRS system, please contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician or Volvo Customer Support:
In the USA
Volvo Cars of North America, LLC
Customer Care Center
1 Volvo Drive
P.O. Box 914 Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647
1-800-458-1552 www.volvocars.us In Canada Volvo Cars of Canada Corp. National Customer Service 175 Gordon Baker Road North York, Ontario M2H 2N7 1-800-663-8255 www.volvocanada.com
1 See also the Occupant Weight Sensor information see page 24.
``
21
G032527
01 Safety
01
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
NOTE
· Deployment of front airbags occurs only
one time during an accident. In a collision where deployment occurs, the airbags and seat belt pretensioners activate. Some noise occurs and a small amount of powder is released. The release of the powder may appear as smoke-like matter. This is a normal characteristic and does not indicate fire.
· Volvo's front airbags use special sen-
sors that are integrated with the front seat buckles. The point at which the airbag deploys is determined by whether or not the seat belt is being used, as well as the severity of the collision.
· Collisions can occur where only one of
the airbags deploys. If the impact is less severe, but severe enough to present a clear injury risk, the airbags are triggered at partial capacity. If the impact is more severe, the airbags are triggered at full capacity.
Airbag decals
G032244
Airbag decal on the far right end of the passenger's dashboard
Airbag decal on passenger's side dashboard
G008335
Airbag decal on the outside of both sun visors
22
WARNING
· Children must never be allowed in the
front passenger's seat. Volvo recommends that ALL occupants (adults and children) shorter than 4 feet 7 inches (140 cm) be seated in the back seat of any vehicle with a passenger-side front airbag.
· Occupants in the front passenger's seat
must never sit on the edge of the seat, sit leaning toward the instrument panel or otherwise sit out of position.
· The occupant's back must be as upright
as comfort allows and be against the seat back with the seat belt properly fastened.
· Feet must be on the floor, e.g., not on
the dash, seat or out of the window.
01 Safety
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
01
WARNING
· No objects or accessory equipment,
e.g. dashboard covers, may be placed on, attached to, or installed near the air bag hatch (the area above the glove compartment) or the area affected by airbag deployment (see the illustration on page 20).
· There should be no loose articles, such
as coffee cups on the floor, seat, or dashboard area.
· Never try to open the airbag cover on
the steering wheel or the passenger's side dashboard. This should only be done by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
· Failure to follow these instructions can
result in injury to the vehicle occupants.
23
01 Safety
01
Occupant Weight Sensor
General information
2
2
Occupant Weight Sensor (OWS) indicator light Disabling the passenger's side front airbag Volvo recommends that ALL occupants (adults and children) shorter than 4 feet 7 inches (140 cm) be seated in the back seat of any vehicle with a front passenger side airbag, and be properly restrained for their size and weight. For child safety recommendations, see page 36. The Occupant Weight Sensor (OWS) is designed to meet the regulatory requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS) 208 and is designed to disable (will not inflate) the passenger's side front airbag under certain conditions.
G017724
The OWS works with sensors that are part of the front passenger's seat and seat belt. The sensors are designed to detect the presence of a properly seated occupant and determine if the passenger's side front airbag should be enabled (may inflate) or disabled (will not inflate).
The OWS will disable (will not inflate) the passenger's side front airbag when:
· the front passenger's seat is unoccupied,
or has small/medium objects in the front seat,
· the system determines that an infant is
present in a rear-facing infant seat that is installed according to the manufacturer's instructions,
· the system determines that a small child is
present in a forward-facing child restraint that is installed according to the manufacturer's instructions,
· the system determines that a small child is
present in a booster seat,
· a front passenger takes his/her weight off
of the seat for a period of time,
· a child or a small person occupies the front
passenger's seat.
The OWS uses a PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp which will illuminate and stay on to remind you that the passenger's side front
airbag is disabled. The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is located in the overhead console, near the base of the rearview mirror.
NOTE
When the ignition is switched on, the OWS indicator light will go on for up to 10 seconds while the system performs a self-diagnostic test.
However, if a fault is detected in the system:
· The OWS indicator light will stay on · The SRS warning light (see page 19) will
come on and stay on
· The message PASS. AIRBAG OFF
SERVICE URGENT will be displayed in the information display.
WARNING
If a fault in the system is detected and indicated as described, be aware that the passenger's side front airbag will not deploy in the event of a collision. In this case, the SRS system and Occupant Weight Sensor should be inspected by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician as soon as possible.
24
01 Safety
WARNING
· Never try to open, remove, or repair any
components in the OWS system. This could result in system malfunction. Maintenance or repairs should only be carried out by an a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
· The front passenger's seat should not
be modified in any way. This could reduce pressure on the seat cushion, which might interfere with the OWS system's function.
Occupant Weight Sensor
01
Passenger's seat occupancy status
OWS indicator light status
Passenger's side front airbag status
Seat unoccupied
OWS indicator light lights up.
Passenger's side front airbag disabled
Seat occupied by low weight occupant/ objectA
OWS indicator light lights up
Passenger's side front airbag disabled
Seat occupied by heavy occupant/object
OWS indicator light is not lit
Passenger's side front airbag enabled
A Volvo recommends that children always be properly restrained in appropriate child restraints in the rear seats. Do not assume that the passenger's side front airbag is disabled unless the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is lit. Make sure the child restraint is properly installed. If there is any doubt as to the status of the passenger's side front airbag, move the child restraint to the rear seat.
The OWS is designed to enable (may inflate) the passenger's side front airbag anytime the system senses that a person of adult size is sitting properly in the front passenger's seat.
The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp will be off and remain off.
If a person of adult size is sitting in the front passenger's seat, but the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is on, it is possible that the person isn't sitting properly in the seat. If this happens:
· Turn the vehicle off and ask the person to
place the seatback in an upright position.
· Have the person sit upright in the seat,
centered on the seat cushion, with the person's legs comfortably extended.
· Restart the vehicle and have the person
remain in this position for about two minutes. This will allow the system to detect that person and enable the passenger's frontal airbag.
· If the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator
lamp remains on even after this, the person should be advised to ride in the rear seat.
This condition reflects limitations of the OWS classification capability. It does not indicate OWS malfunction.
Modifications If you are considering modifying your vehicle in any way to accommodate a disability, for example by altering or adapting the driver's or front passenger's seat(s) and/or airbag systems, please contact Volvo at:
`` 25
01 Safety
01
Occupant Weight Sensor
In the USA Volvo Cars of North America, LLC Customer Care Center 1 Volvo Drive P.O. Box 914 Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647 1-800-458-1552 In Canada Volvo Cars of Canada Corp. National Customer Service 175 Gordon Baker Road North York, Ontario M2H 2N7 1-800-663-8255
WARNING
· No objects that add to the total weight
on the seat should be placed on the front passenger's seat. If a child is seated in the front passenger's seat with any additional weight, this extra weight could cause the OWS system to enable the airbag, which might cause it to deploy in the event of a collision, thereby injuring the child.
· The seat belt should never be wrapped
around an object on the front passenger's seat. This could interfere with the OWS system's function.
· The front passenger's seat belt should
never be used in a way that exerts more pressure on the passenger than normal. This could increase the pressure exerted on the weight sensor by a child, and could result in the airbag being enabled, which might cause it to deploy in the event of a collision, thereby injuring the child.
WARNING
· Keep the following points in mind with
respect to the OWS system. Failure to follow these instructions could adversely affect the system's function and result in serious injury to the occupant of the front passenger's seat:
· The full weight of the front seat passen-
ger should always be on the seat cushion. The passenger should never lift him/herself off the seat cushion using the armrest in the door or the center console, by pressing the feet on the floor, by sitting on the edge of the seat cushion, or by pressing against the backrest in a way that reduces pressure on the seat cushion. This could cause OWS to disable the front, passenger's side airbag.
26
WARNING
· Do not place any type of object on the
front passenger's seat in such a way that jamming, pressing, or squeezing occurs between the object and the front seat, other than as a direct result of the correct use of the Automatic Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR) seat belt (see page 36).
· No objects should be placed under the
front passenger's seat. This could interfere with the OWS system's function.
01 Safety
Occupant Weight Sensor
01
27
01 Safety
01
Side impact protection (SIPS) airbags
General information
G032949 G024377 G032254
Location of the side impact (SIPS) airbags (front seats only)
As an enhancement to the structural side impact protection built into your vehicle, it is also equipped with Side Impact Protection System (SIPS) airbags.
The SIPS airbag system is designed to help increase occupant protection in the event of certain side impact collisions. The SIPS airbags are designed to deploy only during certain side-impact collisions, depending on the crash severity, angle, speed and point of impact.
SIPS airbag deployment
SIPS airbag deployment (one airbag) occurs only on the side of the vehicle affected by the impact. The airbags are not designed to deploy in all side impact situations.
SIPS decal on the front of the driver's door opening
NOTE
SIPS airbag deployment (one airbag) occurs only on the side of the vehicle affected by the impact. The airbags are not designed to deploy in all side impact situations.
Components in the SIPS airbag system This SIPS airbag system consists of a gas generator, the side airbag modules built into the outboard sides of both front seat backrests, and electronic sensors/wiring.
28
WARNING
· The SIPS airbag system is a supple-
ment to the structural Side Impact Protection System and the three-point seat belt system. It is not designed to deploy during collisions from the front or rear of the vehicle or in rollover situations.
· The use of seat covers on the front seats
may impede SIPS airbag deployment.
· No objects, accessory equipment or
stickers may be placed on, attached to or installed near the SIPS airbag system or in the area affected by SIPS airbag deployment.
· Never try to open or repair any compo-
nents of the SIPS airbag system. This should be done only by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
· In order for the SIPS airbag to provide
its best protection, both front seat occupants should sit in an upright position with the seat belt properly fastened.
· Failure to follow these instructions can
result in injury to the occupants of the vehicle in the event of an accident.
01 Safety
Side impact protection (SIPS) airbags
01
29
01 Safety
01
Volvo Inflatable Curtain (VIC)
General information
This system consists of inflatable curtains located along the sides of the roof liners, stretching from the center of both front side windows to the rear edge of the rear side door windows. It is designed to help protect the heads of the occupants of the front seats and the occupant of the outboard rear seating positions in certain side impact collisions.
In certain side impacts, both the Inflatable Curtain (VIC) and the Side Impact Airbag System (SIPS airbag) will deploy. The VIC and the SIPS airbag deploy simultaneously.
NOTE
If the inflatable curtain deploys, it remains inflated for approximately 3 seconds.
WARNING
· The VIC system is a supplement to the
Side Impact Protection System. It is not designed to deploy during collisions from the front or rear of the vehicle or in rollover situations.
· Never try to open or repair any compo-
nents of the VIC system. This should be done only by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
· Never hang heavy items from the ceiling
handles. This could impede deployment of the Inflatable Curtain.
· The cargo area and rear seat should not
be loaded to a level higher than 2 in. (5 cm) below the upper edge of the rear side windows. Objects placed higher than this level could impede the function of the Volvo Inflatable Curtain.
WARNING
In order for the VIC to provide its best protection, both front seat occupants and both outboard rear seat occupants should sit in an upright position with the seat belt properly fastened; adults using the seat belt and children using the proper child restraint system. Only adults should sit in the front seats. Children must never be allowed in the front passenger seat, see page 36 for guidelines. Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury to the vehicle occupants in an accident.
30
General information
G021018 G021842
01 Safety
Whiplash Protection System WHIPS
01
Whiplash Protection System (WHIPS) front seats only The WHIPS system consists of specially designed hinges and brackets on the front seat backrests designed to help absorb some of the energy generated in a collision from the rear (when the vehicle is rear-ended).
In the event of a collision of this type, the hinges and brackets of the front seat backrests are designed to change position slightly to allow the backrest/head restraint to help support the occupant's head before moving slightly rearward. This movement helps absorb some of the forces that could result in whiplash.
WARNING
· The WHIPS system is designed to sup-
plement the other safety systems in your vehicle. For this system to function properly, the three-point seat belt must be worn. Please be aware that no system can prevent all possible injuries that may occur in an accident.
· The WHIPS system is designed to func-
tion in certain collisions from the rear, depending on the crash severity, angle and speed.
WARNING
· Occupants in the front seats must never
sit out of position. The occupant's back must be as upright as comfort allows and be against the seat back with the seat belt properly fastened.
· If your vehicle has been involved in a
rear-end collision, the front seat backrests must be inspected by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician, even if the seats appear to be undamaged. Certain components in the WHIPS system may need to be replaced.
· Do not attempt to service any compo-
nent in the WHIPS system yourself.
`` 31
01 Safety
01
Whiplash Protection System WHIPS
WARNING
· Boxes, suitcases, etc. wedged behind
the front seats could impede the function of the WHIPS system.
· If the rear seat backrests are folded
down, cargo must be secured to prevent it from sliding forward against the front seat backrests in the event of a collision from the rear. This could interfere with the action of the WHIPS system.
WARNING
Any contact between the front seat backrests and the folded rear seat or a rear-facing child seat could impede the function of the WHIPS system. If the rear seat is folded down, the occupied front seats must be adjusted forward so that they do not touch the folded rear seat.
G018567
32
Volvo's Rollover Protection System utilizes the Roll Stability Control (RSC) function, which is designed to help minimize the risk of a rollover in emergency maneuvers or if a skid should occur.
RSC uses a gyroscopic sensor that registers the amount of change in the lateral angle at which the vehicle is leaning. Using this information, RSC calculates the likelihood of a rollover. If there is an imminent risk of a rollover, the Dynamic Stability and Traction Control system (DSTC) is activated, power to the engine is cut and the brakes are applied to one or more of the wheels until the vehicle regains stability.
For additional information on DSTC, see page 156.
WARNING
The vehicle's stability systems, including ROPS and RSC, do not replace the driver's responsibility for operating the vehicle in a safe manner. Speed and driving style should always be adapted to the current road, traffic and weather conditions. Posted speed limits should always be respected.
01 Safety
Rollover Protection System (ROPS)
01
33
01 Safety
01
Crash mode
Driving after a collision If the vehicle has been involved in a collision, the text SAFETY MODE SEE MANUAL may appear in the information display. This indicates that the vehicle's functionality has been reduced.
NOTE
This text can only be shown if the display is undamaged and the vehicle's electrical system is intact.
Safety mode is a feature that is triggered if one or more of the safety systems (e.g. front or side airbags, an inflatable curtain, or one or more of the seat belt pretensioners) has deployed. The collision may have damaged an important
G022831
function in the vehicle, such as the fuel lines, sensors for one of the safety systems, the brake system, etc.
WARNING
· Never attempt to repair the vehicle
yourself or to reset the electrical system after the vehicle has displayed SAFETY MODE SEE MANUAL. This could result in injury or improper system function.
· Restoring the vehicle to normal operat-
ing status should only be done by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
· After SAFETY MODE SEE MANUAL
has been displayed, if you detect the odor of fuel vapor, or see any signs of fuel leakage, do not attempt to start the vehicle. Leave the vehicle immediately.
Attempting to start the vehicle If damage to the vehicle is minor and there is no fuel leakage, you may attempt to start the vehicle. To do so:
1. Remove the remote control from the ignition slot.
2. Reinsert the remote in the ignition slot. The vehicle will then attempt to reset Safety mode to normal status.
3. Try to start the vehicle.
Moving the vehicle If the electrical system is able to reset system status to normal (SAFETY MODE SEE MANUAL will no longer be shown in the display), the vehicle may be moved carefully from its present position, if for example, it is blocking traffic. It should, however, not be moved farther than is absolutely necessary.
WARNING
Even if the vehicle appears to be drivable after Safety mode has been set, it should not be driven or towed (pulled by another vehicle). There may be concealed damage that could make it difficult or impossible to control. The vehicle should be transported on a flatbed tow truck to a trained and qualified Volvo service technician for inspection/ repairs.
34
01 Safety
Child safety
01
Children should be seated safely
Volvo recommends the proper use of restraint systems for all occupants including children. Remember that, regardless of age and size, a child should always be properly restrained in a vehicle.
Your vehicle is also equipped with ISOFIX/ LATCH attachments, which make it more convenient to install child seats.
Some restraint systems for children are designed to be secured in the vehicle by lap belts or the lap portion of a lap-shoulder belt. Such child restraint systems can help protect children in vehicles in the event of an accident only if they are used properly. However, children could be endangered in a crash if the child restraints are not properly secured in the vehicle. Failure to follow the installation instructions for your child restraint can result in your child striking the vehicle's interior in a sudden stop.
Holding a child in your arms is NOT a suitable substitute for a child restraint system. In an accident, a child held in a person's arms can be crushed between the vehicle's interior and an unrestrained person. The child could also be injured by striking the interior, or by being ejected from the vehicle during a sudden maneuver or impact. The same can also happen if the infant or child rides unrestrained on the seat. Other occupants should also be properly
restrained to help reduce the chance of injuring or increasing the injury of a child.
All states and provinces have legislation governing how and where children should be carried in a vehicle. Find out the regulations existing in your state or province. Recent accident statistics have shown that children are safer in rear seating positions than front seating positions when properly restrained. A child restraint system can help protect a child in a vehicle. Here's what to look for when selecting a child restraint system:
It should have a label certifying that it meets applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS 213) or in Canada, CMVSS 213.
Make sure the child restraint system is approved for the child's height, weight and development the label required by the standard or regulation, or instructions for infant restraints, typically provide this information.
In using any child restraint system, we urge you to carefully look over the instructions that are provided with the restraint. Be sure you understand them and can use the device properly and safely in this vehicle. A misused child restraint system can result in increased injuries for both the infant or child and other occupants in the vehicle.
When a child has outgrown the child safety seat, you should use the rear seat with the standard seat belt fastened. The best way to help protect the child here is to place the child on a cushion so that the seat belt is properly located on the hips (see the illustration on page 43). Legislation in your state or province may mandate the use of a child seat or cushion in combination with the seat belt, depending on the child's age and/or size. Please check local regulations. A specially designed and tested booster cushion can be obtained from your Volvo retailer. USA: for children weighing 33 80 lbs. (15 36 kg) and 38 54 inches (97 137 cm) in height Canada: for children weighing 40 80 lbs. (18 36 kg) and 40 54 inches (102 137 cm) in height
`` 35
01 Safety
01
Child safety
WARNING
· Do not use child safety seats or child
booster cushions/backrests in the front passenger's seat. We also recommend that children under 4 feet 7 inches (140 cm) in height who have outgrown these devices sit in the rear seat with the seat belt fastened.
· On hot days, the temperature in the
vehicle interior can rise very quickly. Exposure to these high temperatures for even a short period of time can cause heat-related injury or death. Small children are particularly at risk.
Automatic Locking Retractor/ Emergency Locking Retractor (ALR/ ELR) To make child seat installation easier, each seat belt (except for the driver's belt) is equipped with a locking mechanism to help keep the seat belt taut.
When attaching the seat belt to a child seat: 1. Attach the seat belt to the child seat
according to the child seat manufacturer's instructions.
2. Pull the seat belt out as far as possible.
3. Insert the seat belt latch plate into the buckle (lock) in the usual way.
4. Release the seat belt and pull it taut around the child seat.
A sound from the seat belt retractor will be audible at this time and is normal. The belt will now be locked in place. This function is automatically disabled when the seat belt is unlocked and the belt is fully retracted.
Volvo's recommendations Why does Volvo believe that no child should sit in the front seat of a vehicle? It's quite simple really. A front airbag is a very powerful device designed, by law, to help protect an adult.
Because of the size of the airbag and its speed of inflation, a child should never be placed in the front seat, even if he or she is properly belted or strapped into a child safety seat. Volvo has been an innovator in safety for over seventy-five years, and we'll continue to do our part. But we need your help. Please remember to put your children in the back seat, and buckle them up.
Volvo has some very specific recommendations:
· Always wear your seat belt. · Airbags are a SUPPLEMENTAL safety
device which, when used with a threepoint seat belt can help reduce serious
injuries during certain types of accidents. Volvo recommends that you do not disconnect the airbag system in your vehicle.
· Volvo strongly recommends that everyone
in the vehicle be properly restrained.
· Volvo recommends that ALL occupants
(adults and children) shorter than 4 feet 7 inches (140 cm) be seated in the back seat of any vehicle with a front passenger side airbag.
Drive safely!
36
Child restraints
01 Safety
Child restraint systems
01
G022840 G022847 G023269
Infant seat
There are three main types of child restraint systems: infant seats, convertible seats, and booster cushions. They are classified according to the child's age and size.
The following section provides general information on securing a child restraint using a three-point seat belt. Refer to page 4445 for information on securing a child restraint using ISOFIX lower anchors and/or top tether anchorages.
Convertible seat
WARNING
A child seat should never be used in the front passenger seat of any vehicle with a front passenger airbag not even if the "Passenger airbag off" symbol near the rear-view mirror is illuminated (on vehicles equipped with Occupant Weight Sensor). If the severity of an accident were to cause the airbag to inflate, this could lead to serious injury or death to a child seated in this position.
Booster cushion
WARNING
Always refer to the child restraint manufacturer's instructions for detailed information on securing the restraint.
`` 37
01 Safety
01
Child restraint systems
WARNING
· When not in use, keep the child restraint
system secured or remove it from the passenger compartment to help prevent it from injuring passengers in the event of a sudden stop or collision.
· A small child's head represents a con-
siderable part of its total weight and its neck is still very weak. Volvo recommends that children up to age 4 travel, properly restrained, facing rearward. In addition, Volvo recommends that children should ride rearward facing, properly restrained, as long as possible.
38
01 Safety
Infant seats
01
G022844 G023270
G023271
Securing an infant seat with a seat belt
Do not place the infant seat in the front passenger's seat
NOTE
Refer to page 4445 for information on securing a child restraint using ISOFIX lower anchors and/or top tether anchorages.
1. Place the infant seat in the rear seat of the vehicle.
2. Attach the seat belt to the infant seat according to the manufacturer's instructions.
Positioning the seat belt through the infant seat
WARNING
· An infant seat must be in the rear-facing
position only.
· The infant seat should not be positioned
behind the driver's seat unless there is adequate space for safe installation.
WARNING
A child seat should never be used in the front passenger seat of any vehicle with a front passenger airbag not even if the "Passenger airbag off" symbol near the rear-view mirror is illuminated (on vehicles equipped with Occupant Weight Sensor). If the severity of an accident were to cause the airbag to inflate, this could lead to serious injury or death to a child seated in this position.
3. Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch plate into the buckle (lock) until a distinct click is audible.
Fasten the seat belt
`` 39
01 Safety
01
Infant seats
G022846 G022850
Pull out the shoulder section of the seat belt
4. Pull the shoulder section of the seat belt out as far as possible to activate the belt's automatic locking function.
NOTE
The locking retractor will automatically release when the seat belt is unbuckled and allowed to retract fully.
5. Press the infant seat firmly in place, let the seat belt retract and pull it taut. A sound from the seat belt retractor's automatic locking function will be audible at this time and is normal. The seat belt should now be locked in place.
Ensure that the seat is securely in place 6. Push and pull the infant seat to ensure that
it is held securely in place by the seat belt.
WARNING
It should not be possible to move the child restraint more than 1 in. (2.5 cm) in any direction.
The infant seat can be removed by unbuckling the seat belt and letting it retract completely.
40
01 Safety
Convertible seats
01
Securing a convertible seat with a seat belt
G018630 G022847
Do not place the convertible seat in the front passenger's seat
NOTE
Refer to pages 44 and 45 for information on securing a child restraint using ISOFIX lower anchors and/or top tether anchorages.
Convertible seats can be used in either a forward or rearward-facing position, depending on the age and size of the child.
Route the seat belt through the convertible seat
WARNING
Always use a convertible seat that is suitable for the child's age and size. See the convertible seat manufacturer's recommendations.
1. Place the convertible seat in the rear seat of the vehicle.
WARNING
· A small child's head represents a con-
siderable part of its total weight and its neck is still very weak. Volvo recommends that children up to age 4 travel, properly restrained, facing rearward. In addition, Volvo recommends that children should ride rearward facing, properly restrained, as long as possible.
· Convertible child seats should be instal-
led in the rear seat only.
· A rear-facing convertible seat should not
be positioned behind the driver's seat unless there is adequate space for safe installation.
2. Attach the seat belt to the convertible seat according to the manufacturer's instructions.
`` 41
01 Safety
01
Convertible seats
time and is normal. The seat belt should now be locked in place.
G022848 G022849
G022850
Fasten the seat belt
3. Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch plate into the buckle (lock) until a distinct click is audible.
4. Pull the shoulder section of the seat belt out as far as possible to activate the belt's automatic locking function.
NOTE
The locking retractor will automatically release when the seat belt is unbuckled and allowed to retract fully.
5. Press the convertible seat firmly in place, let the seat belt retract and pull it taut. A sound from the seat belt retractor's automatic locking function will be audible at this
Pull out the shoulder section of the seat belt 6. Push and pull the convertible seat to
ensure that it is held securely in place by the seat belt.
WARNING
It should not be possible to move the child restraint more than 1 in. (2.5 cm) in any direction.
The convertible seat can be removed by unbuckling the seat belt and letting it retract completely.
Ensure that the seat is securely in place
WARNING
A child seat should never be used in the front passenger seat of any vehicle with a front passenger airbag not even if the "Passenger airbag off" symbol near the rear-view mirror is illuminated. If the severity of an accident were to cause the airbag to inflate, this could lead to serious injury or death to a child seated in this position.
42
Securing a booster cushion
01 Safety
Booster cushions
01
G022851 G022852
Position the child correctly on the booster cushion
Booster cushions are recommended for children who have outgrown convertible seats.
1. Place the booster cushion in the rear seat of the vehicle.
2. With the child properly seated on the booster cushion, attach the seat belt to or around the cushion according to the manufacturer's instructions.
3. Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch plate into the buckle (lock) until a distinct click is audible.
Positioning the seat belt
4. Ensure that the seat belt is pulled taut and fits snugly around the child.
WARNING
· The hip section of the three-point seat
belt must fit snugly across the child's hips, not across the stomach.
· The shoulder section of the three-point
seat belt should be positioned across the chest and shoulder.
· The shoulder belt must never be placed
behind the child's back or under the arm.
43
G021064 G018631
01 Safety
01
ISOFIX lower anchors
Using the ISOFIX lower child seat anchors
ISOFIX lower child restraint anchors Lower anchors for ISOFIX-equipped child seats are located in the rear, outboard seats, hidden below the backrest cushions. Symbols on the seat back upholstery mark the anchor positions as shown. To access the anchors, kneel on the seat cushion and locate the anchors by feel. Always follow your child seat manufacturer's installation instructions, and use both ISOFIX lower anchors and top tethers whenever possible. To access the anchors 1. Put the child restraint in position.
2. Kneel on the child restraint to press down the seat cushion and locate the anchors by feel.
3. Fasten the attachment on the child restraint's lower straps to the ISOFIX lower anchors.
4. Firmly tension the lower child seat straps according to the manufacturer's instructions.
NOTE
· The rear seat's center position is not
equipped with ISOFIX lower anchors. When installing a child restraint in this position, attach the restraint's top tether strap (if it is so equipped) to the top tether anchorage point and secure the restraint with the vehicle's center seat belt.
· Always follow your child seat manufac-
turer's installation instructions, and use both ISOFIX lower anchors and top tethers whenever possible.
Fasten the attachment correctly to the ISOFIX lower anchors
WARNING
· Be sure to fasten the attachment cor-
rectly to the anchor (see the illustration). If the attachment is not correctly fastened, the child restraint may not be properly secured in the event of a collision.
· The ISOFIX lower child restraint
anchors are only intended for use with child seats positioned in the outboard seating positions. These anchors are not certified for use with any child restraint that is positioned in the center seating position. When securing a child restraint in the center seating position, use only the vehicle's center seat belt.
44
Child restraint anchorages
Refer also to the child seat manufacturer's instructions for information on securing the child seat.
NOTE
On models equipped with the optional cargo area cover, this cover should be removed before a child seat is attached to the child restraint anchors.
G017676
Your Volvo is equipped with child restraint top tether anchorages in the rear seat. They are located on the rear side of the backrests.
Securing a child seat 1. Place the child restraint on the rear seat.
2. Route the top tether strap under the head restraint and attach it to the anchor.
3. Attach lower tether straps to the lower ISOFIX/LATCH anchors. If the child restraint is not equipped with lower tether straps, or the restraint is used in the center seating position, follow instructions for securing a child restraint using the Automatic Locking Retractor seat belt (see page 36).
4. Firmly tension all straps.
01 Safety
Top tether anchors
01
WARNING
· Never route a top tether strap over the
top of the head restraint. The strap should be routed beneath the head restraint.
· Child restraint anchorages are designed
to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts or harnesses. The anchorages are not able to withstand excessive forces on them in the event of collision if full harness seat belts or adult seat belts are installed to them. An adult who uses a belt anchored in a child restraint anchorage runs a great risk of suffering severe injuries should a collision occur.
· Do not install rear speakers that require
the removal of the top tether anchors or interfere with the proper use of the top tether strap.
45
01 Safety
01
Child restraint registration and recalls
Registering a child restraint
Child restraints could be recalled for safety reasons. You must register your child restraint to be reached in a recall. To stay informed about child safety seat recalls, be sure to fill out and return the registration card that comes with new child restraints.
Child restraint recall information is readily available in both the U.S. and Canada. For recall information in the U.S., call the U.S. Government's Auto Safety Hotline at 1-800-424-9393. In Canada, visit Transport Canada's Child Safety website at http://www.tc.gc.ca/ roadsafety/childsafety/menu.htm.
46
01 Safety
Integrated booster cushion
01
Integrated two-stage booster cushion*1 Volvo's optional integrated booster cushions are located in the outboard seating positions. These booster cushions have been specially designed to help safeguard children in the rear seat. They should be stowed (folded down into the seat cushion) when not in use. When using an integrated booster cushion, the child must be secured with the vehicle's three-point seat belt.
Use these booster cushions only with children whose weight is between:
· Stage 1: 48 80 lbs (22 36 kg) · Stage 2: 33 55 lbs (15 25 kg)
and whose height is between:
· Stage 1: 45 55 in. (115 140 cm) · Stage 2: 37 47 in. (95 120 cm)
In Canada, Transport Canada's weight recommendation is 40 80 lbs (18 36 kg).
The booster cushions are designed to raise the child higher, so that the shoulder strap crosses over the child's collarbone, not over the child's neck. If using a booster cushion does not result
in proper positioning of the shoulder strap, then the child should be placed in a properly secured child restraint (see page 37). The shoulder belt must never be placed behind the child's back or under the arm.
Correct seating position: child's head is below the head restraint and the shoulder belt is across the collarbone
G017875 G017719
Incorrect seating position: the child's head is above the head restraint and the shoulder belt is not across the collarbone
Before driving, check that:
· The integrated two-stage booster cushion
is set in the correct position for according to the child's height and weight (see the table below) and is locked in position.
Stage 1
Stage 2
Weight 48 80 lbs 22 36 kg
33 55 lbs 15 25 kg
Height
45 55 in.
37 47 in.
115 140 cm 95 120 cm
1 Canada only: This cushion may be referred to as a built-in booster cushion.
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
47
01 Safety
01
Integrated booster cushion
· That the seat belt is properly positioned
and is taut.
· The shoulder section of the seat belt is
across the child's collarbone, not over the neck.
· The lap section of the seat belt is across
the child's hips and not the abdomen.
Using an integrated booster cushion
Stage 1
Pull the handle (1) forward and upward (2) to release the booster cushion.
Press the booster cushion rearward to lock it in position.
Stage 2
G017697 G017784
With the booster cushion in the stage 1 position, press the button (see the arrow in illustration 1).
Lift the front edge of the booster cushion and press it rearward toward the backrest to lock it in position.
48
Stowing the two-stage integrated booster cushion
01 Safety
Integrated booster cushion
01
NOTE
The booster cushion cannot be moved from the stage 2 (upper) position to the stage 1 (lower) position. It must first be folded down completely to the stowed position, and then adjusted to stage 1.
Pull the handle forward to release the booster cushion. Press down on the center of the booster cushion to return it to the stowed position.
NOTE
The booster cushion must be in the stowed position before the rear seat backrests are folded down.
CAUTION
Be sure there are no loose objects under the booster cushion before it is stowed.
WARNING
DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY can occur
Follow all instructions on the booster cushion and in the vehicle's owner's manual.
MAKE SURE THE BOOSTER CUSHION IS SECURELY LOCKED BEFORE THE CHILD IS SEATED.
· Use this booster cushion only with chil-
dren whose height and weight are within the permitted limits shown in the table see page 47.
· In the event of a collision while the inte-
grated booster cushion was occupied, the entire booster cushion and seat belt must be replaced. The booster cushion should also be replaced if it is badly worn or damaged in any way. This work should be performed by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician only.
The booster cushion can be folded down completely (stowed) from either the stage 1 or stage 2 positions.
49
01 Safety
01
Child safety locks
Child safety locks
G021077 G019300
Manual child safety locks rear doors The controls are located on the rear door jambs. Use the remote control's key blade or a screwdriver to adjust these controls.
The rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the slot is in the horizontal position.
The rear doors can be opened from the inside when the slot is in the vertical position.
Power child safety locks* The power child lock function can be activated by pressing the button shown in the inset illustration above. The ignition must be in mode I or II (see page 79).
When the function is activated, a message will appear in the information display and the indicator light in the button will light up.
With the function activated:
· The rear door windows can only be opened
with the control in the driver's door.
· The rear doors cannot be opened from the
inside.
NOTE
There are no manual child safety locks on vehicles equipped with the optional power child safety locks.
WARNING
Remember, in the event of an accident, the rear seat passengers cannot open the doors from the inside with the controls in position A (manual child safety locks) or if the power child safety lock function is activated.
50
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
01 Safety
01
51
Remote key and key blade..................................................................... 54 Keyless drive........................................................................................... 61 Locks....................................................................................................... 64 Alarm....................................................................................................... 66
52
LOCKS AND ALARM
02
02 Locks and alarm
Remote key and key blade
Introduction
produced. This code is available at an author- Canada-5WK49264
02
Two remote keys or optional Personal Car Communicators (PCC) are provided with your vehicle. They enable you to unlock the doors and tailgate, and also function as ignition keys to start the vehicle or operate electrical components. The remote keys contain detachable metal key blades for manually locking or unlocking the driver's door and the glove com-
ized Volvo retailer.
Loss of a remote key If a remote key is lost, the other one must be taken with the vehicle to a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. As an anti-theft measure, the code of the lost remote must be erased from the system.
IC:267T-5WK49264 + Siemens VDO 5WK49236
IC:267T-5WK49236, 5WK49266
IC:267T-5WK49266 + Siemens VDO 5WK49233
IC:267T-5WK49233
partment. Up to six remotes can be pro-
The number of registered keys for the vehicle Operation is subject to the following condi-
grammed for use on the same vehicle.
can be found in the vehicle's menu under Car tions: (1) this device may not cause interfer-
The PCCs have enhanced functionality compared with the standard remote key.
settings Car key memory Number of keys. See page 122 for a description of the menu system.
ence, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
NOTE
In the remainder of this chapter, all references to the remote key also pertain to the PCC unless otherwise stated.
WARNING
Never leave the remote key in the ignition if children are to remain in the vehicle.
Detachable key blade Each remote key or PCC contains a detachable metal key blade for mechanically locking or unlocking the driver's door and the glove compartment. See page 59 for more information on the key blade. The key blades have a unique code, which is used if new ones need to be
USA-5WK49264
FCC ID:KR55WK49264 + Siemens VDO 5WK49236
FCC ID:KR55WK49236, 5WK49266
FCC ID:KR55WK49266 + Siemens VDO 5WK49233
FCC ID:KR55WK49233
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Key memory door mirrors and driver's seat The position of the side door mirrors and optional power driver's seat are stored in the remote keys when the vehicle is locked. The next time the driver's door is unlocked with the same remote key and the door is opened within 2 minutes, the power driver's seat and side door mirrors will automatically move to the position that they were in when the doors were most recently locked with the same remote key. See page 82 for more information.
This feature can be activated or deactivated in the vehicle's menu under Car settings Car
key memory Seat & mirror positions. See
54
02 Locks and alarm
Remote key and key blade
page 122 for a description of the menu system.
See also page 61 for information regarding vehicles with the optional keyless drive.
Confirmation when locking/unlocking the vehicle When the vehicle is locked with a remote key, the turn signals will flash once to confirm that this has been completed correctly.
When the vehicle is locked, confirmation will only be given if all of the locks are locked after the doors have been closed.
NOTE
If you do not receive confirmation when locking the vehicle, check whether a door or the tailgate is ajar, or if this feature has been turned off in the menu.
This function can be activated or deactivated under Car settings Light settings Lock confirmation, light, or Car settings Light settings Unlock confirmation, light. See page 122 for a description of the menu system.
Immobilizer (start inhibitor) Each of the keys supplied with your vehicle contains a coded transponder. The code in the key is transmitted to an antenna in the ignition slot where it is compared to the code stored in the start inhibitor module. The vehicle will start only with a properly coded key. If you misplace a key, take the other keys to a trained and qualified Volvo service technician for reprogramming as an antitheft measure. The following messages (which may appear in the instrument panel display) are related to the immobilizer:
Message
Meaning
Key error Reinsert Remote key not rec-
02
key
ognized during start.
Try to start the vehi-
cle again.
Car key Not found
PCC with keyless drive only. Remote key not recognized during start. Try to start the vehicle again.
Immobilizer See manual
Remote key fault during start. Contact an authorized Volvo workshop.
CAUTION
Never use force when inserting the remote key in the ignition slot. The vehicle cannot be started if the transponder is damaged.
USAFCC ID: LTQWFS 125VO
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following condition: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
``
55
02 Locks and alarm
Remote key and key blade
CanadaIC: 3659A-WFS125VO
Common functions Remote key/
02
Operation is subject to the following condi-
tions: (1) this device may not cause interfer-
Personal Car Communicator (PCC)
ence, and (2) this device must accept any inter-
ference, including interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
See page 106 for information on starting the vehicle.
Replacing the battery in the remote key The batteries should be replaced if:
· The information symbol illuminates and
Replace car key battery is shown in the display and/or
· if the locks do not react after several
attempts to unlock or lock the vehicle.
Remote key
NOTE
The remote key's range is normally approximately 60 ft (20 m) from the vehicle.
See page 59 for information on replacing the battery.
Personal Car Communicator (PCC)* Lock Unlock
56
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
G021079
G021078
Approach lighting
Tailgate unlock/open
Panic alarm
Information
Buttons on the remote Lock Press the Lock button on the remote once to lock all doors and the tailgate. The turn signals will flash once to confirm locking.
Unlock Press the Unlock button on the remote once to unlock the driver's door.
After a short pause, press the Unlock button a second time within 10 seconds to unlock the other doors and the tailgate.
This function can be changed so that all doors unlock at the same time under Car settings
lock settings Doors, unlock. See page 122 for a description of the menu system.
Approach lighting As you approach the vehicle, press the button on the remote key to light the interior lighting, parking lights, license plate lighting and the lights in the door mirrors*.
These lights will switch off automatically after 30, 60 or 90 seconds, see page 122 for more information.
02 Locks and alarm
Remote key and key blade
Unlock tailgate Press the button once to
To deactivate, wait approximately 5 seconds
Functions PCC
disarm the alarm system and optional move-
and press the button again.
ment sensor (the alarm indicator light on the
These lights will switch off automatically after
02
dashboard will go out), and unlock only the
30, 60 or 90 seconds, see page 122 for more
tailgate.
information.
NOTE
· Pressing this button for several seconds
also opens the tailgate on models equipped with the optional power tailgate.
· As an added safety precaution, the
parking lights will come on automatically for a short period when the tailgate has been opened.
After closing, the tailgate will not automatically relock. Press Lock to relock it and rearm the alarm.
The Panic alarm button will not unlock the vehicle.
Range The remote key has a range of approximately 60 ft. (20 m) from the vehicle.
NOTE
Buildings or other obstacles may interfere with the function of the remote key. The vehicle can also be locked or unlocked with the key blade, see page 59.
Information button
Indicator lights
Pressing the information button provides certain information about the vehicle with the help of the indicator lights.
G021080
See also the section "Unlocking the tailgate from the passenger compartment.
Panic alarm This button can be used to attract attention during emergency situations.
To activate the panic alarm, press and hold this button for at least 3 seconds or press it twice within 3 seconds. The turn signals and horn will be activated. The panic alarm will stop automatically after 2 minutes and 45 seconds.
Using the information button 1. Press the information button .
2. All of the indicator lights will flash sequentially for approximately 7 seconds to indicate that the PCC is receiving information from the vehicle. If any of the buttons are pressed during this 7-second period, transmission of information to the PCC will be interrupted.
`` 57
02 Locks and alarm
Remote key and key blade
NOTE
02
If none of the indicator lights flash when the
information button has been pressed sev-
eral times from different places in relation to
the vehicle, contact an authorized Volvo
service technician.
The indicator lights provide information according to the illustration:
inside the vehicle. These lights are only activated if the alarm has been triggered. Steady red light: the alarm has been triggered.
Range The PCC's lock and unlock functions have a range of approximately 60 ft. (20 m) from the vehicle.
NOTE
If more than one PCC is used to lock/unlock the vehicle, only the one used most recently will show the correct locking status.
NOTE
If none of the indicator lights illuminate when the information button is pressed, this may be because the most recent transmission between the vehicle and the PCC was interrupted or impeded by buildings or other objects.
Steady green light: the vehicle is correctly locked.
Steady yellow light: the vehicle is not locked.
Alternatively flashing red lights (Heartbeat sensor): if the two heartbeat sensor lights flash, this indicates that someone may be
G030262
· The approach lighting, panic alarm, and
the functions controlled by the information button have a range of approximately 300 ft (100 m) from the vehicle.
· Buildings or other obstacles may inter-
fere with the function of the PCC.
Outside of the PCC´s range If the PCC is more than approximately 300 ft (100 m) from the vehicle when the information button is pressed, no new information will be received. The PCC most recently used to lock or unlock the vehicle will show the vehicle's most recently received status. The indicator lights will not flash when the information button is pressed while the PCC is out of range.
Heartbeat Sensor The heartbeat sensor function is a complement to the vehicle's standard alarm, and indicates at a distance of up to 300 ft (100 m) that someone may be in the vehicle. The heartbeat sensor only functions if the alarm has been triggered.
NOTE
The heartbeat sensor registers a person's heartbeat in the form of vibrations in the vehicle's chassis. For this reason, the sensor's function may be impaired in areas with high levels of noise or vibrations.
Keyless drive Vehicles equipped with the optional Personal Car Communicator have the keyless drive
58
02 Locks and alarm
Remote key and key blade
function, see page 61 for detailed information.
Detachable key blade The key blade can be removed from the remote key. When removed, the key blade can be used as follows: · To lock/unlock the driver's door · To lock/unlock the glove compartment
(see page 64)
Unlocking the doors with the detached key blade Insert the key blade as far as possible in the driver's door lock. Turn the key blade clockwise approximately one-quarter turn to unlock the driver's door only.
NOTE
After unlocking the driver's door with the key blade, opening the door will trigger the alarm.
To disable the alarm: Insert the remote key in the ignition slot.
Locking the doors with the detached key blade 1. Lock the rear doors and the front passeng-
er's door by pressing the lock button on each door. 2. Turn the key blade one-quarter turn counter-clockwise to lock the driver's door. Removing the key blade
Slide the spring loaded catch to the side. Pull the key blade straight out of the remote key. Reinserting the key blade in the remote key 1. Hold the remote key with the slot for the key blade up. 2. Carefully slide the key blade into its groove.
G021082
3. Gently press the key blade in the groove until it clicks into place. 02
Replacing batteries in the remote key/ PCC The battery/batteries in the remote key/PCC should be replaced if: · The information symbol lights up and a text
is shown in the information display. and/or
· the vehicle's locks repeatedly do not react
when a button on the remote key/PCC is pressed within approximately 60 ft (20 m) from the vehicle.
`` 59
02 Locks and alarm
Remote key and key blade
NOTE
Re-assembling the remote key
1. Press the remote key's cover into place.
02
Turn the remote key with the buttons
upward so that the batteries do not fall out
2. Hold the remote key with the slot for the
when the cover is removed.
key blade up.
Replacing the batteries
CAUTION
When handling batteries, avoid touching their contact surfaces as this could result in poor battery function in the remote key.
3. Carefully slide the key blade into its groove.
4. Gently press the key blade in the groove until it clicks into place.
Old batteries should be properly recycled.
Battery type CR 2430, 3 V (one battery in the remote key, two batteries in the PCC)
Opening the remote key/PCC Slide the spring loaded catch to the
side.
Pull the key blade straight out of the remote key.
Insert a small screwdriver in the hole behind the spring loaded catch and carefully pry up the cover.
Note the position of the battery's (+) or () sides.
Remote key (one battery) 1. Use a screwdriver to pry out the old bat-
tery.
2. Insert a new one with the (+) side downward.
PCC (two batteries) 1. Use a screwdriver to pry out the old bat-
teries.
2. Insert the first new battery with the (+) side upward.
3. Insert the plastic spacer over the battery. Insert the second new battery on top of the plastic spacer, with the + side downward.
60
02 Locks and alarm
Keyless drive
Keyless drive (models with Personal Car Communicator only)
Keyless locking and unlocking
Both of the PCCs provided with the vehicle
Locking the vehicle
have the keyless function, and additional ones The doors and the tailgate can be locked by
can be ordered. The system can accommo-
pressing the lock button in any of the outside
02
date up to six PCCs.
door handles.
Range of the keyless drive remote key5 ft (1.5 meters)
This system makes it possible to unlock and lock the vehicle without having to press any buttons on the Personal Car Communicators (PCC). It is only necessary to have a keyless drive remote key in your possession to operate the central locking system.
NOTE
The buttons on the keyless drive remote key can also be used to lock and unlock the vehicle, see page 56 for more information.
The red rings in the illustration indicate the area around the vehicle covered by the keyless drive antennas.
Unlocking the vehicle
· A keyless drive remote key must be on the
same side of the vehicle as the door to be opened, and be within 5 feet (1.5 meters) of the lock or the tailgate (see the shaded areas in the illustration).
· Pull a door handle to unlock and open the
door or pull the tailgate opening control.
The number of doors that are unlocked at the same time can be set in the vehicle's menu system, under Car settings Lock settings
Keyless entry. See page 122 for a description of the menu system.
NOTE
If the PCC does not function normally (weak battery, etc.), the vehicle can be unlocked with the detachable key blade, see page 59.
NOTE
On keyless drive vehicles, the gear selector must be in the Park (P) position, all doors and the tailgate must be closed and the ignition must be switched off before the vehicle can be locked.
Keyless drive remote key and driver's seat/door mirror memory
· When you leave the vehicle with a PCC in
your possession and lock any door, the position of the driver's seat will be stored in the seat's memory.
· The next time a door is opened by a person
with the same PCC in his/her possession, the driver's seat and door mirrors will automatically move to the position that they were in when the door was most recently locked.
`` 61
02 Locks and alarm
Keyless drive
NOTE
CAUTION
For Automobile Use
02
If several people carrying PCCs approach
the vehicle at the same time, the driver's
· Keyless drive remote keys should never
be left in the vehicle. In the event of a
Canada IC:267T-5WK48952, 267T-5WK48964, 267T-5WK48891
seat and door mirrors will assume the positions they were in for the person who opens the driver's door.
break-in, a remote found in the vehicle could make it possible to start the engine.
NOTE This device complies with RSS -210 of Industry
See also page 82 for information on adjusting and storing the seat's position in the seat memory.
Keyless drive information messages If all of the PCCs are removed from the vehicle
· Electromagnetic fields or metal
obstructions can interfere with the keyless drive system. Avoid placing the remote key near cellular phones, metallic objects or e.g., in a metal briefcase.
Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
CAUTION
while the engine is running or if the ignition is
USA FCC ID:KR55WK48952, KR55WK48964 Changes or modifications not expressly
in mode II and all of the doors are closed, a
NOTE
approved by the manufacturer could void the
message will appear in the instrument panel display and an audible signal will sound.
When at least one PCC has been returned to
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause
user's authority to operate the equipment. Location of the keyless drive antennas
the car, the message will be erased in the dis- harmful interference, and (2) this device must
play and the audible signal will stop when:
accept interference received, including inter-
· A door has been opened and closed
ference that may cause undesired operation.
· The PCC has been inserted in the ignition
slot
· The READ button (see page 124 for the
location of this button) has been pressed.
CAUTION
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Siemens VDO
G021179
5WK48891
Tested To Comply With FCC Standards
62
The keyless drive system has a number of antennas located at various points in the vehicle.
On the tailgate, near the wiper motor
Left rear door handle
Ceiling, above the center of the rear seat
Under the floor of the cargo area, near the rear seat Right rear door handle
Under the rear section of the center console Under the front section of the center console.
WARNING
People with implanted pacemakers should not allow the pacemaker to come closer than 9 inches (22 cm) to any of the keyless drive system's antennas. This is to help prevent interference between the pacemaker and the keyless drive system.
02 Locks and alarm
Keyless drive
02
63
02 Locks and alarm
Locks
Locking and unlocking the vehicle
From inside the vehicle
Automatic relocking
02 From outside the vehicle The remote key locks all of the doors and the tailgate.
If the doors are unlocked, the locks will automatically reengage (re-lock) and the alarm will rearm after 2 minutes unless a door or the tailgate has been opened.
If the locks repeatedly do not react when the unlock button is pressed, it may be necessary to replace the batteries in the remote, see page 56. In this case the vehicle can be unlocked with the detachable key blade. See page 59 for information on removing the key blade from the remote key.
The first press on the unlock button unlocks the
Automatic locking When the vehicle starts to move, the doors and tailgate can be locked automatically. This feature can be turned on or off under Car settings
Lock settings Doors automatic lock. See page 122 for a description of the menu system.
driver's door and a second press unlocks the other doors and the tailgate (see also page
The lock buttons on the door panel can be used to lock or unlock all doors and the tailgate at
Glove compartment
56).
the same time.
NOTE
The vehicle cannot be locked if a door is open.
Unlocking ± Press the unlock button.
Locking ± Press the lock button after the front doors
have been closed.
· Each door can be locked individually with
the lock button on the respective doors. The door must be closed first.
· The door can be unlocked by pulling the
door handle once and opened by pulling the handle again.
The glove compartment can only be locked and unlocked using the detachable key blade in the remote key. See page 59 for information
G020548
64
02 Locks and alarm
Locks
on removing the key blade from the remote
> The alarm indicator light on the dash-
Unlocking the tailgate from the
key.
board will go out to indicate that the
passenger compartment
alarm is not monitoring the entire vehi-
02
Insert the key blade in the glove compart-
cle. The accessory movement and incli-
ment lock.
nation sensors will be automatically dis-
Turn the key blade 90 degrees clockwise.
connected.
Remove the key blade from the lock. Locking/unlocking the tailgate
Tailgate unlock button on the remote key Unlocking the tailgate with the remote key ± Press the tailgate unlock button on the
remote key to unlock (but not open1) the tailgate. See also page 56.
NOTE
· If the doors are locked while the tailgate
is open, the tailgate will remain unlocked until the vehicle is relocked by pressing the Lock button on the remote key.
· On keyless drive vehicles, the gear
selector must be in the Park (P) position, all doors and the tailgate must be closed and the ignition must be switched off before the vehicle can be locked.
Locking the tailgate with the remote key ± Press the lock button on the remote. See
also page 56.
± Press the button on the lighting panel to unlock (but not open) the tailgate.
NOTE
The taillights will illuminate automatically for a short period when the tailgate has been opened.
1 This button also opens, but does not close, the tailgate on models equipped with the optional power tailgate (see page 212).
65
02 Locks and alarm
Alarm
The alarm system
The alarm is automatically armed whenever the
02
vehicle is locked with the remote key or
optional Personal Car Communicator.
When armed, the alarm continuously monitors
NOTE
Do not attempt to repair any of the components in the alarm system yourself. This could affect the insurance policy on the vehicle.
Arming the alarm ± Press the Lock button on the remote key.
One long flash of the turn signals will confirm that the alarm is armed.
Alarm confirmation settings can be changed
a number of points on the vehicle. The following conditions will trigger the alarm:
· The hood is forced open.
The alarm indicator light
under Car settings Lock settings Keyless entry. See page 122 for a description of the menu system.
· The tailgate is forced open.
USA FCC ID: MAYDA 5823(3)
· A door is forced open.
· The ignition slot is tampered with.
· An attempt is made to start the vehicle with
a non-approved key (a key not coded to the car's ignition).
· If there is movement in the passenger com-
partment (if the vehicle is equipped with the accessory movement sensor).
· The vehicle is lifted or towed (if the vehicle
is equipped with the accessory inclination sensor).
· The battery is disconnected (while the
alarm is armed).
· The siren is disconnected when the alarm
is disarmed.
The status of the alarm system is indicated by the indicator light on the dashboard (see illustration):
· Indicator light off the alarm is not armed · The indicator light flashes at one-second
intervals the alarm is armed
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Canada IC: 4405A-DA 5823(3)
Movement sensor DA5823 by Dynex Operation is subject to the following conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
A message will appear in the information display if a fault should occur in the alarm system. Contact an authorized Volvo service technician.
· The indicator light flashes rapidly before
the remote key is inserted in the ignition
slot the alarm has been triggered.
66
02 Locks and alarm
Alarm
Disarming the alarm ± Press the Unlock button on the remote key.
> Two short flashes from the car's direction indicators confirm that the alarm has been deactivated and that all doors are unlocked.
Turning off (stopping) the alarm If the alarm is sounding, it can be stopped by pressing the Unlock button on the remote key or by inserting the remote key in the ignition slot. Two short flashes from the car's direction indicators confirm that the alarm has been turned off.
Other alarm-related functions
Automatic re-arming If the doors are unlocked, the locks will automatically reengage (re-lock) and the alarm will re-arm after 2 minutes unless a door or the tailgate has been opened.
Audible/visual alarm signal
· An audible alarm signal is given by a bat-
tery powered siren. The alarm cycle lasts for 30 seconds.
· The visual alarm signal is given by flashing
all turn signals for approximately 5 minutes or until the alarm is turned off.
Remote key not functioning If the remote key is not functioning properly, the alarm can be turned off and the vehicle can be started as follows: 1. Open the driver's door with the key blade.
> This will trigger the alarm. 2. Insert the remote key into the ignition slot.
This will turn off the alarm. Reduced alarm function Turning off the accessory alarm sensors
Navigation (left/rght/up/down) buttons ENTER MENU EXIT
G031384
In certain situations it may be desirable to turn
off the accessory inclination and movement
alarm sensors if, for example, you drive your
02
vehicle onto a ferry where the rocking of the
boat could trigger the alarm or if a pet is left in
the vehicle with the doors locked.
The vehicle's menu system is used for turning off these sensors (see page 122 for a description of the menu system).
1. Go into the menu under Car settings.
2. Select Reduced guard (Press Enter to choose).
3. Two alternatives are now available:
· Activate once. If this alternative is
selected, Reduced guardsee manual will appear in the instrument panel display and the accessory inclination and movement alarm sensors will be deactivated when the vehicle is locked.
· Ask on exit. If this alternative is
selected, the message Press ENTER to reduce guard until engine is started--Press EXIT to cancel will appear in the center console display each time the engine is turned off and the accessory inclination and movement alarm sensors will be deactivated when the vehicle is locked.
`` 67
02 Locks and alarm
Alarm
4. Press ENTER and lock the vehicle.
02
The next time the engine is started, the alarm
system will be reset and Full guard will appear
in the instrument panel display. The accessory
inclination and movement alarm sensors will be
reactivated.
In either of the alternatives, if you prefer not to deactivate the accessory inclination and movement alarm sensors, do not make a choice in the menu or press EXIT and lock the vehicle.
68
02 Locks and alarm
02
69
Instruments and controls........................................................................ 72 Ignition modes........................................................................................ 79 Seats....................................................................................................... 81 Steering wheel........................................................................................ 87 Lighting................................................................................................... 88 Wipers and washers................................................................................ 94 Power windows....................................................................................... 97 Mirrors..................................................................................................... 99 Laminated panoramic roof* .................................................................. 101 HomeLink® Wireless Control System*................................................. 103 Starting the engine................................................................................ 106 Transmission......................................................................................... 110 Brakes................................................................................................... 113 Hill Descent Control (HDC)................................................................... 115 Parking brake........................................................................................ 117
G020912
70
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
YOUR DRIVING ENVIRONMENT
03
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls Instrument overview
03
72
Function
Page
Menus and messages, turn signals, high/low beams, trip computer
122, 91, 88, 153
Cruise control
159
Horn, airbag
87, 20
Main instrument
73
panel
Audio system/Blue- 133, 147 tooth hands-free controls
START/STOP
79
ENGINE button
Ignition slot
79
Information display -
Door handle
In-door control panels (power windows, mirrors, power child safety locks, central locking button)
97, 99, 50, 64
03 Your driving environment
Function
Hazard warning flashers
Audio system controls
Climate system controls
Page 91 133 128
Gear selector
110
Controls for active 158 chassis (Four-C)*
Wipers and washers 94, 95
Steering wheel
87
adjustment
Hood opening con- 229 trol
Parking brake
117
Power seat* adjust- 81 ment controls
Lighting panel, controls for opening fuel filler door/tailgate
88, 210, 65
Instruments and controls Information displays
03
Information displays in the instrument panel The information displays (1) show information on some of the vehicle's functions, such as cruise control, the trip computer and messages. The information is shown with text and symbols. More detailed information can be found in the descriptions of the functions that use the information displays.
G010604
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
73
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
Gauges
Indicator, information, and warning symbols
for faults in the vehicle's emissions system and the symbol for low oil pressure.
Certain symbols may not have their functions illustrated, depending on the vehicle's equipment.
03
Indicator and information symbols
Symbol Description
Fault in the Active Bending Light (ABL)*system
G010605 G010604
Gauges in the instrument panel
Speedometer
Fuel gauge. Please note that the fuel level indicator in the gauge moves from right to left as the amount of fuel in the tank decreases. See also the section on refueling beginning on page 208. See page 153 for more information on fuel level and consumption.
The tachometer shows engine speed in thousands of revolutions per minute (rpm). Do not drive continuously with the needle in the red area of the gauge. The engine management system will automatically prevent excessively high engines speeds. This will be noticeable as a pronounced unevenness in engine speed.
Indicator and warning symbols Indicator and information symbols
Indicator and warning symbols
High beam and turn signal indicators
Function check All indicator and warning symbols light up in ignition mode II or when the engine is started. When the engine has started, all the symbols should go out except the parking brake symbol, which only goes out when the brake is disengaged.
If the engine does not start or if the function check is carried out in ignition mode II, all symbols go out after 5 seconds except the symbol
Malfunction indicator light
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
Rear fog light on
Stability system
Tire pressure monitoring sensor (TPMS) Low fuel level
Information symbol, see text in information display High beam indicator
74
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
Symbol
Description Left turn signal indicator
Right turn signal indicator
Fault in the Active Bending Light (ABL) system This symbol will illuminate if the there is a fault in the ABL system.
Malfunction Indicator Light As you drive, a computer called On-Board Diagnostics II (OBDII) monitors your vehicle's engine, transmission, electrical and emission systems.
The malfunction indicator (CHECK ENGINE) light will illuminate if the computer senses a condition that potentially may need correcting. When this happens, please have your vehicle checked by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician as soon as possible.
A malfunction indicator (CHECK ENGINE) light may have many causes. Sometimes, you may not notice a change in your car's behavior. Even so, an uncorrected condition could hurt fuel economy, emission controls, and drivability. Extended driving without correcting the
cause could even damage other components in your vehicle.
Rear fog light This symbol indicates that the rear fog light
This light may illuminate if the fuel filler cap is (located in the driver's side tail light cluster) is
not closed tightly or if the engine was running on.
while the vehicle was refueled.
Stability system
Canadian models are equipped with this This indicator symbol flashes when the DSTC
03
symbol.
(Dynamic Stability and Traction Control sys-
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
tem) is actively working to stabilize the vehicle, see page 156 for more detailed information.
warning light If the warning light comes on, there may be a
Tire pressure monitoring system
malfunction in the ABS system (the standard
(TPMS)*
braking system will still function). Check the
This symbol illuminates to indicate that tire
system by:
pressure in one or more tires is low, see
page 273 for detailed information. 1. Stopping in a safe place and switching off
the ignition.
Low fuel level
2. Restart the engine.
3. If the warning light goes off, no further action is required.
If the warning light remains on, the vehicle should be driven to a trained and qualified Volvo service technician for inspection, see page 113 for additional information.
When this light comes on, the vehicle should be refueled as soon as possible.
Information symbol The information symbol illuminates and a text message is displayed if a fault is detected in one of the vehicle's systems. The message can be erased and the symbol can be turned off by pressing the READ button (see page 124 for
Canadian models are equipped with this symbol.
information) or this will take place automatically after a short time (the length of time varies, depending on the function affected).
The information symbol may also illuminate together with other symbols.
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
75
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
High beam indicator This symbol illuminates when the high beam headlights are on, or if the high beam flash function is used.
Left turn signal indicator
03
Right turn signal indicator
NOTE
· Both turn signal indicators will flash
when the hazard warning flashers are used.
· If either of these indicators flash faster
than normal, the direction indicators are not functioning properly.
Indicator and warning symbols Symbol Description Low oil pressure
Parking brake applied
SRS airbags
Seat belt reminder
Symbol Description Generator not charging Fault in the brake system Warning symbol
Canadian models are equipped with this symbol.
NOTE
This symbol also comes on when the mechanical parking brake is only slightly applied.
Low oil pressure If the light comes on while driving, stop the vehicle, stop the engine immediately, and check the engine oil level. If the oil level is normal and the light stays on after restart, have the vehicle towed to the nearest trained and qualified Volvo service technician. This is normal, provided it goes off when the engine speed is increased.
Parking brake applied This symbol illuminates when the parking brake is applied. On models equipped with the electric parking brake, this symbol flashes while the brake is being applied and then glows steadily.
A flashing symbol means that a fault has been detected. See the message in the information display.
Airbags SRS If this light comes on while the vehicle is being driven, or remains on for longer than approximately 10 seconds after the vehicle has been started, the SRS system's diagnostic functions have detected a fault in a seat belt lock or pretensioner, a front airbag, side impact airbag, and/or an inflatable curtain. Have the system(s) inspected by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician as soon as possible.
Seat belt reminder This symbol comes on for approximately 6 seconds if the driver has not fastened his or her seat belt.
Generator not charging This symbol comes on during driving if a fault has occurred in the electrical system. Contact an authorized Volvo workshop.
Engine temperature Engine overheating can result from low oil or coolant levels, towing or hard driving at high
76
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
heat and altitude, or mechanical malfunction. Engine overheating will be signaled with text and a red warning triangle in the middle of the instrument display. The exact text will depend on the degree of overheating. It may range from "HIGH ENGINE TEMP SLOW DOWN" to "HIGH ENGINE TEMP STOP ENGINE." If appropriate, other messages, such as "COOLANT LEVEL LOW" will also be displayed. If your engine does overheat so that you must stop the engine, always allow the engine to cool before attempting to check oil and coolant levels.
Fault in brake system
If this symbol lights, the brake fluid level may be too low. Stop the vehicle in a safe place and check the level in the brake fluid reservoir, see page 232. If the level in the reservoir is below MIN, the vehicle should be transported to an authorized Volvo workshop to have the brake system checked.
Canadian models are equipped with this symbol.
If the
and
symbols come on at the
same time, there may be a fault in the brake
force distribution system.
1. Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the engine.
2. Restart the engine.
· If both symbols extinguish, continue driv-
ing.
· If the symbols remain on, check the level in
the brake fluid reservoir, see page 232. If the brake fluid level is normal but the symbols are still lit, the vehicle can be driven, with great care, to an authorized Volvo workshop to have the brake system checked.
· If the level in the reservoir is below MIN, the
vehicle should be transported to an authorized Volvo workshop to have the brake system checked.
WARNING
· If the fluid level is below the MIN mark
in the reservoir or if a warning message is displayed in the text window: DO NOT DRIVE. Have the vehicle towed to a trained and qualified Volvo service technician and have the brake system inspected.
· If the ABS and Brake system lights are
on at the same time, there is a risk of reduced vehicle stability.
Warning symbol The red warning symbol comes on when a fault has been indicated which could affect the safety and/or drivability of the vehicle. An
explanatory text is shown on the information
display at the same time. The symbol remains
visible until the fault has been rectified but the
text message can be cleared with the READ
button, see page 124. The warning symbol can
also come on in conjunction with other sym-
bols.
03
Action:
1. Stop in a safe place. Do not drive the vehicle further.
2. Read the information on the information display. Implement the action in accordance with the message in the display. Clear the message using READ.
Reminder doors not closed If the vehicle is driven at a speed lower than approximately 5 mph
(7 km/h), the information symbol comes on.
If the vehicle is driven at a speed higher than approximately 5 mph (7 km/h), the warning symbol comes on.
`` 77
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls Trip odometers
Clock
03
G010608 G010609
Trip odometers and reset button
Odometer display
Button for toggling between T1 and T2, and for resetting the odometer
The trip odometers are used to measure short distances. A short press the button toggles between the two trip odometers T1 and T2. A long press (more than 2 seconds) resets an active trip odometer to zero. The distance is shown in the display.
Clock and setting control Display
Control for setting the clock
Turn the control clockwise/counterclockwise to set the time. The set time is shown in the information display.
The clock may be temporarily replaced by a symbol in conjunction with a message, see page 124.
78
03 Your driving environment
Ignition modes
Inserting and removing the remote key from the slot. The gear selector must be in position P (Park).
NOTE
The brake pedal must not be depressed
Ignition modes
when accessing ignition modes I or II.
The various ignition modes are accessed with
the remote key in the ignition slot.
Ignition mode 0
Posi- Function
± Insert the remote key in the ignition slot and
03
press it lightly. It will be drawn into the slot.
tion Ignition mode I
0
Odometer, clock and tempera-
± Press the remote key into the ignition slot
ture gauge are illuminated. Steer-
and press START/STOP ENGINE.
Ignition slot with remote key and START/STOP ENGINE button.
ing lock is deactivated. The audio
system can be used.
Ignition mode II
± Press the remote key into the ignition slot
I
Laminated panoramic roof*,
and press START/STOP ENGINE for
Inserting the remote key Holding the end of the remote key with the base of the key blade, insert the remote key into the ignition slot, with the buttons facing up,
power windows,12-volt sockets, navigation system*, climate system blower, ECC, windshield wipers can be used.
approx. 2 seconds.
Ignition mode III (engine start) Start the engine, see page 106.
as shown in the illustration.
II
The headlights come on. Warn-
Stopping the engine
CAUTION
ing/indicator lights come on for 5 seconds. All equipment oper-
± Press START/STOP ENGINE. (If the engine is running and the vehicle is mov-
Foreign objects in the ignition slot can impair function or damage the lock.
Removing the remote key
ates apart from heated seats and rear window defroster, which only work when the engine is running.
ing, keep the button depressed until the engine stops).
Return to ignition mode 0 ± Press START/STOP ENGINE to return
The remote key can be removed from the igni-
III The starter motor will operate
from I, II, or III to ignition mode 0.
tion slot by pressing the key in lightly. It will
until the engine has started.
then be ejected slightly and can be removed
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
79
03 Your driving environment
Ignition modes
Functions with timer The audio system can be operated without a key for 15 minutes at a time by pressing the POWER button. The power windows work for several minutes after the key has been removed, although not after the door has been 03 opened.
NOTE
Use the POWER button for the audio system when the engine is not running to avoid discharging the battery.
80
03 Your driving environment
Front seats
WARNING
· Do not adjust the seat while driving. The
seat should be adjusted so that the brake pedal can be depressed fully. In addition, position the seat as far rearward as comfort and control allow.
· Check that the seat is securely locked
into position after adjusting.
Folding the front seat backrest
Lumbar support: turn the control for firmer or softer lumbar support.
Front-rear adjustment: lift the bar and move the seat to the position of your choice.
Raise/lower front edge of seat cushion, pump up/down.
Backrest tilt: turn the control to adjust the angle of the backrest.
Raise/lower the seat, pump up/down.
Control panel for power seat.
The front passenger seat backrest can be folded to a horizontal position to make room for a long load. Fold the backrest as follows:
Move the seat as far back as possible.
Adjust the backrest to an upright position.
Seats
Lift the catches (3 in the inset illustration) on the rear of the backrest.
Without releasing the catches, push the backrest forward.
Move the seat as far forward as possible
so that the head restraint slides under the
03
glove compartment.
WARNING
Cover sharp edges on the load to help prevent injury to occupants. Secure the load to help prevent shifting during sudden stops.
`` 81
03 Your driving environment
Seats
Power seat* 03
NOTE
· Only one of the power seat's controls
can be used at the same time.
· The power seats have an overload pro-
tector that activates if a seat is blocked by any object. If this occurs, switch off the ignition (key in position 0) and wait for a short period before operating the seat again.
Seat with memory function*
Front edge of seat cushion up/down
Seat forward/rearward and up/down
Backrest tilt
Operation The seats can be adjusted for a short period after unlocking the door with the remote control without the key in the ignition slot. Seat adjustment is normally made when the ignition is on and can always be made when the engine is running.
Stored seat position Stored seat position Stored seat position Memory button
Programming the memory Three different seating and door mirror positions can be stored in the driver seat's memory.
The following example explains how button (1) can be programmed. Buttons (2) and (3) can be programmed in the same way.
To program (store) a seat position and door mirror position in button (1):
1. Move the seat (and door mirrors) to the desired position using the seat and mirror adjustment controls.
2. Press and hold down the memory button (4).
3. With the memory button depressed, press button (1) briefly to store the current position for the seat/mirrors.
To move the seat and mirrors to the position that they were in when a button was programmed:
± Press and hold down button (1) until the seat and mirrors stop moving.
NOTE
As a safety precaution, the seat will stop automatically if the button is released before the seat has reached the preset position.
82
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
03 Your driving environment
Seats
Remote keyless entry system and the
NOTE
WARNING
driver's seat The remote control transmitter also controls the position of the power driver's seat in the following way:
1. Adjust the seat to your preferences.
2. When you leave your vehicle, lock it using the remote control.
· The key memory is independent of the
seat memory.
· The seat will move to this position even
if someone else has moved it to a different seating position and locked the vehicle with a different remote control.
· This feature will work in the same way
· Because the driver's seat can be
adjusted with the ignition off, children should never be left unattended in the vehicle.
· Movement of the seat can be STOPPED
03
at any time by pressing any button on
the power seat control panel.
The position of the driver's seat is now stored in the remote control's memory.
with all of the remote control transmitters that you use with your vehicle.
· Do not adjust the seat while driving. The
seat should be adjusted so that the
brake pedal can be depressed fully. In
Automatic seat adjustment To move the seat to the position in which you left it:
1. Unlock the driver's door with the same remote control (the one used to lock the
The function can be activated/deactivated under Car key memory Seat & mirror positions. For a description of the menu system, see the information beginning on page 122.
addition, position the seat as far rearward as comfort and control allow.
· The seat rails on the floor must not be
obstructed in any way when the seat is in motion.
doors)
2. Open the driver's door within 2 minutes.
Emergency stop If the seat accidentally begins to move, press
Heated seats* See page 128.
The driver's seat will automatically move to the one of the buttons to stop the seat.
position in which you left it.
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
83
03 Your driving environment
Seats Rear seats
Folding down the rear seat backrests
03
· The right (passenger's side) section can be
folded down together with the center section.
· All three sections can be folded down
together.
Release and lower the center head restraint if the center and/or right section of the backrest is to be lowered. The outboard head restraints fold down automatically.
Pull up the backrest release control on the respective section(s) and fold the section(s) down.
NOTE
It may be necessary to move the front seats forward or put their backrests in a more upright position before folding down the rear seat backrests.
The three sections of the rear seat backrest can be folded down in different combinations to make it easier to transport long objects.
· The left (driver's side) section can be folded
down separately.
· The center section can be folded down
separately.
WARNING
· When the backrest(s) are returned to the
upright position, check that it is properly locked in place. The red indicators should not be visible.
· Return the outboard head restraints to
the upright position.
· Long loads should always be securely
anchored to help avoid injury in the event of a sudden stop.
· Always turn the engine off and apply the
parking brake when loading/unloading the vehicle.
· Place the transmission in the Park (P)
position to help prevent inadvertent movement of the gear selector.
· On hot days, the temperature in the
vehicle interior can rise very quickly. Exposure of people to these high temperatures for even a short period of time can cause heat-related injury or death. Small children are particularly at risk.
84
03 Your driving environment
Rear center head restraint
Seats
restraint should be carefully adjusted to support the occupant's head.
Manually lowering the rear seat's outboard head restraints
· Pull the head restraint up as required.
· To lower, press and hold the button
(located at the center, between the back-
rest and the head restraint) while pressing
the head restrain down.
03
WARNING
The center rear seat head restraint should only be in its lowest position when this seat is NOT occupied. When the center position is occupied, the head restraint should be correctly adjusted to the passenger's height. The upper edge of the head restraint should be at least on a level with the uppermost point of the seat occupant's ear.
· Pull the handle closest to the head restraint
to fold it down.
· To return the head restraint to the upright
position, push it up until it clicks into place.
NOTE
· The head restraint must be returned to
the upright position manually.
· The outboard head restraints cannot be
folded down on models that are not equipped with this button.
The center head restraint should be adjusted according to the passenger's height. The
`` 85
03 Your driving environment
Seats
WARNING
For safety reasons, no one should be
allowed to sit in the outboard rear seat posi-
tions if the head restraints are folded down.
If these positions are occupied, the head
restraints should be in the upright (fixed)
03
position.
86
Adjusting
03 Your driving environment
WARNING
Never adjust the steering wheel while driving.
With the optional speed-dependent power steering the level of steering force can be adjusted, see page 158.
Keypads
Horn
Steering wheel
03
G021138
Adjusting the steering wheel Lever for releasing/locking the steering wheel
Possible positions
The steering wheel can be adjusted for both height and reach:
1. Pull the lever toward you to release the steering wheel.
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the position that suits you.
3. Push back the lever to lock the steering wheel in place. If the lever is difficult to push into place, press the steering wheel lightly at the same time as you push the lever.
Keypads in the steering wheel Cruise control, see page 159. Adaptive cruise control*, see page 173.
Audio controls, see page 133.
Horn
± Press the steering wheel hub to sound the horn.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
87
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
Lighting panel
03
High/low beam headlights
Daytime running lights can be deactivated by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
NOTE
· The use of daytime running lights is
mandatory in Canada.
· Continuous high beams cannot be acti-
vated when the headlight switch is in
position
or 0. High beam flash will
function in these positions.
Overview, light switches Thumb wheel for adjusting display and instrument lighting Rear fog light
Front fog lights
Headlights/parking lights
Instrument lighting Illumination of the display and instrument lights will vary, depending on ignition mode.
The display lighting is automatically subdued in darkness and the sensitivity is set with the thumb wheel.
The intensity of the instrument lighting is adjusted with the thumb wheel.
Headlight switch and lever
Daytime running lights/no high beams Parking lights
Low beams
Low beams When the engine is started, the low beams are activated automatically (daytime running lights) if the headlight control is in position 0 or
.
High beam flash ± Move the lever toward the steering wheel
to position . The high beams come on until the lever is released.
High/low beam headlights
Continuous high beams 1. Set the ignition to mode II.
2. With the light switch in position
, pull
the turn signal lever toward the steering
wheel to position to toggle between
high and low beams (this also applies on models equipped with the optional Active Bending Lights).
> The symbol
illuminates in the
instrument panel to indicate that the high beams are on.
88
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
Active Bending Lights (ABL)*
If a fault should occur in the system, the symbol will illuminate and a message will be displayed as shown in the table.
Parking lights
Headlight pattern with the Active Bending Light function deactivated (left) and activated (right)
When this function is activated, the headlight beams adjust laterally to help light up a curve according to movements of the steering wheel (see the right-pointing beam in the illustration).
ABL is activated automatically when the engine is started and it can be deactivated/reactivated in the menu system under Car settings Light settings Active bi xenon lights.
Symbol
Display
Headlamp failure Service required
Explanation
The system is not functioning properly and should be inspected/ repaired by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
03
Headlight control in position for parking lights The front and rear parking lights can be turned on even when the ignition is switched off. Turn the headlight control to the center position (the license plate lighting comes on at the same time). The lighting also comes on when the tailgate is opened in order to alert anyone traveling behind your vehicle.
NOTE
This function is only active in twilight or dark conditions, and only when the vehicle is in motion.
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
89
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
Brake lights The brake lights come on automatically when the brakes are applied.
Front fog lights
Rear fog light
Emergency brake lights (EBL) Emergency Brake Lights, EBL, activate in the 03 event of sudden braking or if the ABS system is activated. This function causes an additional taillight on each side of the vehicle to illuminate to help alert vehicles traveling behind.
The EBL function activates if:
· The ABS system activates for more than
approximately a half second
· In the event of sudden braking while the
vehicle is moving at speeds above approximately 6 mph (10 km/h)
When the vehicle has come to a stop, the brake lights and additional taillights remain on for as long as the brake pedal is depressed or until braking force on the vehicle is reduced.
Button for front fog lights
The front fog lights can be switched on together with high/low beams or the parking lights. However, the fog lights switch off and remain off while the high beams are on.
± Press the button to switch the fog lights on/ off. The light in the button comes on when the fog lights are on.
NOTE
Regulations regarding the use of the front fog lights may vary, depending on where you drive.
Button for rear fog light
The single rear fog light is located in the driver's side taillight cluster. The rear fog light will only function in combination with the high/low beam headlights or the optional front fog lights.
± Press the button to switch the rear fog light on/off.
> The rear fog light indicator symbol on the instrument panel and the
light in the button come on when the rear fog light is switched on.
90
03 Your driving environment
NOTE
The rear fog light is considerably brighter than the normal tail lights and should be used only when conditions such as fog, rain, snow, smoke or dust reduce visibility for other vehicles to less than 500 ft. (150 meters).
Hazard warning flashers
NOTE · Regulations regarding the use of the
hazard warning flasher may vary, depending on where you live.
· The hazard warning flashers will be acti-
vated automatically if an airbag deploys.
Turn signals
Lighting
When turning Move the lever as far up or down as possi-
ble to start the turn signals. The turn signals will be cancelled automatically by the movement of the steering wheel, or the lever can be returned to its initial position by hand.
03
NOTE
· This automatic flashing sequence can
be interrupted by immediately moving the lever in the opposite direction.
· If the turn signal indicator flashes faster
than normal, check for a burned-out turn signal bulb.
The hazard warning flasher should be used to indicate that the vehicle has become a traffic hazard.
± To activate the flashers, press the button in the center dash. Press the button again to turn off the flashers.
Turn signals
When changing lanes The driver can automatically flash the turn
signals 3 times by moving the turn signal lever up or down to the first position and releasing it.
`` 91
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
Interior lighting, front
Interior lighting, rear
Courtesy lights/door step lighting* The courtesy lights/door step lighting switch on/off automatically when one of the front doors is opened/closed.
Glove compartment lighting
03
The glove compartment lighting switches on/
off automatically when the lid is opened/
closed.
Light switches, front roof lighting Drivers side front reading light, on/off
Passenger's side front reading light, on/off
Overhead courtesy lighting.
The lighting in the front part of the passenger compartment is controlled with the buttons (1) and (2) in the roof console.
Switch (3) has three positions for all passenger compartment lighting:
· Off right side depressed, automatic light-
ing off.
· Neutral position. · On left side depressed, passenger com-
partment lighting on.
G021149 G021150
Rear reading lights
Rear reading lights (models with the optional laminated panoramic roof) The lights are switched on or off by pressing each respective button.
Overhead courtesy lighting The passenger compartment lighting is switched on and off automatically when button (3) is in the neutral position.
The lighting comes on and remains on for 30 seconds if:
· the vehicle is unlocked from the outside
with the key or remote control
· the engine is switched off and the ignition
is in mode 0.
The lighting switches off when:
· the engine is started · the vehicle is locked from the outside.
The lighting comes on and remains on for two minutes if one of the doors is open.
The passenger compartment lighting can be switched on and off manually within 30 minutes after the vehicle has been unlocked.
92
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
03 Your driving environment
If the lighting is switched on manually and the vehicle is locked, the courtesy lighting will switch off automatically after one minute.
Home safe lighting When you leave your vehicle at night, you can make use of the home safe lighting function to illuminate the area in front of the vehicle.
1. Remove the key from the ignition slot.
2. Pull the direction indicator lever as far as possible towards the steering wheel and release it.
3. Exit the vehicle and lock the doors.
The headlights, parking lights, turn signals, lights in the door mirrors, license plate lights, and footwell lighting will illuminate and remain on for 30 1, 60 or 90 seconds. The time interval can be set under Car settings Light settings Home safe lighting. For a description of the menu system, see page 122.
Approach lighting Approach lighting is activated by pressing the approach light button on the remote key (see the illustration on page 56).
When the function has been activated, the parking lights, indicator lights, door mirror lights, license plate lighting, dome lighting and door step lighting come on.
The time interval for this lighting can be set under Car settings Light settings Approach lighting. For a description of the menu system, see page 122.
Lighting
03
1 Factory setting
93
03 Your driving environment
Wipers and washers
Windshield wipers/washers
03
Windshield wipers and washers Rain sensor* on/off Thumb wheel sensitivity/frequency
CAUTION · Use ample washer fluid when washing
the windshield. The windshield should be thoroughly wet when the wipers are in operation.
· Before using the wipers, ice and snow
should be removed from the windshield/rear window. Be sure the wiper blades are not frozen in place.
Windshield wipers off Move the lever to position 0 to switch off the windshield wipers.
Single sweep Move the lever upward from position 0 to sweep the windshield one stroke
at a time for as long as the lever is held up.
Intermittent wiping With the lever in this position, you can set the wiper interval by twisting the
thumb wheel upward to increase wiper speed or downward to decrease the speed.
Continuous wiping The wipers operate at normal speed.
The wipers operate at high speed.
Rain sensor* The rain sensor automatically regulates wiper speed according to the amount of water on the windshield. The sensitivity of the rain sensor can be adjusted moving the thumb wheel up (the wipers will sweep the windshield more frequently) or down (the wipers will sweep the windshield less frequently).
NOTE
The wipers will make an extra sweep each time the thumb wheel is adjusted upward.
When the rain sensor is activated, the symbol will illuminate in the instrument panel.
Activating and setting the sensitivity When activating the rain sensor, the vehicle must be running or in ignition mode II and the windshield wiper lever must be in position 0 or in the single sweep position.
Activate the rain sensor by pressing the button . The windshield wipers will make one
sweep.
Press the lever up for the wipers to make an extra sweep. The rain sensor returns to active mode when the stalk is released back to position 0.
Deactivating Deactivate the rain sensor by pressing the but-
ton
or press the lever down to another
wiper position.
The rain sensor is automatically deactivated when the key is removed from the ignition slot or five minutes after the ignition has been switched off.
94
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
03 Your driving environment
Wipers and washers
CAUTION
Heated washer nozzles*
Tailgate wiper/washer
The rain sensor should be deactivated when washing the car in an automatic car wash, etc. If the rain sensor function is left on, the
The washer nozzles are heated automatically in cold weather to help prevent the washer fluid from freezing.
wipers will start inadvertently in the car wash and could be damaged.
High-pressure headlight washing*
High-pressure headlight washing consumes a
03
large quantity of washer fluid. To save fluid, the
Windshield washing
headlights are washed using two alternatives:
· Low/high beam headlights on. The head-
lights will be washed the first time the windshield is washed. Thereafter, the headlights will only be washed once for every five times the windshield is washed within a 10-minute period.
· Parking lights on. Optional Active Bend-
ing Lights will be washed once for every five times the windshield is washed. Normal halogen headlights will not be washed.
1. Intermittent wiping
2. Normal (continuous) wiping
Move the lever forward (see the arrow in the illustration) to start the tailgate washer.
Washing function
Move the lever toward the steering wheel to start the windshield and headlight washers. After the lever is released the wipers make several extra sweeps.
CAUTION
Use ample washer fluid when washing the windshield. The windshield should be thoroughly wet when the wipers are in operation.
Tailgate wiper and reverse gear If the windshield wipers are on and the transmission is put into reverse gear, the tailgate wiper will go into intermittent wiping function1. This function is deactivated when a different gear is selected.
NOTE
One headlight is washed at a time.
1 Consult your Volvo retailer if you would like to have this function deactivated.
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
95
03 Your driving environment
Wipers and washers
NOTE
On vehicles with the optional rain sensor, the tailgate wiper will be activated when reverse is selected, if the rain sensor is activated and it is raining.
fading effect of sunlight on upholstery, panels, etc.
Electronic equipment such as garage door openers, electronic toll tags and similar devices should not be placed on sections of the
windshield with the IR coating because this
03
If the tailgate wiper is in the normal (continuous) could affect their function and limit their range.
wiping mode, selecting different gears will not affect its function.
For best performance, place the device on the section of the windshield without the IR coating
(see the area marked in the illustration).
IR-reflecting windshield*
Section of the windshield where the IR-coating is not applied
An optional factory-installed infrared (IR) coating can be applied to the windshield to help protect the cabin from the sun's heat and the
96
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
03 Your driving environment
Power windows
Driver's door control panel Switch for power child safety locks* and disengaging rear power window buttons, see page 50 Rear window controls Front window controls.
WARNING · Always remove the ignition key when
the vehicle is unattended.
· Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
· Make sure that the windows are com-
pletely unobstructed before they are operated.
Power windows
Operating
NOTE
· Movement of the windows will stop if
they are obstructed in any way.
· To reduce buffeting wind noise if the
rear windows are opened, also open the
front windows slightly.
03
Operating the power windows Manual up/down
Auto up/down.
All power windows can be operated using the control panel in the driver's door. The control panels in the other doors only operate the window in the respective doors.
For the power windows to function, the ignition must be in at least mode I. When the vehicle has been running, the power windows can be operated for several minutes after the remote key has been removed from the ignition slot, or until a door has been opened.
Manual up/down ± Move one of the controls up/down slightly.
> The power windows move up/down as long as the control is held in position.
Auto up/down ± Move one of the controls up/down as far
as possible and release it. > The window will open or close com-
pletely.
Resetting If the battery has been disconnected, the auto open function must be reset so that it will work properly.
1. Gently raise the front section of the button to close the window and hold it for one second.
2. Release the button briefly.
3. Raise the front section of the button again for one second.
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
97
03 Your driving environment
Power windows
Laminated glass* This glass is reinforced to help provide protection against break-ins and improved sound insulation in the passenger compartment.
The windshield, optional laminated panoramic
03
roof and other windows have laminated glass.
98
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
03 Your driving environment
Mirrors
Power door mirrors
Door mirror controls Adjusting 1. Press the L button for the left door mirror
or the R button for the right door mirror. The light in the button comes on. 2. Adjust the position with the joystick in the center. 3. Press the L or R button again. The light should no longer be on.
WARNING
Objects seen in the mirrors may appear further away than they actually are.
Retractable power door mirrors* The mirrors can be retracted for parking/driving in narrow spaces:
To acitvate this function, select reverse gear and press the L or R mirror control button to tilt the mirror down.
1. Press down the L and R buttons at the
The door mirror will reset to its normal position:
same time.
· after 10 seconds when reverse is disen-
2. Release them after approximately one sec-
gaged and the car remains stopped.
03
ond. The mirrors automatically stop in the · immediately when reverse is disengaged
fully retracted position.
and the vehicle's forward speed exceeds
Fold out the mirrors by pressing down the L and R buttons at the same time. The mirrors automatically stop in the fully extended posi-
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).
· immediately if you press the correspond-
ing L or R button again.
tion.
· when the engine is turned off.
Storing the position*
· when the side mirrors are folded in.
The mirror positions are stored in the key memory when the vehicle has been locked with the
NOTE
remote key. When the vehicle is unlocked with the same remote control the mirrors and the
Only one mirror can be tilted down at a time.
driver's seat adopt the stored positions when the driver's door is opened.
The function can be activated/deactivated under Car key memory Seat & mirror
Automatic retraction when locking When the vehicle is locked/unlocked with the remote key the door mirrors are automatically retracted/extended.
positions. For a description of the menu system, see page 122.
The function can be activated/deactivated under Car settings Retract mirrors when
Tilting the door mirror when parking* The door mirrors can be tilted down to help
locking. For a description of the menu system, see page 122.
give the driver a better view along the sides of the vehicle, for example when parallel parking.
Resetting to neutral Mirrors that have been moved out of position
by an external force must be electrically reset
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
99
03 Your driving environment
Mirrors
to the neutral position for electric retracting/
Press the button once to start simultaneous
extending to work.
rear window and door mirror defrosting. The
· Retract the mirrors with the L and R but-
light in the button indicates that the function is
tons.
active. Defrosting is deactivated automatically
and its duration is controlled by the outside
· Fold them out again with the L and R but- temperature.
tons.
03 The mirrors are now reset in neutral position.
The rear window is defogged/de-iced automatically if the vehicle is started in an outside
Home safe and approach lighting
temperature lower than 45 °F (7 °C).
The light on the door mirrors comes on when approach lighting or home safe lighting is selected, see page 93.
Defrosting can be selected under Climate settings Auto. rear defroster. Select between On or Off.
Rear window and door mirror defrosters
Interior rearview mirror
Auto-dim function An integrated sensor reacts to headlights from following traffic and automatically reduces glare in the mirror.
Use the defroster to quickly remove fog and ice from the rear window and the door mirrors.
100
03 Your driving environment
Laminated panoramic roof*
Introduction
CAUTION
WARNING
The laminated panoramic roof is divided into two sections.
· Remove ice and snow before opening
the laminated panoramic roof.
· During manual closing, if the laminated
panoramic roof is obstructed, immedi-
· The rear glass section is fixed in place and
cannot be moved.
· The front glass section can be slid hori-
zontally to the open or closed positions or its rear edge can be raised and lowered to allow ventilation.
All references in this section to opening or closing the panoramic roof pertain to the front glass section.
· Do not operate the laminated panor-
amic roof if it is frozen closed.
· Never place heavy objects on the lami-
nated panoramic roof.
Operation
ately open it again.
· Never open or close the laminated pan-
oramic roof if it is obstructed in any way.
03
· Never allow a child to operate thelami-
nated panoramic roof.
· Never leave a child alone in a vehicle.
· Never extend any object or body part
though the open laminated panoramic
roof, even if the vehicle's ignition is
The laminated panoramic roof also has a sun
completely switched off.
shade made of perforated fabric that is located
below the sections of glass. This shade can be opened or closed, for example when driving in bright sunlight.
Automatic operation 1. To open the sun shade completely, pull the
control as far back as possible (to the auto
Both the laminated panoramic roof and the sun
open position) and release it.
shade are operated by the controls in the ceiling console, near the rear-view mirror. The vehicle's ignition must be in mode I or II before the laminated panoramic roof/sun shade can be operated.
Auto open (arrow points toward the rear of the vehicle)
2. To fully open the laminated panoramic roof, pull the control as far back as possible a second time (to the auto open position) and release it.
Quick open/close
Manual open
The laminated panoramic roof and the sun
Manual close
shade can be opened/closed at the same time:
Auto close
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
`` 101
03 Your driving environment
Laminated panoramic roof*
· Open - pull the control back (to the auto
open position) twice in quick succession and release it.
· Close - push the control forward (to the
auto close position) twice in quick succession and release it.
NOTE
For manual opening, the sun shade must first be fully open before it will be possible to open the laminated panoramic roof. When closing, the laminated panoramic roof must be fully closed before the sun shade
03 Manual operation
can be closed.
1. Opening the sun shade: Pull the control back to the first stop (the manual open
Tilt position
position) and hold it until the sun shade has
opened to the position of your choice.
laminated panoramic roof is opened to the tilt position.
2. Opening the rear edge of the laminated panoramic roof: Pull the control back to the first stop (the manual open position) a second time to open the rear edge of the laminated panoramic roof.
3. Opening the front glass section: Pull the control back to the first stop (the manual open position) a third time and hold it until the laminated panoramic roof has opened to the position of your choice.
Perform this procedure in reverse order to close the laminated panoramic roof and/or sun shade.
Tilt position, raised at the rear edge
Open (raise the rear edge of the front glass section) by pressing the rear edge of the control upward.
Close by pulling the rear edge of the control downward and holding it until the laminated panoramic roof has closed completely.
If the sun shade is completely closed, it will open approximately 2 inches (5 cm) when the
102 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
03 Your driving environment
HomeLink® Wireless Control System*
Introduction
WARNING
Programming HomeLink
The HomeLink1 Wireless Control System provides a convenient way to replace up to three hand-held radio-frequency (RF) transmitters used to activate devices such as gate operators, garage door openers, entry door locks, security systems, even home lighting. Additional HomeLink information can be found on the Internet at www.homelink.com.
· If you use HomeLink to open a garage
door or gate, be sure no one is near the gate or door while it is in motion.
· When programming a garage door
opener, it is advised to park outside of the garage.
· Do not use HomeLink with any garage
door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by U.S. federal safety standards (this includes
NOTE
Some vehicles may require the ignition
switch to be turned on or to the second
("accessories") position for programming
and/or operation of HomeLink. It is also rec-
03
ommended that a new battery be placed in
the hand-held transmitter of the device
being programmed to HomeLink for quicker
training and accurate transmission of the
radio-frequency signal.
any garage door opener model manu-
factured before April 1, 1982). A garage door that cannot detect an object - signaling the door to stop and reverse does not meet current U.S. federal safety standards. For more information, contact HomeLink at: www.homelink.com.
1. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter 13 inches (514 cm) away from the HomeLink button you wish to program while keeping the indicator light in view.
2. Simultaneously press and hold both the chosen HomeLink and hand-held transmit-
ter buttons until the HomeLink indicator
Retain the original transmitter of the RF device you are programming for use in other vehicles as well as for future HomeLink programming. It is also suggested that upon the sale of the
light changes from a slow to a rapidly blinking light. Now you may release both the HomeLink and hand-held transmitter buttons.
vehicle, the programmed HomeLink buttons be
erased for security purposes. Refer to "Erasing
HomeLink Buttons".
1 HomeLink and the HomeLink house are registered trademarks of Johnson Controls, Inc.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
`` 103
03 Your driving environment
HomeLink® Wireless Control System*
NOTE
Some devices may require you to replace this Programming Step 2 with procedures
found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the motor-head unit.
5. Firmly press and release the "learn" or
cedures, replace "Programming HomeLink" step 2 with the following:
· Continue to press and hold the HomeLink
noted in the "Gate Operator / Canadian Pro-
"smart" button. (The name and color of the
button while you press and release -
gramming" section. If the HomeLink indica-
button may vary by manufacturer.) There
every two seconds ("cycle") your hand-
tor light does not change to a rapidly blink-
are 30 seconds to initiate step 6.
held transmitter until the HomeLink indica-
03
ing light after performing these steps, con-
tor light changes from a slow to a rapidly
tact HomeLink at www.homelink.com.
6. Return to the vehicle and firmly press, hold
blinking light. Now you may release both
for two seconds and release the pro-
the HomeLink and hand-held transmitter
3. Firmly press, hold for five seconds and release the programmed HomeLink button up to two separate times to activate the door. If the door does not activate, press and hold the just-trained HomeLink button and observe the indicator light.
grammed HomeLink button. Repeat the "press/hold/release" sequence a second time, and, depending on the brand of the garage door opener (or other rolling code equipped device), repeat this sequence a third time to complete the programming process.
buttons. Proceed with "Programming" step 3 to complete.
Using HomeLink To operate, simply press and release the pro-
· If the indicator light stays on con-
stantly, programming is complete and your device should activate when
HomeLink should now activate your rolling code equipped device.
grammed HomeLink button. Activation will now occur for the trained device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator, security system,
the HomeLink button is pressed and
Gate Operator/Canadian Programming
entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.). For
released.
Canadian radio-frequency laws require trans- convenience, the hand-held transmitter of the
· If the indicator light blinks rapidly for
mitter signals to "time-out" (or quit) after sev- device may also be used at any time. In the
two seconds and then turns to a constant light continue with "Programming" steps 4-6 to complete the programming of a rolling code equipped device (most commonly a garage door opener).
eral seconds of transmission which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to "time-out" in the same manner.
event that there are still programming difficulties or questions, contact HomeLink at: www.homelink.com.
4. At the garage door opener receiver (motorhead unit) in the garage, locate the "learn" or "smart" button. This can usually be
If you live in Canada or you are having difficulties programming a gate operator or garage door opener by using the "Programming" pro-
104 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
03 Your driving environment
HomeLink® Wireless Control System*
Erasing HomeLink Buttons
For questions or comments, contact HomeLink
To erase programming from the three Home-
at: www.homelink.com or 18003553515.
Link buttons (individual buttons cannot be
This device complies with FCC rules part 15
erased but can be "reprogrammed" as outlined and Industry Canada (IC) RSS-210. Operation
below), follow the step noted:
is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
1. Press and hold the two outer HomeLink buttons until the indicator light begins to
This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any
03
flash-after 10 seconds.
interference that may be received including
interference that may cause undesired opera-
2. Release both buttons. Do not hold for
tion.
longer that 20 seconds.
HomeLink is now in the train (or learning) mode and can be programmed at any time beginning with "Programming" - step 1.
Reprogramming a Single HomeLink Button To program a device to HomeLink using a HomeLink button previously trained, follow these steps:
NOTE
The transmitter has been tested and complies with FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the device.2
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button. DO NOT release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds. Without releasing the HomeLink button, proceed with "Programming" - step 1.
2 The term "IC:" before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 105
03 Your driving environment
Starting the engine Start
03
Ignition switch with remote key inserted ( see page 79 for more information on ignition modes)
WARNING
Before starting the engine:
· Fasten the seat belt. · Check that the seat, steering wheel and
mirrors are adjusted properly.
· Make sure the brake pedal can be
depressed completely. Adjust the seat if necessary.
1. Insert the remote key into the ignition slot with the buttons upward and the metallic key blade pointing outward (not inserted into the slot)1.
2. Push lightly on the remote key. It will be automatically drawn into the ignition slot in the correct position.
3. Depress the brake pedal2. Press and release the START/STOP ENGINE button. The autostart function will operate the starter motor until the engine starts.
The starter motor operates for a maximum of 10 seconds. If the engine has not started, repeat the procedure.
NOTE
Keyless drive*
To start a vehicle equipped with the keyless drive feature, one of the remote keys must be in the passenger compartment. Follow the instructions in step 3 to start the vehicle.
1 On vehicles with the optional keyless drive, it is only necessary to have a remote key in the passenger's compartment. 2 If the vehicle is moving, it is only necessary to press the START/STOP ENGINE button to start the vehicle.
106 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
WARNING
An extra mat on the driver's floor can cause the accelerator and/or brake pedal to catch. Check that the movement of these pedals is not impeded. Not more than one protective floor covering may be used at one time.
03 Your driving environment
WARNING
· Always remove the remote key from the
ignition slot when leaving the vehicle, especially if there are children in the vehicle.
· Never remove the remote key from the
ignition slot while driving or when the vehicle is being towed. The steering lock could otherwise be activated, making it impossible to steer the vehicle. On vehicles with the optional keyless drive, never remove the remote key from the vehicle while driving or during towing.
· Always place the gear selector in Park
and apply the parking brake before leaving the vehicle. Never leave the vehicle unattended with the engine running.
· Always open garage doors fully before
starting the engine inside a garage to ensure adequate ventilation. The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, which is invisible and odorless but very poisonous.
Starting the engine
NOTE
· After a cold start, idle speed may be
noticeably higher than normal for a
short period. This is done to help bring
components in the emission control
system to their normal operating tem-
perature as quickly as possible, which
03
enables them to control emissions and
help reduce the vehicle's impact on the
environment3.
· Keylock: Your vehicle is equipped with
a keylock system. When the engine is switched off, the gear selector must be in the Park position before the key can be removed4 from the ignition slot.
3 If the gear selector is in the D or R positions and the car is not moving, engine speed (rpm) will be lower and it will take longer for the engine to reach normal operating temperature. 4 Does not apply to vehicles with the optional keyless drive.
`` 107
03 Your driving environment
Starting the engine
CAUTION
Switching off the engine
To jump start your vehicle:
· When starting in cold weather, the auto-
matic transmission may shift up at
With the engine running, press the START/ STOP ENGINE button.
1. Switch off the ignition (set the ignition to mode 0, see page 79).
slightly higher engine speeds than nor-
If the gear selector is not in the P position or if 2. First connect the red jumper cable to the
mal until the automatic transmission
the vehicle is moving, press the button twice or
auxiliary battery's positive (+) terminal .
03
fluid reaches normal operating temperature.
press and hold it in until the engine switches off.
3. Fold back the cover over the positive (+)
· Do not race a cold engine immediately
terminal on your vehicle's battery ,
after starting. Oil flow may not reach some lubrication points fast enough to
Jump starting
marked with a "+" sign, located under a folding cover.
prevent engine damage.
· The engine should be idling when you
move the gear selector. Never accelerate until after you feel the transmission engage. Accelerating immediately after selecting a gear will cause harsh
4. Connect the black jumper cable to the auxiliary battery's negative () terminal and to the ground point in your vehicle's engine compartment (right engine mount at the top, on the outer screw) .
engagement and premature transmission wear.
5. Start the engine in the assisting vehicle, then start the engine in the vehicle with
· Selecting P or N when idling at a stand-
dead battery.
still for prolonged periods of time will help prevent overheating of the automatic transmission fluid.
Connecting the jumper cables
G021347
6. After the engine has started, first remove the negative () terminal jumper cable (black). Then remove the positive (+) termi-
Follow these instructions to jump start your
nal jumper cable (red).
vehicle's dead battery or to jump start another
vehicle's dead battery using your vehicle. If the
12-volt auxiliary battery to be used is in another
vehicle, check that the vehicles are not touch-
ing to prevent premature completion of a cir-
cuit. Be sure to follow jump starting instruc-
tions provided for the other vehicle.
108
WARNING
PROPOSITION 65 WARNING! Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals known to the state of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling.
CAUTION
Connect the jumper cables carefully to avoid short circuits with other components in the engine compartment.
03 Your driving environment
WARNING
· Do not connect the jumper cable to any
part of the fuel system or to any moving parts. Avoid touching hot manifolds.
· Batteries generate hydrogen gas, which
is flammable and explosive.
· Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do
not allow battery fluid to contact eyes, skin, fabrics or painted surfaces. If contact occurs, flush the affected area immediately with water. Obtain medical help immediately if eyes are affected.
· Never expose the battery to open flame
or electric spark.
· Do not smoke near the battery. · Failure to follow the instructions for
jump starting can lead to injury.
Starting the engine
03
109
03 Your driving environment
Transmission
Automatic transmission
Shiftlock
Reverse (R)
When P has been selected, the transmission is The vehicle must be stationary when position
mechanically blocked in this position. The
R is selected.
brake pedal must be depressed before the
gear lever can be moved from the P position.
Neutral position (N)
No gear is engaged and the engine can be
03
Always apply the parking brake when the vehicle is parked, see page 117. If the vehicle is
started with the gear selector in this position. Apply the parking brake if the vehicle is sta-
equipped with the optional electric parking
tionary with the gear selector in position N.
brake, press the control to apply the brake, see
page 117.
Drive (D)
G021351
D is the normal driving position. The car auto-
matically shifts between the various forward
Shiftgate positions1
gears, based on the level of acceleration and speed. The car must be at a standstill when
Depress the button on the front of the gear
shifting from position R to position D.
selector knob to move the gear selector between the R, N, D, and P positions.
The gear selector can be moved freely between the Geartronic (manual shifting) and Drive (D) positions while driving.
Sport (S)2 Sport mode offers more immediate engine response and allows the transmission to shift up at higher rpm.
To access Sport mode (S), move the gear
Park position (P)
selector to the right from Drive (D). The infor-
Select the P position when starting or parking.
mation display will change from D to S.
Keylock To remove the remote key from the ignition slot, the gear selector must be in the P position. The remote key is locked in the slot in all other positions.
CAUTION
The vehicle must be stationary when position P is selected.
Sport mode can be selected at any time.
1 The information display (see page 73) shows the gear selector's position or the selected gear by displaying the following: P, R, N, D, S, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6. 2 Available in certain markets only, on models with 6-cylinder turbo engines.
110
03 Your driving environment
Transmission
Geartronicmanual shifting
· If you hold the gear selector toward "", the 2. Press the gear selector forward and
Geartronic allows you to manually shift among
transmission will downshift one gear at a
release it (this selects 2nd gear). Press the
your vehicle's six forward speeds. Geartronic
time and will utilize the braking power of
selector forward again and release it to
can be selected at any time.
the engine. If the current speed is too high
select 3rd gear.
for using a lower gear, the downshift will
· To access the manual shifting position
not occur until the speed has decreased
3. Release the brake pedal and press gently
from Drive (D), move the gear selector to the right (to the area marked M in the illustration or to S on models equipped with
enough to allow the lower gear to be used.
· If you slow to a very low speed, the trans-
on the accelerator pedal. Shiftlock override
03
Sport mode).
mission will automatically shift down.
Shiftlock Neutral (N)
NOTE
On models equipped with Sport mode, the transmission will not switch to manual shifting mode until the gear selector is moved
If the gear selector is in the N position and the vehicle has been stationary for at least 3 seconds (irrespective of whether the engine is running) then the gear selector is locked.
forward or rearward. The selected gear will then be shown in the information display (see page 73).
To be able to move the gear selector from N to another gear position, the brake pedal must be depressed and the ignition must be in posi-
· To return to the D position from the manual
shifting position or Sport mode, move the gear selector to the left.
While driving
· If you select the manual shifting position
while driving, the gear that was being used in the Drive position will also initially be selected in the manual shifting position.
· Move the gear selector forward (toward
"+") to shift to a higher gear or rearward (toward "") to shift to a lower gear.
tion II, see page 79.
Geartronicstarting on slippery surfaces Selecting 3rd gear in Geartronic's manual shifting mode can help provide better traction when starting off on slippery surfaces. To do so:
1. Depress the brake pedal and move the gear selector to the right from the D position to the manual shifting position. The text in the instrument panel display will change from D to 1.
If the vehicle cannot be driven, for example because of a dead battery, the gear selector must be moved from the P position before the vehicle can be moved3.
Lift away the rubber mat on the floor of the storage compartment behind the center console to expose the small opening for overriding the shiftlock system.
G031390
3 If the battery is dead, the electric parking brake cannot be applied or released. Connect an auxiliary battery if the battery voltage is too low, see page 108.
`` 111
03 Your driving environment
Transmission
Insert the key blade into the opening. Press ically controlled coupling distributes power to
the key blade down as far as possible and the wheels that have the best traction.
keep it held down. Move the gear selector
from the P position. For information on the
NOTE
key blade, see page 59.
Please be aware that overriding the shiftlock
03
system does not release the steering wheel
The message AWD disabled Service required will be appear in the information display if an electrical fault should occur in
lock.
the AWD system. A warning light will also illuminate in the instrument panel. If this
All Wheel Drive AWD4
occurs, have the system checked by a trained and qualified Volvo service techni-
cian.
Your Volvo can be equipped with permanent All Wheel Drive, which means that power is distributed automatically between the front and rear wheels. Under normal driving conditions, most of the engine's power is directed to the front wheels. However, if there is any tendency for the front wheels to spin, an electron-
4 Standard on certain models.
112
03 Your driving environment
Brakes
Brake system The brake system is a hydraulic system consisting of two separate brake circuits. If a problem should occur in one of these circuits, it is still possible to stop the vehicle with the other brake circuit.
If the brake pedal must be depressed farther than normal and requires greater foot pressure, the stopping distance will be longer.
A warning light in the instrument panel will light up to warn the driver that a fault has occurred.
If this light comes on while driving or braking, stop immediately and check the brake fluid level in the reservoir.
NOTE
Press the brake pedal hard and maintain pressure on the pedal do not pump the brakes.
WARNING
If the fluid level is below the MIN mark in the reservoir or if a brake system message is shown in the information display: DO NOT DRIVE. Have the vehicle towed to a trained and qualified Volvo service technician and have the brake system inspected.
Power brakes function only when the engine is running The power brakes utilize vacuum pressure which is only created when the engine is running. Never let the vehicle roll to a stop with the engine switched off.
If the power brakes are not working, considerably higher pressure will be required on the brake pedal to compensate for the lack of power assistance. This can happen for example when towing your vehicle or if the engine is switched off when the vehicle is rolling. The brake pedal feels harder than usual.
Water on brake discs and brake pads affects braking Driving in rain and slush or passing through an automatic car wash can cause water to collect on the brake discs and pads. This will cause a delay in braking effect when the pedal is depressed. To avoid such a delay when the brakes are needed, depress the pedal occasionally when driving through rain, slush, etc. This will remove the water from the brakes. Check that brake application feels normal. This should also be done after washing or starting in very damp or cold weather.
Severe strain on the brake system The brakes will be subject to severe strain when driving in mountains or hilly areas, or when towing a trailer. Vehicle speed is usually
slower, which means that the cooling of the
brakes is less efficient than when driving on
level roads. To reduce the strain on the brakes,
shift into a lower gear and let the engine help
with the braking. Do not forget that if you are
towing a trailer, the brakes will be subjected to
a greater than normal load.
03
Anti-lock braking system The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) helps to improve vehicle control (stopping and steering) during severe braking conditions by limiting brake lockup. When the system "senses" impending lockup, braking pressure is automatically modulated in order to help prevent lockup that could lead to a skid.
The system performs a brief self-diagnostic test when the engine has been started and driver releases the brake pedal. Another automatic test may be performed when the vehicle first reaches a speed of approximately 25 mph (40 km/h). The brake pedal will pulsate several times and a sound may be audible from the ABS control module. This is normal.
Cleaning the brake discs Coatings of dirt and water on the brake discs may result in delayed brake function. This delay is minimized by cleaning the brake linings.
Cleaning the brake pads is advisable in wet weather, prior to long-term parking, and after the vehicle has been washed. Do this by brak-
``
113
03 Your driving environment
Brakes
ing gently for a short period while the vehicle is moving.
Emergency Brake Assistance
EBA is designed to provide full brake effect
immediately in the event of sudden, hard brak-
03
ing. The system is activated by the speed with
which the brake pedal is depressed.
When the EBA system is activated, the brake pedal will go down and pressure in the brake system immediately increases to the maximum level. Maintain full pressure on the brake pedal in order to utilize the system completely. EBA is automatically deactivated when the brake pedal is released.
NOTE
· When the EBA system is activated, the
brake pedal will go down and pressure in the brake system immediately increases to the maximum level. You must maintain full pressure on the brake pedal in order to utilize the system completely. There will be no braking effect if the pedal is released. EBA is automatically deactivated when the brake pedal is released.
· When the vehicle has been parked for
some time, the brake pedal may sink more than usual when the engine is started. This is normal and the pedal will return to its usual position when it is released.
Symbols in the instrument panel
Symbol Specification
Steady glow Check the brake fluid level. If the level is low, fill with brake fluid and check for the cause of the brake fluid loss.
Steady glow for two seconds when the engine is started There was a fault in the brake system's ABS function when the engine was last running.
WARNING
If
and
come on at the same time
and the brake level is below the MIN mark
in the reservoir or if a brake system-related
message is shown in the information dis-
play: DO NOT DRIVE. Have the vehicle
towed to a trained and qualified Volvo serv-
ice technician and have the brake system
inspected.
114
03 Your driving environment
Hill Descent Control (HDC)
Introduction
Function
Using HDC
Normally, when the accelerator pedal is
HDC allows the car to roll forward at a maxi-
released while driving down hills, the vehicle's
mum speed of 6 mph (10 km/h), and 4 mph
speed slows as the engine runs at lower rpm
(7 km/h) in reverse. However, the accelerator
(the normal engine braking effect). However, if
pedal can be used to select any speed that is
the downhill gradient becomes steeper and if
possible in first or reverse gears. When the
the vehicle is carrying a load, speed increases
accelerator pedal is released, speed is quickly 03
despite the engine braking effect. In this situa-
reduced again to 6 mph (10 km/h) or 4 mph
tion, the brakes must be applied to reduce the
(7 km/h), depending on the gear selected,
vehicle's speed.
regardless of the hill's gradient. It is not nec-
HDC is a type of automatic engine brake and
essary to apply the brakes.
makes it possible to increase or decrease the
· The brake lights illuminate automatically
vehicle's speed on downhill gradients using
when HDC is controlling the vehicle's
only the accelerator pedal, without applying the brakes. The brake system functions automatically to maintain a low and steady speed.
· HDC can be switched on and off with the
button in the center console. An indicator
light in the button illuminates when HDC is
speed.
· The driver can slow or stop the vehicle at
any time by applying the brakes.
HDC is particularly useful when driving down steep hills with rough surfaces, and where the road may have slippery patches.
activated.
· The indicator light
in the instru-
ment panel illuminates and a message is
HDC is deactivated when:
· The button on the center console is
pressed
WARNING
HDC does not function in all situations, and is a supplementary braking aid. The driver has full responsibility for driving in a safe manner.
displayed when the system is controlling the vehicle's speed.
· HDC only functions when first or reverse
gears are selected (1 will be shown in the instrument panel display when first gear is selected).
· A gear higher than first gear is selected · D is selected on vehicles with an automatic
transmission
HDC can be deactivated at any time. If this is done while driving down a steep hill, the system's braking effect will decrease gradually.
NOTE
HDC cannot be activated if the gear selector is the D position.
`` 115
03 Your driving environment
Hill Descent Control (HDC) NOTE
Engine response to pressure on the accelerator pedal may be slightly slower than normal when HDC is activated. 03
116
03 Your driving environment
Parking brake
Electric parking brake
Applying the electric parking brake
NOTE
An electric parking brake has the same function as a manual parking brake.
· In an emergency the parking brake can
be applied when the vehicle is moving
NOTE
by holding in the control. Braking will be interrupted when the accelerator pedal
· A faint sound from the parking brake's
electric motor can be heard when the
is depressed or the control is released. 03
· An audible signal will sound during this
parking brake is being applied. This
procedure if the vehicle is moving at
sound can also be heard during the
speeds above 6 mph (10 km/h).
automatic function check of the parking
brake.
· The brake pedal will move slightly when
the electric parking brake is applied or released.
Low battery voltage
Parking brake control 1. Press firmly on the brake pedal. 2. Push the control.
G021354
Parking on a hill
· If the vehicle is pointing uphill, turn the front
wheels so that they point away from the curb.
· If the vehicle is pointing downhill, turn the
front wheels so that they point toward the
If the battery voltage is too low, the parking
3. Release the brake pedal and ensure that
curb.
brake cannot be applied or released. Connect
the vehicle is at a standstill.
an auxiliary battery if the battery voltage is too low, see page 108.
4. When the vehicle is parked, the gear selector must be in position P.
The
symbol in the instrument panel
flashes while the parking bake is being applied,
and glows steadily when the parking brake has
been fully applied.
`` 117
03 Your driving environment
Parking brake
Releasing the electric parking brake
NOTE
Symbols
· For safety reasons, the parking brake is
only released automatically if the engine is running and the driver is wearing a seat belt.
Symbol Specification
Read the message in the information display
G021359 G016556
03
Parking brake control Manual release 1. Fasten the seat belt.
· The electric parking brake will be
released immediately when the accelerator pedal is pressed and the gear selector is in position D or P.
2. Fasten the seat belt
3. Move the gear selector to position D or R and press the accelerator pedal. The parking brake will release when the vehicle begins to move.
A flashing symbol indicates that the parking brake is being applied. If the symbol flashes in any other situation then this means that a fault has arisen. Read the message on the information display.
Messages
2. Insert the remote key in the ignition slot. 3. Press firmly on the brake pedal. 4. Pull the parking brake control. Vehicles with Keyless drive* 1. Press the START/STOP ENGINE button. 2. Press firmly on the brake pedal. 3. Pull the parking brake control. Automatic release 1. Start the engine.
Heavy load uphill A heavy load, such as a trailer, can cause the vehicle to roll backward when the parking brake is released automatically on a steep incline. To help avoid this:
1. Keep the electric parking brake lever pushed in with the left hand while shifting into Drive with the right.
2. While pressing the throttle pedal to pull away, release the parking brake lever only after the vehicle begins to move.
Parking brake not fully released A fault is preventing the parking brake from being released. Contact an authorized Volvo work-
118 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
shop. If you drive off with this error message showing, a warning signal sounds.
Parking brake not applied A fault is preventing the parking brake from being applied. Try to apply and release. Contact a Volvo workshop if the message remains.
Parking brake Service required A fault has arisen. Contact a Volvo workshop if the fault remains.
WARNING
If the vehicle must be parked before the fault has been corrected, always put the gear selector in P and turn the wheels so that they point away from the curb if the vehicle is pointing uphill or toward the curb if it is pointing downhill.
03 Your driving environment
Parking brake
03
119
Menus and messages........................................................................... 122 Climate system..................................................................................... 126 Audio system........................................................................................ 133 Bluetooth® hands-free connection....................................................... 147 Trip computer........................................................................................ 153 Compass............................................................................................... 155 Stability system..................................................................................... 156 Active chassis systemFour C.............................................................. 158 Cruise control........................................................................................ 159 Collision warning with Auto-brake*....................................................... 161 City SafetyTM ........................................................................................ 167 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*............................................................ 173 Distance alert ....................................................................................... 180 Driver Alert System* ............................................................................. 183 Park assist*........................................................................................... 188 Park Assist Camera (PAC)* .................................................................. 191 Blind Spot Information System*............................................................ 194 Passenger compartment convenience................................................. 198
120 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
G020908
COMFORT AND DRIVING PLEASURE
04
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Menus and messages
Center console
ENTER leads back one step in the menu Search paths to the menu system functions are
Certain functions are controlled from the center console via the menu system or from the key-
structure. A long press exits the menu system.
listed as follows: Car settings Lock settings, if the following steps have been taken
pad in the steering wheel. Each function is
Numerical keypad 19
first:
described under its respective section.
The current menu level is shown at the top right of display in the center console.
Steering wheel keypad
1. Press MENU. 2. Scroll to Menu and press ENTER.
Center console controls
3. Scroll to Submenu and press ENTER. The navigation button can be used instead of
ENTER and EXIT when navigating the menu
04
hierarchy. The right arrow is equal to ENTER
and the left arrow to EXIT.
The menu options are numbered and can also be selected directly with the numerical keypad (19 only).
Center console with information display and controls for menus
Menu navigation button scrolls and selects among menu options MENU selects menu options
EXIT accesses the menu system
ENTER
EXIT
Navigation buttons.
Buttons (1-3) on the steering wheel keypad have the same function as those in the center console.
Search paths Access to some functions is provided directly via the function buttons and others are accessed through the menu system.
Menu overview
NOTE
Menu selections will not be available (will be "grayed out") when the vehicle is moving.
Car key memory Seat & mirror positions
Car settings Collision warning settings* Light settings
122 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Lock settings Reduced guard1 Tire pressure Door mirror settings Parking camera settings (accessory) Lane departure warning* Steering force level* Information Climate settings Automatic blower adjust Recirculation timer Auto. rear defroster Reset climate settings
Main menu AM HD radio Audio settings2
Sound stage Equalizer, front Equalizer, rear Auto. volume control
Resets all audio settings.
Main menu FM HD radio FM settings
Radio text Advanced radio settings Audio settings
Main menu CD Random
Off Folder Disc Single disc All discs CD settings Track information* Audio settings
Main menu AUX Volume, AUX input Audio settings
1 Certain models 2 The menu option for audio settings is available in all audio sources.
Menus and messages
Main menu USB USB settings Audio settings Track information*
Main iPod menu iPod settings Audio settings Track information*
04 Main Bluetooth menu Last 10 missed calls Last 10 received calls Last 10 dialled calls Phone book
Search Copy fr. mobile phone Bluetooth* Connect phone Change phone Remove phone
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
`` 123
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Menus and messages
Phone settings Call options Sounds and volume Synchronize phone book
Main instrument panel
04
The menus shown on the information displays in the instrument panel are controlled with the left lever. The menus shown depend on ignition mode. Press READ to erase a message and return to the menus.
Menu overview Driving distance on current fuel reserve
Average
Instantaneous:
Average speed
Current speed in mph (Canadian models only)
When a warning, information or indicator symbol comes on, a corresponding message appears on the information display. An error message is stored in a memory list until the fault is rectified.
Press READ to acknowledge and scroll among the messages.
NOTE
If a warning message appears while you are using the trip computer, the message must be read and confirmed by pressing READ before the previous activity can be resumed.
DSTC
Message
Description
Message
Information display and menu controls READ access to the list of messages and message confirmation. Thumbwheel browse among menus and options in the list of functions. RESET reset the active function. Used in certain cases to select/activate a function, see the explanation under each respective function.
G022908 G028940
Stop safely
Stopping the engine
Stop and switch off the engine. Serious risk of damage. Contact an authorized Volvo workshop.
Stop and switch off the engine. Serious risk of damage. Contact an authorized Volvo workshop.
124
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Message Service urgent
Service required
See manual Book time for maintenance Time for regular maintenance
Description
Have the vehicle checked by an authorized Volvo workshop immediately.
Have the vehicle checked by an authorized Volvo workshop as soon as possible.
Read the owner's manual.
Time to book service at an authorized Volvo retailer.
Time for regular service at an authorized Volvo workshop. The timing is determined by the number of miles driven, number of months since the last service, engine running time.
Message
Description
Maintenance overdue
If the service intervals are not followed, the warranty does not cover any damaged parts. Contact an authorized Volvo workshop for service.
Temporarily OFF
A function has been temporarily switched off and is reset automatically while driving or after starting again.
Power save mode
The audio system is switched off to save current. Charge the battery.
Menus and messages
04
125
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate system
Introduction
Air conditioning The vehicle is equipped with Electronic Climate Control (ECC). The climate control system cools, heats or dehumidifies the air in the passenger compartment.
NOTE
NOTE
The sunlight sensor monitors which side of the car that is most exposed to sunlight. This can mean that the temperature may differ between the right and left-side air vents, even if the temperatures set for both sides of the passenger compartment are the same.
mercially available window washing spray will also help prevent fogging or misting.
Temporary shut-off of the air conditioning The air conditioning is momentarily disengaged during full-throttle acceleration or when driving uphill with a trailer. This may result in a temporary increase in cabin temperature.
· The air conditioning can be switched
04
off, but to ensure the best possible cli-
mate comfort in the passenger com-
partment and to prevent the windows
from misting, it should always be on.
· In warm weather, a small amount of
water may accumulate under the car when it has been parked. This water is condensation from the A/C system and is normal.
Sensor location
· The sunlight sensor is located on the top
side of the dashboard.
· The temperature sensor for the passenger
compartment is located below the climate control panel.
· The outside temperature sensor is located
on the door mirror.
· The humidity sensor* is located in the inte-
rior rearview mirror.
NOTE
Do not cover or block the sensors with clothing or other objects.
Side windows and laminated panoramic roof To ensure that the air conditioning works optimally, the side windows, and the optional laminated panoramic roof should be closed.
Ice and snow Always keep the air intake grille at the base of the windshield free of snow.
Climate system maintenance Special tools and equipment are required to maintain and carry out repairs on the climate system. Work of this type should only be done by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
Refrigerant Volvo cares about the environment. The air conditioning system in your car contains a CFC-free refrigerant R134a. This substance will not deplete the ozone layer. The air conditioning system contains 1.8 lbs (800 g) of R134a. The systems uses PAG oil.
Fog on the inside of the windows The defroster function should be used to remove fog or mist from the inside of the windows. Keeping the windows clean with a com-
Passenger compartment filter Replace the cabin air filter with a new one at the recommended intervals. Please refer to
126 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate system
your Warranty and Service Records Informa-
Menu settings
Air distribution is fully automatic in AUTO
tion booklet, or consult a trained and qualified The default settings for three of the climate
mode.
Volvo service technician for these intervals. The filter should be replaced more often when driving under dirty and dusty conditions. The filter cannot be cleaned and therefore should always be replaced with a new one.
system's functions can be changed in the menu system, see page 122:
· Blower speed in automatic mode, see
page 129.
· Recirculation timer for passenger com-
If desired, air distribution can be controlled manually, see page 131.
Air vents in the dashboard
NOTE
partment air, see page 130.
· Automatic rear window defrosting, see
There are different types of cabin air filters.
page 100.
Ensure that the correct type is installed.
04
The functions can also be returned to factory
Interior Air Quality System (IAQS)
settings in the menu system.
A multifilter helps reduce gases and particles in the incoming air, thereby reducing the levels
Air distribution
of odors and contaminants entering the vehi-
cle. The air quality sensor detects increased
levels of contaminants in the outside air. When the air quality sensor detects contaminated
Open
outside air, the air intake closes and the air inside the passenger compartment is recircu-
Closed
lated, i.e. no outside air enters the vehicle. The
Horizontal airflow
filter also cleans recirculated passenger compartment air.
Vertical airflow
Direct the outer air vents toward the side win-
G032070
NOTE
dows to defrost.
Contact your Volvo retailer for IAQS air filter replacement intervals.
The incoming air is distributed from 20 different vents in the passenger compartment.
`` 127
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate system
Air vents in the door pillars
Electronic climate control, ECC
04
Closed Open Horizontal airflow Vertical airflow Direct the outer air vents toward the side windows to defrost. Direct the vents into the passenger compartment to help maintain the desired temperature in the rear seat.
Blower Manual air distribution Heated driver's seat* Auto Heated front passenger's seat* Temperature control, passenger's side A/C ON/OFF Heated rear window and door mirrors Defroster (maximum effect) Recirculation/Air quality system Temperature control, driver's side
Blower control Turn the control clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the blower speed. Pressing the AUTO switch will automatically regulate blower speed and override manual adjustment.
NOTE
If the blower is turned off completely, the air conditioning is disengaged, which may result in fogging on the windows.
Heated front seats* Press the button once for the highest heat level three indicator lights come on.
Press the button twice for a lower heat level two indicator lights come on.
Press the button three times for the lowest heat level one indicator light comes on.
Press the button four times to switch off the heat no indicator lights come on.
128 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate system
Heated rear seats*
G021376
Auto
Temperature control
The function automatically
The temperatures on the
regulates cooling, heating,
driver and passenger sides
blower speed, recirculation,
can be set independently.
and air distribution to main-
When the vehicle is started,
tain the chosen temperature.
the most recent setting is
If you select one or more man-
resumed.
ual functions, the other func-
tions continue to be controlled automatically.
NOTE
The air quality sensor is engaged and all man-
ual settings are switched off when AUTO is pressed. The display shows AUTO CLIMATE.
Heating or cooling cannot be speeded up by
selecting a higher/lower temperature than
04
the actual temperature required.
Heat control for the outboard seating positions takes place in the same way as for the front seat.
Air distribution The figure consists of three buttons. When the buttons are pressed, an indicator light in front of the respective part of the figure illuminates and shows which air distribution is selected, see page 131.
Blower speed in automatic mode can be set under Climate settings Automatic blower adjust. Choose between Low, Normal or High.
NOTE
Selecting the lowest blower speed may increases the risk of fog forming on the windows.
For a description of the menu system, see page 122.
A/C ON/OFF The air conditioning is controlled automatically by the system when the ON light is on. This cools/heats and dehumidifies the incoming air. When the OFF light is on, the air conditioning is always dis-
engaged. Other functions are still controlled automatically. When defroster is selected, the air conditioning system is set for maximum blower speed and dehumidification.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
`` 129
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate system
Defroster
Recirculation/air quality system
Interior Air Quality SystemIAQS*
This function defrosts/de-ices Recirculation
This system consists of a mul-
the windshield and front side
This function can be used to
tifilter and an air quality sen-
windows. The indicator light
shut out exhaust fumes,
sor. The filter helps remove
in the defroster button lights
smoke, etc from the passen-
gases and particles from the
when the function is active.
ger compartment. The air in
incoming air, thereby reduc-
the passenger compartment
ing the amounts of odors and
04
· Blower speed increases automatically and
the air conditioning will switch on (if not already on and if the passenger compartment blower is not turned off) to dehumidify the air in the passenger compartment.
is then recirculated, i.e., no air from outside the car is taken into the car when this function is activated. The indicator light in the button will illuminate when recirculation is selected.
contaminants entering the vehicle. The air quality sensor detects increased levels of contaminants in the outside air. When the air quality sensor detects contaminated outside air, the air intake closes and
Air conditioning can be switched off by pressing the AC button.
· Recirculation will not function while defrost
is engaged.
If the air in the car recirculates for too long, there is a risk of condensation forming on the insides of the windows, especially in winter.
Timer
the air inside the passenger compartment is recirculated, i.e., no outside air enters the vehicle. The filter also cleans recirculated passenger compartment air. When the AUTO button is depressed the air quality sensor is always
The climate system will return to its previous
The timer function minimizes the risk of fog-
engaged.
settings when the defroster function is switched off.
ging, or stale air when the recirculation function is selected by automatically switching off the
Activating the air quality sensor Switch between the three
function after a certain length of time, depend-
functions by pressing the but-
ing on the ambient temperature. Activate/
ton repeatedly.
deactivate the function under Climate control
settings Recirculation timer. For a
description of the menu system, see
page 122.
NOTE
When Defroster is selected, recirculation is always deactivated.
130 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
· The left orange light comes on the air
quality sensor is disengaged.
· The center green light comes on recircu-
lation not engaged, providing it is not required for cooling in hot weather.
· The right orange light comes on recircu-
lation is engaged.
NOTE
· The air quality sensor should always be
engaged in order to obtain the best air in the passenger compartment.
· Recirculation is limited in cold weather
to avoid fogging.
Climate system
· If the insides of the windows start fog-
ging, disengage the air quality sensor. Use the defroster function to increase airflow to the front, side, and rear windows.
Air distribution table
Air distribution
Use
Air to windows. Some air flows from the dashboard air vents. The air is not recirculated. Air conditioning is always engaged.
To remove de-fog/deice the front side windows and windshield quickly.
Air to windshield and side windows. Some air flows from the air dashboard vents.
In cold or humid weather (blower speed should be moderate to high).
Air distribution
Use
04
Air to the floor and windows. Some air flows from the dashboard air vents.
To ensure comfortable conditions and good defogging in cold or humid weather.
Air to floor and from dashboard air vents.
In sunny weather with cool outside temperatures.
`` 131
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate system
Air distribution
Airflow to windows and from dashboard air vents.
Use
To ensure good comfort in warm, dry weather.
Airflow to the head and
To ensure efficient
chest from the dashboard cooling in warm
04
air vents.
weather.
Air distribution
Use
Air to floor. Some air flows to To warm or cool the feet. the dashboard air vents and windows.
Airflow to windows, from dashboard air vents and to the floor.
To cool the feet or provide warmer air to the upper body in cold weather or hot, dry weather.
132
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Introduction The audio system is available in two versions: High Performance and Premium Sound. The system version is shown in the display when the audio system is switched on.
If the audio system is on when the ignition is switched off, it will come on automatically the next time the ignition is put in mode I or higher. The audio system can be operated without a key in the ignition slot for 15 minutes at a time by pressing the POWER button (the driver's door must be closed on vehicles with the optional keyless drive).
Some functions are controlled from the menu system in the center console. For more information on menus, see page 122.
Dolby Surround Pro Logic II and the symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. The Dolby Surround Pro Logic II System is manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
Overview
Socket for external audio source (AUX, USB, iPod)1 Steering wheel keypad Center console control panel Control panel with headphone socket* Rear seat control panel
Audio system
Steering wheel keypad
04
Confirm selection in menu system and controls for a bluetooth-connected cell phone (see page 147). Go higher in the menu system. Interrupt current function. Volume A short press scrolls between CD tracks or preset radio stations. A long press searches within CD tracks or searches for radio stations automatically. Please note that these functions are also available through the audio system controls on center console.
1 iPod is a registered trademark of Apple Inc.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
`` 133
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Audio system
Audio functions
tion can be set at low, medium or high. Select the level under Audio settings Auto
· Balance Balance between the right and
left speakers.
volume control.
· Subwoofer* Level for the bass speaker.
External audio source audio volume External devices such as an MP3 player can be connected to the AUX input, see page 133. The volume of the external sound source AUX may
The subwoofer can be switched off by turning control (3) counterclockwise to MIN. The location of the subwoofer is shown in the illustration.
be different from the volume of the internal
sound sources such as the CD player or the
radio. If the external sound source's volume is
04
too high, the quality of the sound may be
impaired. To help prevent this, adjust the input
Center console, controls for audio functions
volume of the external audio source:
Internal audio sources: AM, FM and CD
External audio source or Sirius satellite radio*. For connection, see page 133 Push button and knob controls for adjusting sound settings Menu navigation button
Volume and on/off
Audio volume and automatic volume control The audio system compensates for disrupting noises in the passenger compartment by increasing the volume according to the speed of the vehicle. The level of sound compensa-
1. Set the audio system in AUX mode using MODE and use (4) to navigate to Volume, AUX input.
2. Turn the control (3) or press / the navigation button.
Sound settings Press the control (3) repeatedly to toggle among the sound settings. Adjustments are made by turning the control (3).
· Bass Bass level. · Treble Treble level. · Fader Balance between the front and
rear speakers.
· Surround* Surround settings.
Under Surround, 3 channel stereo or Dolby Surround Pro logic II can be activated by selecting 3-ch or Dpl2 respectively. This enables the following options:
· Center level2 Level for the center
speaker.
· Surround level2 Level for surround
sound.
2 Premium Sound
134 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Audio system
Equalizer Sound levels for different frequencies can be adjusted separately using the equalizer3.
1. Go to Audio settings and select Equalizer Front or Equalizer Rear.
The sound level for the frequency is adjusted with / on the navigation button. Press / to select another frequency.
There is also a dynamic calibration that takes into consideration the volume level, radio reception, and the speed of the vehicle.
The settings that are described in this manual, such as Bass, Treble, and Equalizer are only intended to enable the user to adapt sound reproduction to his/her personal tastes.
Radio functions
Scan the current wave band
Auto store the strongest radio stations in the area Station preset buttons
Select wave band AM and FM (FM1 and FM2)
Automatic tuning 1. Select a wave band using FM or AM.
2. Use ENTER to save or EXIT to close.
2. Press / on the navigation button.
04
Sound stage4 The sound experience can be optimized for the driver's seat, both front seats or the rear seat. Select one of the options under Audio settings Soundstage.
Optimal sound reproduction The audio system is calibrated for optimal sound reproduction using digital signal processing.
This calibration takes into account factors such as the speakers, amplifier, cabin acoustics, the listeners' seating positions, etc., for each combination of vehicle/audio system.
Center console, controls for radio functions Navigation button for automatic tuning
Cancel a menu selection or a selected function
G031441
Manual tuning 1. Select a wave band using FM or AM.
2. Turn TUNING to select a station.
Preset stations Ten station presets can be stored for each wave band. FM has two memories for presets: FM1 and FM2. The stored presets are selected using the preset buttons.
Preset storage can be carried out manually or automatically.
Manually storing preset stations 1. Tune into a station.
Manual tuning
3 Certain audio systems 4 Certain markets only.
`` 135
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Audio system
2. Hold in one of the preset buttons until the Scan
USB/iPod connector*
message Channel stored appears on the The function automatically searches the cur-
display.
rent wave band for strong stations. When a
Automatically storing preset stations The function is especially useful in areas where the radio stations and their frequencies are unfamiliar. The ten strongest radio stations are
station is found, it is played for approx. eight seconds before scanning is resumed. While the station is playing it can be stored as a preset as usual.
stored automatically in a separate memory.
1. Select a wave band using FM or AM.
04
2. Hold in AUTO until Autostoring...
appears on the display.
NOTE
Storing a station interrupts the SCAN function.
Once Autostoring... disappears from the display, the stations are stored. The radio continues in Auto mode and Auto appears on the display. The automatically stored presets can now be selected using the preset buttons. Automatic preset storage can be cancelled using EXIT.
Auto mode is cancelled by pressing for example AUTO or FM.
Returning to Auto mode provides access to the autostored presets:
1. Press AUTO. > Auto appears on the display.
1. Select a wave band using AM or FM.
2. Press SCAN. > SCAN appears on the display. Close using SCAN or EXIT.
Radio text Some stations transmit information on program content, artists, etc. This information can be shown on the display.
Activate/deactivate in FM mode under Radio text.
AUX and USB sockets in the storage compartment between the front seats
An auxiliary device, such as an iPod, MP3 player or a USB flash drive can be connected to the audio system via the connectors in the center console storage compartment. A standard cable from an iPod or MP3 player can be routed under the cover to the AUX connector in the storage compartment.
A sound source must be chosen, depending on the device that has been connected:
1. Use MODE to select iPod or USB. The text CONNECT DEVICE will be displayed.
2. Press a preset button.
2. Connect the device to the connector in the center console storage compartment (see the illustration).
136 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Audio system
The text LOADING will be displayed while the system loads the files (folder structure) on the device. This may take a short time.
When information about the files (the folder structure) on the device has been loaded, the resulting list includes information on the artist,
NOTE
The system supports playback of files in the most common versions of formats such as mp3, wma, and wav. However, there may be versions of these formats that the system does not support.
iPod An iPod receives current and its battery is charged through the connecting cord. However, if the iPod's battery is completely drained, it should be recharged before the iPod is connected to the audio system.
genre and song title.
To navigate in the folder structure, press ENTER and scroll up and down the folders using the arrow buttons (on the audio system control panel or on the steering wheel keypad). Press the right arrow button to select a folder.
The system also supports a number of iPod models produced in 2005 or later. iPod Shuffle is not supported.
USB flash drive To simplify the use of a USB flash drive, it is
NOTE
When an iPod is used as a sound source,
the vehicle's audio system has a menu
structure similar to the one in the iPod. See
04
the iPod's manual for detailed information.
Press the left arrow button to go up a level in
advisable to only store music files on the drive.
the folder structure. Press ENTER to go down It will take considerably longer for the system
For further information, refer to the accessory
a level in the folder structure.
to index the files on the drive if it contains any- manual USB/iPod Music Interface.
thing other than compatible music files.
Tracks can be selected in two ways:
· Turn the manual tuning knob clockwise or
NOTE
Rear control panel with headphones socket*
counterclockwise
The system supports removable media that
Headphones with an impedance of
· Use the right or left arrow keys on the nav-
igation control to select the desired track. The arrow keys on the steering wheel keypad can also be used in the same way.
uses the USB 2.0 standard and the FAT32 file system and can index up to 500 folders and a maximum of 64,000 files. The device must have at least 256 Mb of memory.
16 32 ohm and sensitivity of 102 dB or higher are recommended for best sound reproduction.
MP3 player Many MP3 players have a file indexing system that is not supported by the vehicle's audio system. In order to use an MP3 player, the system must be set to USB Removable device/ Mass Storage Device.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
`` 137
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Audio system
Scroll/search forward and backward Short presses on (2) are used to scroll between CD tracks or preset radio stations. Long presses are used to fast-wind CD tracks or to search for radio stations automatically.
HD Radioreception (U.S. models only)
Introduction
Limitations The audio source (FM, AM, CD, etc.) being played in the speakers cannot be controlled from the rear control panel.
04
Volume control (right/left sides)
Scroll/search forward and back
MODE select AM, FM, HD Radio5, CD, AUX, USB/iPod* and ON/OFF. Headphones sockets (3.5 mm)
Activating/deactivating The control panel is activated by pressing MODE when the audio system is switched on. It is switched off automatically when the audio system is switched off or by a long press on MODE.
Display when the radio is receiving an HD Radio broadcast
NOTE
HD radio volume may fade in and out at times due to coverage limitations.
HD radio is a brand name registered by the Ibiquity digital corporation6. They are the developer of a broadcasting technology called IBOC or In Band On Channel, which refers to the method of transmitting a digital radio
5 Available on U.S. models only
6 HD Radio (TM) technology is manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corp. U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD Radio(TM) and the HD and HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp.
138 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Audio system
broadcast signal centered on the same frequency as the AM or FM station's present frequency.
The IBOC system is referred to as a "hybrid"
since it is both analogue and digital. During
hybrid operation, receivers still continue to
receive the analogue (non-digital) signal. HD
radio receivers incorporate both modes of
reception, where the receiver will automatically
switch to the analogue signal if the digital signal
cannot be decoded or is lost by the receiver.
When you have tuned to an HD Radio station,
the
symbol will appear in the audio sys-
tem display.
More information about HD radio and IBOC can be found on Ibiquity's website, www.hdradio.com and www.ibiquity.com.
Benefits of digital broadcasting
· Better sound (FM sounds near CD quality
and AM as analogue FM).
· Some FM frequencies offer a greater num-
ber of listening choices through "multicasting" (consisting of a frequency's main channel and any sub-channels that may also be available on that particular frequency. See also the section "Sub-channels" below).
· When receiving a digital signal there is no
multipath disturbance or hisses/pops/ crackling due to outside influences.
How HD broadcasting works HD Radio works similarly to conventional radio and broadcasts of this type are available in many areas of the United States. However, there are a few key differences:
· Instead of transmitting one analogue sig-
nal, stations send out a bundled signal both analogue and digital.
· An HD radio receiver can receive both dig-
ital and analogue broadcasts. Depending on the terrain and location of the vehicle (which will influence the signal strength), the receiver will determine which signal to receive.
Limitations
· Main channel vs. sub-channels (FM
only): The main channel is the only channel that can receive in hybrid mode (both digital and analogue). If a frequency has subchannels, they are broadcast in digital mode only. The main FM channel will be displayed as, for example, 93.9 WNYC (Volvo uses the symbol > to indicate there are sub-channels available) The sub-FM channels will be displayed as 93.9 2 WNYC, 93.9 - 3 WNYC, etc.
· Reception coverage area: Due to current
IBOC transmitter power limitations, the reception coverage area in digital mode is somewhat more limited than the station's analogue coverage area. Please be aware
that as with any radio broadcast technology, terrain, time of day, foliage level and building location can have positive or negative effects on radio reception.
· Analogue to digital/digital to analogue
blending: Analogue to digital blending will occur as the signal strength reaches a preset threshold in the receiver. This will be noticeable in fringe areas (areas with weak reception) and is normal.
NOTE
04
There may be a noticeable difference in sound quality when a change from analogue to digital or digital to analogue occurs, such as:
· Volume increase or decrease
· Equalizer settings, i.e. Bass/ Midrange/
Treble cut or boost
· Time alignment (Digital program mate-
rial in extreme cases can be as much as 8 seconds behind the analogue). This will noticeable as a "stuttering" effect.
The above items are dependant on the broadcaster's equipment settings and do not indicate a fault in the vehicle's radio receiver or antenna systems.
`` 139
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Audio system
Switching HD on or off
Sub-channels
main channel, press the left arrow key. To go
The factory setting for HD radio is on. However,
to subchannel 2 (if available), press the right
when driving through areas with weak HD sig-
arrow key.
nals (fringe areas), you may experience that the radio repeatedly switches between analogue/ digital and digital/analogue reception. If this happens, it may be desirable to switch HD off.
If you are currently tuned to a frequency's main channel, pressing the left arrow key will tune to the next lower radio frequency.
To do so:
NOTE
1. Be sure the audio system is switched on and in AM or FM mode.
04 2. Press MENU in the center console control panel.
· When the radio has gone into HD mode,
it may take several seconds before the ">" symbol (if the current frequency has any sub-channels) is displayed to the
3. Press ENTER to turn HD off (the X will disappear from the box on the display screen).
This will disable the radio's capability to receive digital broadcasts but it will continue to function as a conventional (analogue) AM/FM receiver. Please note that when HD is switched off, it will not be possible to tune to sub-channels (see the following section for a more detailed explanation of sub-channels).
Repeat steps 2 and 3 above to reactivate HD (an X will appear in the box on the display screen).
Example of an HD Radio station with sub-channels
In many cases, a main HD Radio station (FM wavebands only) will also have sub-channels offering additional types of programming or music.
In such cases, the ">" symbol will be displayed to the left of the frequency number and a number will be displayed to the right of the frequency number indicating that the currently tuned frequency has at least one sub-channel. The "2" in the illustration indicates that you are currently listening to the first sub-channel on frequency 93.9.
right of the frequency. Pressing the arrow keys before the number is displayed will cause the radio to tune to the next available radio station, not to the current station's sub-channels.
· When you are no longer in broadcasting
range of the currently tuned sub-channel, No HD reception will be displayed. The radio will then be muted and it will be necessary to tune to or search for a new radio station.
Sub-channels can also be stored as presets, see page 135 for information on storing sta-
Selecting sub-channels
tions.
To listen to a station's sub-channel(s), press
If you press a sub-channel's preset button, it
the right arrow key on the center console or on may take up to 6 seconds before the channel
the steering wheel keypad. To go back to the
becomes audible. If you press this button while
140
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Audio system
you are out of digital range of the transmitter, Activating Sirius radio
4. Press ENTER or the right arrow key to
No HD reception will be displayed.
1. Tune to a satellite channel that has no
select a category.
audio, which means that the channel is
> The first channel in the selected cate-
Sirius satellite radio*
unsubscribed and the text "Call 888-539SIRIUS TO SUBSCRIBE" is displayed (see
gory will then be played.
Listening to satellite radio The Sirius satellite system consists of a number of high elevation satellites in geosynchronous orbit.
also "Selecting a channel".
2. Call Sirius at 1-888-539-SIRIUS (7474).
3. When asked for the Sirius ID number press AUTO to display this number. It is also
NOTE
· The category ALL is default, which ena-
bles you to scroll through the entire list of available satellite channels.
NOTE
possible to retrieve the Sirius ID from the menu.
· The channel categories are automati-
cally updated several times a year. This
04
· The digital signals from the Sirius satel-
lites are line-of-sight, which means that
physical obstructions such as bridges,
4. UPDATING SUBSCRIPTION will be displayed while the subscription is being
takes approximately two minutes and will interrupt normal broadcasting. A message will be displayed while updat-
tunnels, etc, may temporarily interfere
updated, after which the display will return
ing is in progress. Information on chan-
with signal reception.
to the normal view.
nel or feature updates is available at
· Avoid any obstructions, such as metal-
lic objects transported on roof racks or in a ski box, or other antennas that may impede signals from the SIRIUS satellites.
Selecting Sirius radio mode 1. Press Power to switch on the audio sys-
tem (see page 134 and see page 135 for information on the standard audio and
SIRIUS ID The SIRIUS ID is required when contacting the Sirius Call Center. It is used to activate your account and when making any account transactions. The SIRIUS ID is sometimes referred to as the Electronic Serial Number (ESN).
Selecting a channel category 1. Select Sirius radio mode as described
above.
www.sirius.com.
Selecting a channel There are three ways of tuning in a channel:
· Using the left and right arrow keys · By turning the tuning control · Through direct channel entry.
radio functions).
2. Press ENTER.
2. Press the MODE button repeatedly until Sirius 1 or 2 is displayed.
3. Use the up/down arrow keys to scroll through the list of categories.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
`` 141
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Audio system
NOTE
· The numbers of skipped or locked
channels will not be displayed.
· If a channel is locked, the access code
must be entered before the channel can be selected. See "Unlocking a channel" on page 143.
page 135 for detailed information on storing channels.
· A long press on one of the number keys
stores the currently tuned channel on that key.
· A short press on a number key while the
radio is in Sirius 1or 2 mode will tune to the preset satellite channel stored on that but-
If a new song is selected when the memory is full, you will be prompted to press ENTER to delete the last song on the list.
NOTE
The remaining songs in the list will move down one position, and the newly added song will be placed at the top of the list.
ton, regardless of the currently selected
Direct channel entry
channel category.
Song seek
04
The Sirius satellite channels are in numerical order throughout all of the categories. To access a channel directly:
1. Press MENU and scroll to Direct channel
Song Seek and Song Memory The Song Seek and Song Memory functions provide both audio and visual notification when Sirius is broadcasting your favorite songs.
When a satellite radio channel plays one of the songs stored in the song memory, the listener will be alerted by a text message and an audible signal.
entry.
Song Seek enables you to store the name of Press ENTER to listen to the song or EXIT to
2. Use the numerical keypad to enter the
the song for future advance notification when cancel.
channel's number.
3. Press ENTER. The radio will tune to this channel, even if it belongs to a category
that song is being played. The Song Memory feature makes it possible to view all of the current songs that are stored in memory.
To activate/deactivate the song seek function: 1. Press MENU
other than the currently selected one.
Song memory
2. Scroll to Song seek
Scanning SCAN automatically searches through the list of satellite channels. The search will only be carried out in the selected category, see page 135 for more detailed information.
Storing a channel A total of 20 satellite channels can be stored;
Up to ten songs can be saved in the system's memory.
1. Press MENU.
2. Scroll to Add song to song mem. and follow the instructions shown in the display.
3. Press ENTER to activate or deactivate the function.
NOTE
When the song has ended, the radio will remain tuned to the channel on which the song was played.
10 channels each for Sirius 1 and 2, see
142
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Audio system
Radio text The text that is displayed about the song that is currently playing can be changed. Use the
Skip options This function is used to remove a channel from the list of available channels.
NOTE
All channels are initially unlocked.
AUTO button or the menu to display the Artist, Title, Composer, or switch radio text off.
Advanced settings This menu function enables you to make settings on certain Sirius satellite radio functions. To access this menu: 1. Press MENU. 2. Scroll to the Sirius menu. 3. Select Advanced Sirius settings.
Skipping a channel 1. Select CHANNEL SKIP LIST and press
ENTER.
2. Select a category in the list and press ENTER.
3. Skip channels in the list presented by pressing ENTER or right arrow key.
Unskip all channels This permanently removes all channels from the skip list and makes them available for
Locking a channel: 1. Select Sirius ID in the menu and select
LOCK OPTIONS and press ENTER.
2. Select CHANNEL LOCK LIST and press ENTER
3. Enter the channel access code7 and press
04
ENTER.
4. Select a category in the list and press ENTER.
selection.
5. Lock channels in the list presented by
WARNING
Temp. unskip all ch.
pressing ENTER or right arrow.
Settings should be made when the vehicle is at a standstill.
The following settings can be made in the Sirius menu:
· The list of saved songs can be displayed · Channel skip settings can be made · Channel lock settings can be made · The channel access code can be displayed
or changed
This function will temporarily unskip all channels and make them available for selection. The channels remain on the skip list and will again be skipped the next time the ignition is switched on.
Channel lock Access to specific channels can be restricted (locked). A locked channel will not provide audio, song titles, or artist information.
The channel is now locked and a checked box will be displayed to indicate this. It will be necessary to enter the channel access code7 in order to listen to a locked channel.
Unlocking a channel A channel's access code7 is required to unlock a channel.
Unlock all channels This permanently removes all channels from the locked list and makes them available for
· Your Sirius ID can be displayed
selection.
7 The default code is 0000. If you have changed the code and forgotten it, see the section "If you have forgotten the access code."
`` 143
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Audio system
Temp. unlock all ch.
Your Volvo retailer can also provide you with
Playing a CD (CD player8)
This function will temporarily unlock all chan-
assistance.
If a music CD is in the player when CD is
nels and make them available for selection. The channels remain on the locked list and will again be locked the next time the ignition is switched on.
SIRIUS ID This function displays the 12-digit Sirius activation ID.
pressed, it will be played automatically. Otherwise, insert a disc and press CD.
Playing a CD (CD changer)
CHANGE CODE This function makes it possible to change the
CD functions
channel access code. The default code is
0000.
04
To change the code:
If a CD position with a music CD is already selected when CD is pressed, it will be played automatically. Otherwise select a disc with the number buttons 1 6 or / on the navigation button.
1. Select CHANGE CODE and press ENTER.
Insert a CD (CD changer) 1. Select an empty position with the number
buttons 1 6 or / on the navigation
2. Enter the current code and press ENTER.
button.
3. Enter the new code and press ENTER.
4. Confirm the new code and press ENTER.
If an incorrect code is entered, the text WRONG CODE! is displayed. If you have forgotten the access code: 1. Select SIRIUS ID in the Sirius settings
menu and press ENTER.
2. Press and hold the ENTER button for 2 seconds.
3. The current code will be displayed.
Center console, controls for CD functions CD eject CD slot Fast back/forward and change CD track Button for changing CD tracks Scan CD
G031443
> An empty position is marked on the display. The text Insert disc shows that a new disc can be inserted. The CD changer can hold up to six CDs.
2. Insert a CD in the CD changer slot.
Disc eject For reasons of traffic safety, an ejected CD must be removed within 12 seconds or it will be automatically drawn back into the slot and the CD player will enter pause mode. Press the CD button to restart the disc.
Select disc (optional CD changer only)
8 Certain markets only.
144
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Audio system
Eject individual discs by pressing the eject button.
length of time that this takes depends on the quality of the disc.
vate. Interrupt with EXIT or SCAN to continue playing the current CD track/sound file.
Eject all discs with a long press on the eject button. The entire magazine is emptied disc by disc.
Navigating the disc and playing tracks If a disc containing sound files is inside the CD player, press ENTER to display the disc's
Random This function plays the tracks in random order (shuffle). The random CD tracks/sound files
NOTE
directory structure. The directory structure is navigated in the same way as the audio sys-
can be scrolled through in the normal way.
The Eject all function can only be used while
tem's menu structure. Sound files have the
NOTE
the vehicle is at a standstill and will be cancelled if the vehicle begins to move.
symbol and directories have the symbol. Press ENTER to play a selected folder or a file.
It is only possible to scroll between random CD tracks on the current disc.
04
Pause When the audio system volume is turned off completely, the CD player will pause and will resume playing when the volume is turned up again.
Sound files In addition to playing normal music CDs, the CD player/changer can also play discs containing files in mp3 or wma format.
NOTE
Some copy protected sound files may not be read by the player.
When a CD containing sound files is inserted into the player the disc's directory structure is scanned before the CD begins playing. The
When the music file has been played, the player will continue to play the rest of the files in the current folder. When all of the files in the folder have been played, the player will automatically go to the next folder and play the files in it.
Fast-forward/change CD tracks and sound files Short presses / on the navigation button are used to scroll between CD tracks/sound files. Long presses are used to search within CD tracks/sound files. TUNING (or the steering wheel keypad) can also be used for this purpose.
Scan CD This function plays the first ten seconds of each CD track/sound file. Press SCAN to acti-
Different messages are displayed depending on which random function has been selected:
· RANDOM means that the tracks from only
one music CD are played
· RND ALL means that all tracks on all
music CDs in the optional CD changer are played.
· RANDOM FOLDER means that the sound
files in a directory on the current CD are played.
CD player If a normal music CD is being played, activate/ deactivate under Random.
If a disc with sound files is being played, activate/deactivate under Random Folder.
`` 145
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Audio system
CD changer If a normal music CD is being played under Random Single disc or Random All discs. The All discs feature only applies to the music CDs in the changer. If a CD with sound files is being played, activate/deactivate instead under Random Folder. If you select another CD the function is deactivated. 04 Disc text If title information is stored on a music CD it can be shown on the display9. Activate/deactivate in CD mode under CD settings Disc text.
9 Only applies to the CD changer.
146
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Bluetooth® hands-free connection
Introduction
and other controls on the cell phone can always be used regardless of whether or not the phone is connected to the hands-free system.
Bluetooth® functions in the center console control panel
System overview Cell phone
Location of the microphone
Steering wheel keypad
Center console control panel and display
Bluetooth® hands-free This feature makes it possible to set up a wireless connection between a Bluetooth-enabled cell phone and the vehicle's audio system. This enables the audio system to function as a hands-free connection and allows you to remote-control a number of the phone's functions. The microphone used by this system is located in the ceiling console (2). The buttons
NOTE
Not all cell phones are fully compatible with the hands-free system. A list of compatible phones is available at your Volvo retailer or at www.volvocars.us
WARNING
Never use the hands-free feature or any other device in your vehicle in a way that distracts you from the task of driving safely. Distraction can lead to a serious accident.
04
VOLUME This function is also available on the steering wheel keypad. Keys containing letters and numbers for dialing numbers, adding phone book entries, etc. PHONE Press to activate/deactivate the Bluetooth function Navigation buttons
EXIT Press to end or defer calls, erase characters that have been entered, end an ongoing function. This function is also available on the steering wheel keypad. ENTER Answer a call. Press once to display the most recently dialed number. This
`` 147
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Bluetooth® hands-free connection
function is also available on the steering
Alternative 1using the vehicle's menus
disconnect it from the hands-free system
wheel keypad. Getting started
1. Activate the cell phone's Bluetooth® function (refer to the phone's owner's manual if necessary) or go to www.volvocars.com
(by pressing PHONE in the center console for several seconds).
2. Perform a search using the cell phone's
Use the controls on steering wheel keypad (3) and in the center console (4) to access, navigate and make selections in the hands-free system's menus (see page 152).
2. Activate the vehicle's Bluetooth® handsfree system by briefly pressing the PHONE button.
> Add phone will be displayed. If one or
Bluetooth® function (consult the cell phone's owner's manual if necessary).
3. Select My Car in the list of devices shown in the cell phone's display.
Activating/deactivating
more cell phones are already registered 4. When prompted, enter the PIN code 1234
04
A short press on the PHONE button in the cen-
in the system, they will also be dis-
in the cell phone.
ter console activates the hands-free system. The text TELEPHONE will appear at the top of
played. 3. Select Add phone.
5. Connect to My Car from the cell phone.
the display to indicate that the audio system is
The cell phone will be registered and will be
in telephone mode.
> The audio system will search for cell
connected automatically to the audio system
phones that are in range. This search
while the text Synchronising is displayed. For
The
symbol indicates that the hands-free
takes approximately 30 seconds. Any
more information on synchronizing a cell
system is active.
phones detected will be displayed with phone, see page 150.
A long press on the PHONE button deactivates the hands-free system and disconnects the cell phone.
their Bluetooth® names. The hands-free system's Bluetooth® name will appear in the cell phone's display as My Car.
When a connection has been established, the symbol and the cell phone's Bluetooth®
name will be displayed. The cell phone can
Connecting cell phones
4. Select one of the cell phones shown in the audio system's (center console) display.
now be controlled from the audio system.
The procedure for connecting a cell phone varies, depending on the phone itself, and on whether or not the phone has been previously connected.
5. Using the cell phone's keypad, enter the digits shown in the audio system's display.
Alternative 2using the cell phone's menus
Making a call 1. Ensure that TELEPHONE is shown at the
top of the center console display and that the symbol is visible (by pressing briefly
If this is the first time the phone is to be con-
1. Activate the hands-free system by briefly
on PHONE on the center console).
nected to the hands-free system, proceed as follows:
pressing the PHONE button in the center console. If there is a cell phone connected,
2. Dial the desired phone number or use the phone book (see page 150).
148
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Bluetooth® hands-free connection
3. Press ENTER.
Handling calls
NOTE
End the call by pressing EXIT.
Incoming calls
· On certain cell phones, the connection
Disconnecting the cell phone The cell phone is automatically disconnected from the audio system if it is moved out of
± Press ENTER to answer a call, even if the audio system is currently in e.g., CD or FM mode.
is broken when the mute function is used, which is normal. If this happens, the hands-free system will prompt you to reconnect.
range. For more information about connections, see page 148.
± Press EXIT to defer a call.
· A new call cannot be initiated while
Automatic answer
another call is in progress.
The cell phone can be manually disconnected This function means that incoming calls will be
from the hands-free system by pressing
answered automatically. Activate or deactivate
PHONE. The hands-free system is also deac- the function in the menu system under Phone Sound settings
04
tivated when the ignition is switched off (or if
settings Call options Automatic
the driver's door is opened on vehicles equipped with the optional keyless drive).
answer.
Call volume Call volume can be adjusted when the hands-
When the cell phone is disconnected from the hands-free system, a call in progress can be continued using the cell phone's own speaker
Call settings While a call is in progress, press MENU or ENTER on the center console to access the
free system is activated. Use the buttons in the steering wheel keypad or the audio system's volume control.
and microphone.
following functions:
Audio system volume
NOTE
· Microphone offmute the audio system's
microphone.
While a phone call is in progress, volume for the audio system can be adjusted in the normal
Certain cell phones may require confirmation from the phone's keypad when a call is transferred from hands-free to the cell phone.
· Transfer call to mobiletransfer the call
from hands-free to the cell phone.
· Phone bookthis feature enables you to
search for a stored telephone number.
way with the audio system's volume control. In order to adjust volume during a phone call, the audio system must be switched to one of the other modes (FM, CD, etc).
Audio system sound can be automatically
muted when a phone call is received in Phone
settings Sounds and volume Mute
radio and adjust the volume with the /
keys on the center console.
`` 149
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Bluetooth® hands-free connection
Ringing volume
More information about registering
A connection can also be established in the
Go to Phone settings Sounds and volume and connecting cell phones
menu system under Bluetooth Connect
Ring volume and adjust the volume with
A maximum of 5 cell phones can be registered phone or Change phone.
the / keys on the center console.
Ringing tones The hands-free system's integrated ringing tones can be selected in Phone settings Sounds and volume Ring signal Ring signal 1,2,3.... 04
NOTE
in the hands-free system. Registration only needs to be done once for each phone. After registration, the cell phone no longer needs to be in sight or searchable. Only one cell phone can be connected to hands-free at a time. Phones can be unregistered in Bluetooth Remove telephone
Automatic connection When the hands-free system is active and the
Phone book In order to use the hands-free system's phone book (list of contacts), TELEPHONE must be displayed at the top of the center console display and the symbol must be visible.
The audio system stores a copy of the phone book of each registered cell phone. The phone book is automatically copied each time a
The connected cell phone's ring tone is not
most recently connected cell phone is within
phone is connected. This function can be acti-
switched off when one of the hands-free system's ringing tones is used.
If you prefer to use the connected cell phone's ring tone1, go to Phone settings Sounds
range, it is detected automatically. When the audio system searches for the most recently connected phone, this phone's name appears in the display. To manually connect a different cell phone, press EXIT.
vated in Phone settings Synchronise phone book. Searches for contacts are only made in the phone book of the currently connected cell phone.
and volume Ring signal Use mobile phone signal
Manual connection To connect a phone other than the one that was most recently connected or to switch between cell phones that are already registered in the hands-free system:
NOTE
If a particular cell phone does not support copying of the phone book, List is empty will be displayed when copying has been completed.
1. Put the audio system in telephone mode.
2. Press PHONE in the center console and select one of the phones on the list.
If the phone book contains information about someone who is trying to call you, this information will be shown in the display.
1 Not supported by all cell phones.
150
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Bluetooth® hands-free connection
Searching for contacts The easiest way to search for a contact in the
phone number has been stored, press and hold 1 to dial this number.
Button Function
phone book is to press and hold any of the buttons 29 (see the illustration on page 147). This starts a search based on the first letter on the button that has been pressed.
The phone book can also be accessed by
Call lists Lists of calls in a particular cell phone are copied to the hands-free system each time that phone is connected. These lists are then updated while the phone is connected. Press
Space .1-? ! , : " ' ( ) A B C 2 Ä Å À Æ Ç D E F 3 È É
pressing the navigation buttons / on the ENTER to show the most recently dialed num-
center console or by pressing / on the
bers. Other call lists can be found under Call
G H I 4 Ì
steering wheel keypad. A search can also be
register.
made in the phone book's search menu in Phone book Search:
NOTE
04 J K L 5
1. Enter the first letter of the contact's name and press ENTER or simply press ENTER.
2. Select the desired contact and press ENTER to make a call to that person.
Voice control If the cell phone that is currently connected allows calls to be made via voice commands, this function can be used by pressing and holding ENTER.
Voice mail number The phone number to your voice mail can be changed in the menu Phone settings Call options Voice mail number. If no number has been stored, this menu can be accessed by a prolonged press on button 1. Once a
Certain cell phones display the list of the most recently dialed numbers in reverse order.
Entering text Text is entered by using the number buttons in the center console. Press a button once to enter the first letter on the button, twice to enter the second letter, etc. Continue to press the button to display other characters.
Press EXIT briefly to erase a character. Press and hold EXIT to erase all of the characters that have been entered. Use the / buttons on the center console to navigate among the characters.
M N O 6 Ñ Ö Ò Ø
P Q R S 7 ß
T U V 8 Ü Ù
W X Y Z 9
Press briefly if two characters are to be entered in succession from the same button. + 0 @ * # & $ £ / %
Shift between uppercase and lowercase letters
`` 151
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Bluetooth® hands-free connection
Bluetooth® menus
1.
Missed calls
2.
Received calls
3
Dialed calls
4.
Phone book
4.1. Search
4.2. Copy fr. mobile phone
5. 04
Bluetooth... 5.1. Change phone
5.2. Connect phone
5.3. Disconnect phone
5.4. Connect fr. mobile phone
6.
Phone settings
6.1. Call options
6.1.2. Automatic answer
6.1.3. Voice mail number
6.2. Sounds and volume
6.3. IDIS
6.4. Synchronize phone book
152
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Trip computer
Introduction
Information display and controls READpress to acknowledge/confirm/ erase a message) Thumb wheel (used to scroll among the trip computer menus) RESETresets certain functions
To scroll through trip computer information, move the thumb wheel up or down. Continue turning to return to the starting point.
G022909
Functions
NOTE
If a warning message appears while you are using the trip computer, this message must be acknowledged in order to return to the trip computer function. Acknowledge a message by pressing READ.
To change the unit of measure specified for distance and speed, contact an authorized Volvo workshop.
Average speed The system calculates the average speed from the last resetting. Reset using RESET.
Current speed in mph (Canadian models only) This function provides the driver with an instantaneous conversion of the car's current speed from km/h to mph.
Current speed in km/h (U.S. models only) This function provides the driver with an instantaneous conversion of the car's current speed from mph to km/h.
Current fuel consumption (Instantaneous) Current fuel consumption is calculated every second. The information on the display is
updated every few seconds. When the vehicle is stationary, "----" appears on the display.
Average fuel consumption The average fuel consumption since the last reset. Reset using RESET.
Driving distance on current fuel reserve
This function shows the approximate distance
that can be driven on the fuel remaining in the
tank. The calculation is based on average fuel
consumption during the last 20 miles (30 km)
04
of driving and the amount of fuel remaining in
the tank when the reading was taken. When the
message ---- miles to empty tank appears in
the display, refuel as soon as possible.
NOTE
The actual distance that can be driven on the usable fuel remaining in the tank may be influenced by a change in driving style.
See also page 204 for information on driving economically.
Resetting 1. Select Average speed or Average fuel
consumption.
2. Press and hold RESET for approx. 1 second to reset the selected function. If RESET is kept depressed for at 3 three
`` 153
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Trip computer
seconds, Average speed and Average fuel consumption are reset simultaneously. 04
154
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Compass
Operation
netic zone. The character C is shown in the mirror's display if calibration is necessary.
Selecting a magnetic zone
1
1. Stop the vehicle in a large open area, safely
out of traffic and away from steel structures
2
15
and high-tension electrical wires.
3
14
Rearview mirror with compass.
2. Start the vehicle.
13 4
NOTE
12
For best results from calibration, switch off all electrical equipment in the vehicle (climate system, windshield wipers, audio sys-
5
8
11
9 10
6
7
04
G018632
tem, etc.) and make sure that all doors are
closed.
Magnetic zones.
The rearview mirror has an integrated display that shows the compass direction in which the vehicle is pointing. Eight different directions are shown with the abbreviations: N (north), NE (north east), E (east), SE (southeast), S (south), SW (southwest), W (west) and NW (northwest).
The compass is displayed automatically when the vehicle is started or in ignition mode II. To switch the compass on/off use a pen or similar object and press in the button on the rear side of the mirror.
Calibration The compass may need to be calibrated if, for example, the vehicle is driven into a new mag-
3. Using a pen or similar object, press and hold the button on the rear side of mirror until C is shown again in the mirror(after approx. 6 seconds).
4. Drive as usual. C disappears from the display when calibration is complete.
Alternative calibration method:
Drive slowly in a circle at a speed of no more than 5 mph (8 km/h) until C disappears from the display when calibration is complete.
The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones. The correct zone must be selected for the compass to work correctly.
1. Put the ignition in mode II.
2. Using a pen or similar object, press and hold the button on the rear side of mirror for at least 3 seconds. The number for the current area will be shown.
3. Press the button repeatedly until the number for the required geographic area (1 15) is shown.
4. The display will revert to showing the compass direction after several seconds.
155
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Stability system
Introduction
Spin control (SC)
The Dynamic Stability and Traction Control system (DSTC) consists of a number of functions designed help reduce wheel spin, coun-
The spin control function is designed to help prevent the drive wheels from spinning while the vehicle is accelerating.
teract skidding, and to generally help improve directional stability.
Under certain circumstances, such as when driving with snow chains, or driving in deep
CAUTION
snow or loose sand, it may be advisable to temporarily switch off this function for maxi-
A pulsating sound will be audible when the
mum tractive force.
system is actively operating and is normal.
04
WARNING
Traction control (TC) This function is designed to help reduce wheel spin by transferring power from a drive wheel that begins to lose traction to the wheel on the opposite side of the vehicle (on the same axle).
TC is most active at low speeds.
The car's handling and stability characteristics will be altered if the spin control function has been disabled.
Operation
This is one of DSTC's permanent functions and cannot be switched off.
Active Yaw Control (AYC) This function helps maintain directional stability, for example when cornering, by braking one or more of the wheels if the vehicle shows a tendency to skid or slide laterally.
This is one of DSTC's permanent functions and cannot be switched off.
G021409
Temporarily switching off Spin control 1. Turn the thumbwheel until the DSTC
menu is shown.
2. Hold down the RESET button to toggle between DSTC SPIN CONTROL ON or OFF.
Messages in the information display DSTC Temporarily OFF system function has been temporarily reduced due to high brake disc temperature. The function is activated automatically when the brakes have cooled.
DSTC Service required the system has been disabled due to a fault. If this occurs:
1. Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the engine.
2. Restart the engine.
If the message remains when the engine is restarted, drive to an authorized Volvo workshop to have the system inspected.
Symbols in the instrument panel
If the symbols
and
are displayed
at the same time, read the message in the information display.
If the symbol
appears alone, it may
appear as follows:
156
· If the symbol flashes, this indicates that the
stability system is actively functioning to help counteract wheel spin and/or a skid.
· If the symbol remains on for approximately
2 seconds after the engine has been started, this indicates that the system is performing a self-diagnostic test.
WARNING
The stability system is intended to help improve driving safety. It supplements, but can never replace, the driver's judgment and responsibility when operating the vehicle. Speed and driving style should always be adapted to traffic and road conditions.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Stability system
04
157
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Active chassis systemFour C
Active chassis (Four C)*
Active chassis, Four-C (Continuously Controlled Chassis Concept), regulates the characteristics of the shock absorbers so that the car's driving characteristics can be adjusted. There are three settings: Comfort, Sport and Advanced.
Operation
Comfort
Comfort mode offers a somewhat softer ride
and the transmission shifts gears at lower rpm.
04
This mode is particularly suitable for long-dis-
tance highway driving. The indicator light in the
button will be on when this mode is selected.
Chassis settings
Sport In this mode, the vehicle's body sway is reduced during cornering and steering response is more immediate. The transmission shifts up at higher rpm for sportier driving. The indicator light in the button will be on to indicate that Sport mode has been selected.
Advanced In this mode, body sway in curves is minimal and steering response is very direct. Gear shifting is done at high rpm in each gear for dynamic and active driving.
Use the buttons in the center console to change setting. The setting in use when the engine is switched off is activated the next time the engine is started.
Speed-dependent steering force* Steering force increases with the speed of the vehicle to give the driver enhanced sensitivity. At low speed the vehicle is easy to steer in order to facilitate parking, etc.
Steering force can be changed under Car settings Steering force level. For a description of the menu system, see page 122.
NOTE
This steering force level menu function cannot be accessed when the vehicle is in motion.
158 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Cruise control
Operation
> The symbol illuminates and the text
NOTE
(---) mph (5) indicates that cruise control is in standby mode.
· A temporary increase in speed by
pressing the accelerator pedal, for less
NOTE
than 1 minute (e.g. when passing another car), does not affect the current
This does not set the vehicle's speed.
cruise control setting. The vehicle will automatically return to the previously
Setting a speed
set speed when the accelerator pedal is released.
Use the or buttons set the vehicle's cur-
· If one of the cruise control buttons is
rent speed. The set speed is shown in the dis-
kept depressed for more than approx.
04
play.
1 minute cruise control is disengaged.
G022910
Steering wheel-mounted controls and display
NOTE
The engine must then be switched off in order to reset cruise control.
Standby mode
Cruise control cannot be engaged at
Resume set speed Deactivating
speeds below 20 mph (30 km/h). Adjusting the set speed
Automatic deactivation Cruise control is automatically deactivated temporarily if one of the following occurs:
Activate/set speed
After a speed has been set, it can be increased · If the speed drops below approximately
Set speed indicator (parentheses indicate standby mode)
Engaging the cruise control function Before a speed can be set, the cruise control system must be engaged (put in standby mode).
± Press the CRUISE button (1).
or decreased by using the or buttons.
1. Press and hold down or until the vehicle reaches the desired speed. > This will become the set speed when the button is released.
2. Press or for approximately a half second and release the button to increase or decrease vehicle speed by approximately 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
20 mph (30 km/h).
· When the brake pedal is depressed. · If the gear selector is moved to position N. · During wheel spin or wheel lock-up. · If the vehicle's speed is increased by using
the accelerator pedal for more than 1 minute.
The currently set speed will be saved in the system's memory.
`` 159
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Cruise control
Temporary deactivation The driver can temporarily deactivate cruise control by pressing 0. The saved speed is shown in brackets in the information display. Resume set speed If cruise control has been deactivated temporarily, it can be reactivated by pressing . The vehicle's speed returns to the most recently set speed. 04
WARNING
There may be a significant increase in speed after the button has been pressed.
Deactivation Cruise control is disengaged with CRUISE, by putting the gear selector in Neutral, or by switching off the engine. The set speed is cleared.
WARNING
Cruise control should not be used in heavy traffic or when driving on wet or slippery roads. Cruise control may not maintain set speed on steep downgrades.
160
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Introduction Collision Warning with Auto-brake is designed to assist the driver if there is a risk of a collision with the vehicle ahead, if that vehicle is at a standstill or moving in the same direction as your vehicle. Auto-brake helps reduce the collision speed.
Collision Warning consists of the following three functions:
· Collision warning warns the driver of the
imminent risk of a collision.
· Brake support helpsthe driver brake effi-
ciently in a critical situation.
· Auto-brake brakes the vehicle automati-
cally if a collision cannot be avoided.
WARNING
The auto-brake function cannot prevent a collision but instead is intended to reduce speed at the moment of impact. For full braking effect, driver must apply the brakes.
Collision warning with Auto-brake*
WARNING
· The collision warning system does not
work in all driving situations, and traffic, weather and road conditions.
· The collision warning system is not
designed to detect pedestrians.
· Warnings are only provided when the
risk of collision is high. The Function section provides information about limitations that the driver must be aware of before use.
· Never wait for a collision warning. This
system is designed to be a supplementary driving aid. It is not, however, intended to replace the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is responsible for maintaining a safe distance and speed, even when the collision warning system is in use.
· Maintenance of the collision warning
system components must only be performed by a trained and qualified Volvo technician.
Function
04
Function overview Visual warning signal, collision risk Radar sensor Camera
Collision warning The radar sensor and the camera work together to detect stationary vehicles and vehicles that are moving in the same direction as your vehicle. If there is a risk of collision, the driver is alerted by a flashing red warning light and an audible warning signal. Collision warning is active at speeds above 5 mph (7 km/h). Brake support If the risk of collision continues to increase after the collision warning has been given, brake
G017382
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
`` 161
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Collision warning with Auto-brake*
support is activated. Brake support prepares the brake system to react quickly, and the brakes are applied slightly. This may be experienced as a light tug.
If the brakes are applied quickly, full braking effect will be provided, even if pressure on the brake pedal is light.
On and off To switch Collision Warning on or off, go into the menu Car settings Collision warning settings and select On or Off. When the engine is started, the setting that was selected when it was switched off will be used.
Activating/deactivating warning signals
WARNING
· The setting Short should only be used
in situations where traffic is light and moving at low speeds.
· Collision Warning alerts the driver to the
risk of a collision but this function cannot reduce the driver's reaction time.
Auto-brake
The collision warning system's audible and vis-
· For Collision Warning to be as effective
If a collision is imminent and the driver has not ual signals are activated automatically when
as possible, it is recommended that Dis-
04
applied the brakes, the auto-brake function is activated without the driver pressing the brake
the engine is started if the collision warning system is activated.
tance Alert be set to 4 or 5, see page 180.
pedal. Limited brake force is applied to reduce the vehicle's speed when the collision occurs.
The audible warning signal can be activated/ deactivated by selecting the alternative On or
NOTE
WARNING
The auto-brake function cannot prevent a collision but instead is intended to reduce speed at the moment of impact. For full braking effect, driver must apply the brakes.
NOTE
The auto-brake function is always on and
Off in Car settings Collision warning settings Warning sound.
Setting a warning distance This setting determines the distance at which the visual and audible warnings are triggered. Select Long, Normal or Short under Car settings Collision warning settings Warning distance
· When adaptive cruise control is used,
the warning light and signal will be used by cruise control, even if they have been deactivated by the driver.
· In situations where traffic is moving at
considerably different speeds, or if the vehicle ahead brakes suddenly, warnings may be considered to be late, even if the setting Long has been selected.
cannot be turned off.
The warning distance determines the level of
Operation
Some settings are controlled from the center console via a menu system. For information on how the menu system is used, see page 122.
sensitivity used by the system. The warning distance Long provides an earlier warning. Begin by using Long and if the system gives too many warnings, try changing to Normal.
Checking settings The current Collision Warning settings can be checked by going into the menu system at Car settings Collision warning settings. See page 122 for more information on the menu system.
162 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Collision warning with Auto-brake*
Limitations Strong sunlight, reflections, extreme light contrasts, the use of sunglasses, or if the driver is not looking straight ahead may make the visual warning signal in the windshield difficult to see. For this reason, always activate the audible warning signal in such conditions.
WARNING
· In certain situations, the system cannot
provide warnings or warning may be delayed if traffic conditions or other external factors make it impossible for the radar sensor or camera to detect the vehicle ahead.
NOTE
If warnings are given too frequently, the warning distance can be reduced (see page 162. This causes the system to provide later warnings, which decreases the total number of warnings provided.
NOTE
· Warnings may not be provided if the
distance to the vehicle ahead is short,
The camera's limitations The camera is used by Collision Warning with
The visual warning signal may be temporar-
or if movements of the steering wheel/
Auto-brake, Driver Alert Control (see
ily disengaged in the event of high passen-
brake pedal are great, such as during
page 183), and Lane Departure Warning (see
04
ger compartment temperature due to strong sunlight, etc. If this occurs, the audible warning signal will be used, even if it has been deactivated in the menu system.
active driving.
· The sensor system has a limited range
for stationary or slow-moving vehicles
page 186). NOTE
Warnings may not appear if the distance to the vehicle ahead is very small or if steering wheel and pedal movements are great, for example, due to a very active driving style.
and may therefore give delayed or no warnings if your vehicle's speed is above approximately 45 mph (70 km/h).
· Warnings for stationary or slow-moving
vehicles may not be provided in dark conditions.
· To help protect the camera in very hot
conditions, it may be temporarily switched off for approximately 15 minutes after the engine has been started.
· Keep the section of the windshield in
front of the camera clean and free of ice,
snow, or condensation.
The Collision Warning system uses the same
radar sensors as Adaptive Cruise Control. For
more information on the radar sensor and its
limitations, see page 176.
If no warning is given, or if a warning is delayed, Auto-brake will also not be provided or will be delayed.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
`` 163
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Collision warning with Auto-brake*
WARNING
Fault tracing and actions
· The camera has the same limitations as
the human eye. In other words, its "vision is impaired" by adverse weather conditions such as heavy snowfall,
If the message Windshield sensors blocked is displayed, this means that the camera is obscured and cannot detect vehicle or road marker lines in front of the vehicle.
dense fog, etc. These conditions may
This, in turn, means that Collision Warning with
reduce the function of systems that
Auto-brake, Lane Departure Warning, and
depend on the camera or cause these
Driver Alert Control will not have full function-
systems to temporarily stop function-
ality.
ing.
The table lists possible causes for this mes-
04
· Never place any objects, decals, etc.,
sage being displayed, and suitable actions.
on the windshield in front of the camera.
This could reduce or block the camera's
function, and could cause one or more
of the systems that utilize the camera to
stop functioning.
· Strong sunlight, reflections from the
road surface, ice or snow covering the road, a dirty road surface, or unclear lane marker lines may drastically reduce the camera's capacity to detect the side of a lane or another vehicle.
Cause
The surface of the windshield in front of the camera is dirty or covered with ice or snow.
Fog, heavy rain or snow is interfering with the function of the camera.
Action Clean or clear the section of the windshield in front of the camera.
No action possible. Heavy precipitation may affect the function of the camera.
164 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Collision warning with Auto-brake*
Cause
Action
The surface of the windshield is clean but the message remains in the Wait a short time. It may take several minutes for the camera to register
display.
visibility.
The surface between the inside of the windshield and the camera is dirty. Contact an authorized Volvo retailer or service technician to have this surface cleaned.
Symbols and messages in the display
Symbol Message
Description
Collision warn. OFF
Collision Warning is switched off. This message is displayed when the engine is started and will dis-
04
appear after approx. 5 seconds. It can also be erased by pressing the READ button.
Collision warn. Unavailable
Collision Warning cannot be activated. This message is displayed when the driver attempts to activate the function. It will disappear after approx. 5 seconds or can be erased by pressing the READ button.
Auto braking was activated
Auto-braking has been active.
Camera blocked See manual
The camera is temporarily not functioning. This message is displayed if the camera is obstructed by snow, ice, dirt, etc., on the windshield. Clean the area of the windshield in front of the camera, see page 163 for more information on the camera's limitations.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
`` 165
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Collision warning with Auto-brake*
Symbol
Message Radar blocked See manual
Collision warn. Service required
Description
Collision Warning and Auto-brake are temporarily not functioning. The radar sensor is blocked, for example by heavy rain or snow that has accumulated in front of the sensor, and cannot detect other vehicles, see page 176 for more information on the radar sensor's limitations.
Collision Warning and Auto-brake are partially or completely not functioning. Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician if the message remains in the display.
04
166 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Introduction City SafetyTM1 is a support system designed to help the driver avoid low speed collisions when driving in slow-moving, stop-and-go traffic.
City SafetyTM is not active if your vehicle's speed is below approximately 2 mph (4 km/h). This means that City SafetyTM will not react if your vehicle approaches another vehicle at very low speed, for example, when parking.
The function is active at speeds ranging from approximately 2-18 mph (4-30 km/h) and assists the driver by applying the brakes automatically, thereby avoiding or helping to reduce the effects of a collision.
City SafetyTM is designed to intervene as late as possible to help avoid unnecessary activation.
City SafetyTM triggers brief, forceful braking if a low-speed collision is imminent. However, the system will not intervene in situations where the driver actively steers the vehicle or applies the brakes, even if a collision cannot be avoided. This is done in order to always give the driver's actions highest priority.
City SafetyTM activates in situations where the driver has not applied the brakes in time, which
means that the system cannot help the driver in all situations.
City SafetyTM should not be used to alter the way in which the driver operates the vehicle. The driver should never rely solely on this system to safely stop the vehicle.
Normally, the occupants of the vehicle will not be aware of City SafetyTM except when the system intervenes when a low-speed collision is imminent.
If the vehicle is also equipped with the optional Collision Warning with Auto-brake system, the two systems interact. For more information about the Collision Warning with Auto-brake system, see page 161.
1 City Safety is a registered trademark of the Volvo Car Corporation
City SafetyTM
WARNING
· City SafetyTM is a supplemental aid to
the driver. It can never replace the driver's attention to traffic conditions or his/her responsibility for operating the vehicle in a safe manner.
· City SafetyTM does not function in all
driving situations or in all traffic, weather
or road conditions.
· City SafetyTM only reacts to vehicles
traveling in the same direction as your
04
vehicle and does not react to small vehi-
cles, bicycles or motorcycles or to peo-
ple or animals.
· City SafetyTM is not activated when your
vehicle is backing up.
· City SafetyTM functions at speeds up to
18 mph (30 km/h). This system can help prevent a collision if the difference in speed between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead is less than 9 mph (15 km/h). If the difference in speed is greater, a collision cannot be avoided but the speed at which the collision occurs can be reduced. The driver must apply the vehicle's brakes for full braking effect.
· Never wait for City SafetyTM to intervene
in a potential collision situation. The
`` 167
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
City SafetyTM
driver is always responsible for maintaining a safe distance to the vehicle ahead.
Function
SafetyTM can help prevent a collision from taking place.
· If the difference in speed is between
approximately 10-18 mph (16-30 km/h), City SafetyTM alone cannot avoid a collision. The driver must apply the brakes for full braking effect.
Using City SafetyTM
NOTE
The City SafetyTM function is activated automatically each time the engine has been switched off and restarted.
04
When the function activates and applies the brakes, a message will appear in the information display to indicate that the system is/has been active.
On and Off In certain situations, it may be desirable to switch City SafetyTM off, such as when driving in close quarters where leaves, branches, etc.
NOTE
may obscure the hood and windshield.
Location of the laser sensor in the windshield
City SafetyTM monitors traffic ahead of you using a laser sensor mounted in the upper section of the windshield. If a collision is imminent, City SafetyTM will automatically apply the brakes at approximately 50% of the vehicle's full braking effect if you are traveling at speeds between 2-18 mph (4-30 km/h).
· If the difference in speed between your
vehicle and the vehicle ahead is less than approximately 9 mph (15 km/h), City
· When City SafetyTM applies the brakes,
the brake lights will illuminate.
· In cases where City SafetyTM has stop-
ped the vehicle, the system will then release the brakes. The driver must apply the brakes to keep the vehicle at a standstill.
Display and turn signal lever Thumb wheel
RESET button
When the engine is running, City SafetyTM can be switched off as follows:
G021409
168
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
City SafetyTM
1. Use the thumb wheel to scroll until City
City SafetyTM will be automatically switched on faces may not be detected. Normally, the
Safety is displayed.
the next time the engine is started, even if it was license plate and taillight reflectors give the
2. Press the RESET button for approximately 1 second until Off is displayed.
off when the engine was switched off.
rear section of a vehicle ahead sufficient reflective surfaces to be detected.
WARNING
Limitations The sensor used by City SafetyTM is designed
NOTE
The laser sensor emits light when the ignition is in mode II or higher, even if City SafetyTM has been switched off.
to detect cars and other larger motor vehicles ahead of your vehicle in both daylight and darkness.
· Keep the windshield in front of the laser
sensor free of ice, snow, dirt, etc. See
page 168.
However, there are certain limitations and the
· Snow or ice on the hood deeper than
To switch City SafetyTM on again:
laser sensor's function may be reduced by, for
2 inches (5 cm) may obstruct the sen-
04
· Follow the same procedure as for switch- example, heavy rain or snowfall, or by dense
sor. Keep the hood free of ice and snow.
ing City SafetyTM off but select On by
fog or thick, blowing dust or snow. Condensa-
· Do not mount or in any way attach any-
pressing RESET.
tion, dirt, ice or snow on the windshield may
thing on the windshield that could
also interfere with the sensor's function.
obstruct the laser sensor.
or
· Vehicles not equipped with keyless
drive: Press lightly on the remote key to release it partially from the ignition slot. Press the remote key into the ignition slot again. Depress the brake pedal and press
Objects such as warning flags hanging from long objects on the roof or accessories such as auxiliary lights or protective arches on the front of the vehicle that are higher than the hood may also impede the sensor's function.
Troubleshooting
If Windshield sensors blocked appears in the information display, this indicates that the City SafetyTM laser sensor is obstructed in
the START/STOP ENGINE button to start Braking distance to the vehicle ahead increa-
some way and cannot detect vehicles ahead of
the engine. This restarts City SafetyTM.
ses on slippery road surfaces, which may
you, which means that the system is not func-
· Vehicles equipped with the optional
reduce City Safety's capacity to avoid a colli- tioning.
keyless drive: Press the START/STOP ENGINE button to switch off the engine. Depress the brake pedal and press the START/STOP ENGINE button to start the engine. This restarts City SafetyTM.
See page 79 for information on ignition modes.
sion. In situations like this, the DSTC system (see page 156) will help provide the best possible braking capacity and stability.
City SafetyTM emits infrared light and measures the way in which the light is reflected. Therefore, vehicles or objects with low-reflective sur-
However, this message will not be displayed in all situations in which the sensor is obstructed. For this reason, the driver must ensure that the area of the windshield in front of the sensor is always kept clean.
`` 169
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
City SafetyTM
The following table shows some of the situations that can cause the message to be displayed and suggested actions.
Cause
Action
The area of the
Clean the wind-
windshield in front of shield or remove the
the sensor is dirty or ice/snow.
covered by ice or
snow. 04
The laser sensor's Remove the
field of view is
obstruction.
obstructed.
CAUTION
If a crack, scratch or stone chip should occur in the section of the windshield in front the laser sensor and covers an area of approximately 1/50 x 1/10 in. (0.5 x 3 mm) or larger, contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician to repair or replace the windshield (see the illustration showing the location of the sensor on page 168). Failing to do so may result in reduced City SafetyTM functionality.
To help prevent reduced functionality, please also observe the following:
· If the windshield is replaced, use the
same type or a windshield approved by Volvo.
· When replacing windshield wipers, use
the same type or ones approved by Volvo.
The laser sensor
The upper decal describes the laser beam's classification and contains the following text: Invisible Laser radiation Do not view directly with optical instruments (magnifiers) Class 1M laser product. The lower decal describes the laser beam's physical data and contains the text: IEC 60825-1:1993 + A2:2001. Complies with FDA performance standards for laser products except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50, dated July 26th, 2001 The laser beam's physical data is listed in the following table:
G033853
170
Maximum pulse energy Maximum average output Pulse length Divergence (horizontal × vertical)
2.64 J 45 mW 33 ns 28° × 12°
NOTE
The function of aftermarket laser detectors may be affected by City Safety's laser sensor.
WARNING
The laser sensor emits light when the ignition is in mode II or higher, even if City SafetyTM has been switched off.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
WARNING
Eye injury may occur if any of the following points are not followed:
· It is essential that all pertinent instruc-
tions be followed when handling laser instruments. Testing, repairing, removing, adjusting and/or replacing any components in the laser sensor may only be done by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
· Do not remove the laser sensor (includ-
ing removal of the lenses). A laser sensor that has been removed belongs to laser class 3B according to standard IEC 60825-1. Devices in laser class 3B present a risk of injury to the eyes.
· The laser sensor's connector must be
disconnected before the sensor is removed from the windshield.
· The laser sensor must be mounted in
place on the windshield before connecting the sensor's connector.
· Do not view the laser sensor (which
emits spreading, invisible laser beams) with optical instruments from a distance of less than 4 inches (100 mm).
City SafetyTM
Symbols and messages in the display When City SafetyTM automatically applies the brakes, one or more of the symbols in the main instrument panel may illuminate and its associated message will be displayed. A text message can be erased by pressing briefly on the READ button on the turn signal lever.
04
`` 171
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
City SafetyTM
Symbol Message
Meaning/action required
Auto Braking by City Safety City SafetyTM is applying/has applied the brakes automatically.
Windshield sensors blocked The laser sensor is temporarily not functioning due to an obstruction.
· Remove the obstruction and/or clean the windshield in front of the sensor(s).
04
For more information on the sensor's limitations, see page 169.
City Safety Service required
City SafetyTM is not functioning.
· If this message remains in the display, have the system checked by a trained and qualified Volvo
service technician.
City Safety ON/OFF City Safety Unavailable
City SafetyTM can be switch on or off manually. On or Off will be displayed, see the section "On and Off."
If the text Unavailable is displayed instead of Off or On, City SafetyTM has been switched off automatically for technical reasons.
The text City Safety Unavailable will also be displayed.
172
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Introduction Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is an optional system designed to assist the driver by maintaining a set speed or a set distance to the vehicle ahead. It is primarily intended for use on long straight roads in steady traffic, such as on highways and other main roads.
WARNING
· Do not use the adaptive cruise control
system in demanding driving conditions such as city traffic, winding roads, at intersections, on slippery surfaces, in poor visibility, heavy rain, etc.
· Maintenance of cruise control compo-
nents must only be performed by an authorized Volvo workshop.
WARNING
· Adaptive cruise control cannot cover all
driving situations and traffic, weather and road conditions. The Function section provides information about limitations that the driver must be aware of before using the adaptive cruise control.
· This system is designed to be a supple-
mentary driving aid. It is not, however, intended to replace the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is responsible for maintaining a safe distance and speed and must intervene if adaptive cruise control does not maintain a suitable speed or suitable distance.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*
Function
04
Function overview Warning light, braking by driver required Controls Radar sensor in front grille
Adaptive cruise control consists of:
· A cruise control system to maintain a set
speed
· A system to maintain a set distance to the
vehicle ahead (expressed as a time interval. For example, you can choose to remain approximately 2 seconds behind the vehicle ahead).
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
`` 173
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*
WARNING
· Adaptive cruise control is not a collision
avoidance system. The driver is always responsible for applying the brakes if the system does not detect another vehicle.
of the vehicle ahead exceeds the speed that you have set.
The adaptive cruise control system is designed to smoothly regulate speed. However, the driver must apply the brakes in situations that require immediate braking. This applies when
WARNING
When adaptive cruise control disengages, the brakes will not be modulated automatically. The driver must assume full control over the vehicle.
· Adaptive cruise control does not react
to slow moving or stationary vehicles.
there are great differences in speed between vehicles, or if the vehicle ahead brakes suddenly.
Warning light-driver braking required Adaptive cruise control has a braking capacity that is equivalent to approximately 30% of the
04
The distance to the vehicle ahead (in the same
lane) is measured by a radar sensor. Your vehi-
cle's speed is regulated by acceleration and
braking. The brakes may emit a sound when
they are being modulated by the adaptive
cruise control system. This is normal.
WARNING
Due to limitations in the radar sensor, braking may occur unexpectedly or not at all, see page 176.
vehicle's total braking capacity. In situations requiring more brake force than ACC can provide, if the driver does not apply the brakes, an audible signal will sound and a red warning light will illuminate in the windshield to alert the driver to react.
WARNING
The brake pedal moves when the adaptive cruise control system modulates the brakes. Do not rest your foot under the brake pedal.
Adaptive cruise control can only be activated at speeds above 20mph (30 km/h). If speed falls below 20 mph (30 km/h) or if engine speed (rpm) becomes too low, adaptive cruise control disengages and will no longer modulate the brakes. In situations when adaptive cruise control cannot be activated Cruise Control
NOTE
Strong sunlight, reflections, extreme light contrasts, the use of sunglasses, or if the driver is not looking straight ahead may make the visual warning signal in the windshield difficult to see.
The adaptive cruise control system is designed to follow the vehicle ahead of you in the same
Unavailable is shown in the display, see page 178.
WARNING
lane, at a set time interval.
Cruise control only warns of vehicles
If the radar sensor has not detected a vehicle ahead, the system will then attempt to maintain the set speed. This is also the case if the speed
detected by the radar sensor, see page 176. In some cases there may be no warning or the warning may be delayed. The driver should always apply the brakes when
necessary.
174 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*
Operation
illuminates in the display and (---) indicate
NOTE
that ACC is in standby mode.
· If one of the adaptive cruise control but-
Setting a speed Use the or buttons to store (set) the vehicle's current speed. The set speed, for example 55 mph, is shown in the display.
tons is pressed for more than approximately one minute, ACC will be deactivated. The engine must then be switched off and restarted to reset ACC.
· In some situations cruise control cannot
NOTE
be activated. Cruise Control Unavailable is shown in the display,
Adaptive cruise control cannot be engaged
see page 178.
at speeds below 20 mph (30 km/h).
04
Controls and display Activate and resume settings, increase speed Standby mode, on/off
Set time interval
Activate and set a speed
Set speed (parentheses indicate standby mode) Time interval while it is being set
Time interval after it has been set
Engaging the cruise control function Before ACC can be used, it must first be put in standby mode. To do so, press . The symbol
nated.
The "car" symbol illuminates on the left side of the display when the radar sensor detects another vehicle ahead. The distance to a vehicle ahead is only regulated when this symbol is illumi-
Adjusting the set speed After a speed has been set, it can be increased or decreased by using the or buttons.
When the system is in active mode, the button has the same function as , but results in a smaller increase in speed.
Setting a time interval The set time interval to vehicles ahead is increased with and decreased with . The current time interval is shown briefly in the display following adjustment.
Five different time intervals can be selected and are shown in the display as 15 horizontal bars. The greater the number of bars, the longer the time interval. At low speeds, when the distance to the vehicle ahead is short, ACC increases the time interval slightly. In order to follow the vehicle ahead as smoothly as possible, ACC allows the time interval to vary considerably in certain situations.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
`` 175
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*
WARNING
· Only use a time interval that is suitable
in current traffic conditions.
· A short time interval gives the driver lim-
ited reaction time if an unexpected sit-
trol. The set speed is then cleared and cannot be resumed.
When ACC is activated, the vehicle's speed increases by approximately 1 mph (1 km/h) each additional time is pressed.
must then intervene and adapt the vehicle's speed to the surrounding traffic.
Automatic deactivation may be caused if:
· the vehicle's speed falls below 20 mph
(30 km/h)
uation occurs in traffic.
Deactivation due to action by the driver ACC is deactivated:
· the wheels lose traction or if the anti-lock
brake system (ABS) is activated
04
The number of bars indicating the selected time interval are shown while the setting is being made and for several seconds afterward. A smaller version of the symbol is then shown to the right in the display. The same symbol is
· when the brakes are applied
· if the gear selector is moved to N
· if the accelerator pedal is depressed for an
extended period.
· brake temperature is high
· engine speed (rpm) is too low
· the radar sensor is obstructed by, for
example, wet snow or rain.
also displayed when Distance Alert is acti-
vated, see page 180 .
NOTE
The radar sensor and its limitations
Deactivating and resuming settings Cruise control is deactivated, either with a short press on , or by action taken by the driver, such as braking, etc. The set speed, for
If the accelerator pedal is only depressed for a short time, such as when passing another vehicle, ACC is deactivated temporarily and is reactivated when the pedal is released.
The radar sensor is used by both Adaptive Cruise Control and the Collision Warning System with Auto-brake. It is designed to detect cars or larger vehicles driving in the same direction as your vehicle.
example 55 mph, is then shown in parentheses. Speed and time interval are resumed by pressing .
Automatic deactivation Adaptive cruise control is linked to other systems such as ABS, the stability and traction
WARNING
Accessories or other objects, such as extra
WARNING
control system (DSTC), and the Distance Alert System. If any of these systems are not func-
headlights, must not be installed in front of the grille.
There may be a significant increase in speed
tioning properly, adaptive cruise control is
Modification of the radar sensor could make
after the button has been pressed.
automatically deactivated.
its use illegal.
A short press on in standby mode or a long press in active mode deactivates cruise con-
In the event of automatic deactivation a signal will sound and the message Cruise Control Canceled is shown in the display. The driver
The radar sensor's capacity to detect vehicles ahead is impeded:
176 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*
· if the radar sensor is obstructed and can-
not detect other vehicles, for example in heavy rain, or if snow or other objects are obscuring the radar sensor.
NOTE
Keep the area in front of the radar sensor clean.
lanes between your vehicle and the one that the system has already detected.
Small vehicles, such as motorcycles, or vehicles not driving in the center of the lane may remain undetected.
In curves, the radar sensor may detect the wrong vehicle or lose a detected vehicle from view.
· if the speed of vehicles ahead is signifi-
cantly different from your own speed.
WARNING
The radar sensor has a limited field of vision. In some situations it may detect a vehicle later than expected or not detect vehicles at all.
Fault tracing and actions
04
If the message Radar blocked See manual is
displayed, this means that the radar signals
from the sensor have been obstructed and that
a vehicle ahead cannot be detected.
This, in turn, means that the functions of the ACC, Distance Alert, and Collision Warning System with Auto-brake will not function.
G021414
Radar sensor field of vision (gray)
In certain situations, the radar sensor cannot detect vehicles at close quarters, for example a vehicle that suddenly enters the
The table lists possible causes for this message being displayed, and suitable actions.
Cause
Action
The surface of the radar in the grille is dirty or obstructed in some way. Clean the radar surface, or remove the object causing the obstruction.
Heavy rain or snow is interfering with the radar signals.
No action possible. Heavy precipitation may affect the function of the radar.
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 177
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*
Cause
Action
Swirling water or snow from the surface of the road may interfere with No action possible. A very wet or snow-covered road surface may affect
the radar signals.
the function of the radar.
The surface of the radar is clean but the message remains in the display. Wait a short time. It may take several minutes for the radar to detect that it is no longer obstructed.
Symbols and messages in the display
04
Symbol Message
-
Description Standby mode or active mode when no other vehicle has been detected.
-
Active mode with a detected vehicle to which ACC is adapting speed/distance.
-
Time interval while it is being set.
-
Time interval after it has been set.
-
Turn on DSTC
to enable Cruise
ACC cannot be activated until the stability system (DSTC) has been activated. see page 156 for more information on DSTC.
-
Cruise control canceled ACC has been automatically switched off.
The driver must regulate the vehicle's speed/distance to the vehicle ahead.
-
Cruise control unavailable ACC cannot be activated. This may be due to:
· high brake temperature · the radar sensor is obstructed (by heavy rain, snow, etc.)
178 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Symbol
Message Radar blocked See manual
Cruise control Service required
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*
Description ACC has been temporarily disconnected because the radar is obstructed in some way and cannot detect other vehicles. see page 176 for information on the radar sensor's limitations.. ACC is not functioning. Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 179
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Distance alert
Introduction
Distance Alert is part of Adaptive Cruise Control and is a function that provides information about the time interval to the vehicle ahead.
NOTE
Distance Alert is in active mode while Adaptive Cruise Control is active.
Time interval information is only given for a vehicle that is driving ahead of your vehicle, in the same lane, and in the same direction. No
Distance Alert is active at speeds above approximately 20 mph (30 km/h).
information is provided for vehicles driving toward you, moving very slowly, or at a stand-
WARNING
still. 04
Distance Alert only indicates the distance to the vehicle ahead. It does not affect the speed of your vehicle.
Operation
> The indicator light in the button illuminates when the function is on.
Setting a time interval The buttons for setting a time interval are located on the left side of the steering wheel, see the illustration on page 175 .
± Press to increase the interval or to decrease it.
Five different time intervals can be selected and are shown in the display as 15 horizontal bars. The greater the number of bars, the longer the time interval.
A smaller section of the red warning light in the windshield glows steadily if your vehicle is closer to the vehicle ahead than the set time interval.
± Press the button in the center instrument panel to switch this function on or off.
No. of bars
1 2 3 4 5
Approx. time interval (in seconds) 1.0 1.4 1.8 2.2 2.6
The number of bars indicating the selected time interval are shown while the setting is
180
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Distance alert
being made and for several seconds afterward. Limitations
WARNING
A smaller version of the symbol is then shown to the right in the display. The same symbol is also displayed when Adaptive Cruise Control is activated.
The Distance Alert function uses the same radar sensor used by Adaptive Cruise Control and the Collision Warning system. See page 176 for more information on the radar sensor's
· Bad weather or winding roads may
affect the radar sensor's capacity to
detect vehicles ahead.
limitations.
· The size of the vehicle ahead, such as a
NOTE
motorcycle, may also make it difficult to
· The higher your vehicle's speed, the
NOTE
detect. This may result in the warning light illuminating at a shorter distance
greater the distance to the vehicle
Strong sunlight, reflections, extreme light
than the one that has been set, or that
ahead, measured in feet (meters), for a
contrasts, the use of sunglasses, or if the
the light will not come on at all.
given time interval.
driver is not looking straight ahead may
04
· The set time interval is also used by
Adaptive Cruise Control, see page 175.
make the visual warning signal in the windshield difficult to see.
WARNING
Only use a time interval that is suitable in current traffic conditions.
Symbol Message -
-
Description Time interval while it is being set.
Time interval after it has been set.
`` 181
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Distance alert
Symbol
Message Radar blocked See manual
Collision warn. Service required
Description Distance Alert has been temporarily disconnected because the radar is obstructed in some way and cannot detect other vehicles. See page 176 for information on the radar sensor's limitations.
Distance Alert or Collision Warning with Auto-brake is not functioning properly. Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
04
182
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Driver Alert System*
Introduction
The Driver Alert System is designed to help a driver who may be becoming fatigued or who is inadvertently leaving the lane.
Driver Alert Control (DAC)general information
DAC is designed to help detect a slowly changing driving pattern. It is primarily intended to be used on main roads and is not meant for use in city traffic.
The Driver Alert System consists of two different functions that can be switched on together
WARNING
or separately.
· DAC is not intended to extend the dura-
· Driver Alert Control (DAC) · Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
When one or both of the functions has been
tion of driving. Always plan breaks at regular intervals to help remain alert.
· In certain cases, fatigue may not affect
the driver's behavior. In situations of
04
G017332
switched on, it is in standby mode and is acti-
this type, no warning will be provided.
vated when the vehicle exceeds a speed of
Therefore, it is important to take breaks
40 mph (65 km/h).
at regular intervals, regardless of
The function deactivates if speed goes under 37 mph (60 km/h).
Both functions use a camera that is dependent on the road/lane being clearly marked by painted lines on each side.
WARNING
The Driver Alert system does not function in all situations and is designed to be a supplementary aid. It is not, however, intended to replace the driver's attention and judge-
This function is intended to alert the driver if his/her driving becomes erratic, such as if the driver is distracted or fatigued.
NOTE
The camera has certain limitations, see page 163.
A camera monitors the painted lines marking the lane in which the vehicle is traveling and compares the direction of the road with the
whether or not DAC has given a warning.
Limitations In certain situations, DAC may provide warnings even if the driver's driving pattern has not become erratic.
· if the driver is testing the LDW function · in strong crosswinds · on grooved road surfaces.
ment.
driver's movements of the steering wheel. The
driver is alerted if the vehicle does not follow
the lane smoothly.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
`` 183
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Driver Alert System*
Operating DAC
Thumb wheel. Turn this wheel until Driver If the vehicle is being driven erratically, the
Certain settings can be made from the menu system controlled from the center instrument panel, see page 122 for more information on the menu system.
The current system status can be checked on
Alert is displayed. The second line shows the alternative Off, Unavailable, or [-----], i.e., the number of bars.
READbutton. Confirms and erases a message in the display.
driver will be alerted by an audible signal and the message Driver Alert, Time for a break is displayed. The warning will be repeated after a short time if the driving pattern remains the same.
the trip computer's display by using the buttons on the left steering wheel lever.
Activating DAC In the center instrument panel, go to Car settings Driver Alertand select On.
WARNING
· An alert should be taken seriously since
it is sometimes difficult for a driver to
04
The function is activated when the
realize that he/she is fatigued.
vehicle exceeds a speed of 40 mph (65 km/h). The display will show level
· In the event of a warning or if the driver
feels fatigued, stop as soon as possible
markings of 15 bars, where a low
in a safe place and rest.
number of bars indicates erratic driving. A high
number of bars indicates stable driving.
184 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Driver Alert System*
Symbols and messages in the display
Symbol Message
Description
-
Driver Alert
OFF
The function is not switched on.
-
Driver Alert
Unavailable
The vehicle's speed is below 37 mph (60 km/h) or the road lacks clear marking lines.
Driver Alert
The function is analyzing the driver's driving pattern. The number of bars varies from 15, where a low
number of bars indicates erratic driving. A high number of bars indicates stable driving.
04
Driver Alert Time for a break
Camera blocked See manual
Driver Alert Sys Service required
The vehicle has been driven erratically. The driver receives an audible signal and a text message.
The camera is temporarily not functioning, due to snow, ice, or dirt on the windshield. Clean the area of the windshield in front of the camera. See page 163 for information on the camera's limitations.
The system is not functioning. Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician if the message remains in the display.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
`` 185
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Driver Alert System*
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) general information
Operation and function
If the camera can no longer monitor the road's side marker lines, or if the vehicle's speed falls below 37 mph (60 km/h), LDW will return to standby mode and Lane Depart Warn Unavailable will be displayed.
If the vehicle unexpectedly crosses the lane's left or right side marker lines, the driver will be alerted by an audible signal.
No warning signal will be given in the following situations: 04
· The turn signal is being used
· The driver's foot is on the brake pedal1
This function is designed to help reduce the risk of accidents in situations where the vehicle leaves its lane and there is a risk of driving off the road or into the opposite lane. LDW consists of a camera that monitors the lane's side marker lines. The driver is alerted by an audible signal if the vehicle crosses a side marker line or the road's center dividing line.
LDW can be switched on or off by pressing the button on the center console. A light in the button illuminates when the function is on.
The trip computer display shows Lane Depart Warn Unavailable when the function is in standby mode.
When LDW is in standby mode, the function is activated automatically after the camera has monitored the road's side marker lines and the vehicle's speed exceeds 40 mph (65 km/h). Lane Depart Warn Available will be displayed.
· The throttle pedal is pressed quickly · If the steering wheel is moved quickly · In sharp turns that cause the vehicle's
body to sway.
See page 163 for information on the camera's limitations.
WARNING
The driver will only be warned once for each time the wheels cross a marker line. No alarm will be given if a marker line is between the wheels.
1 A warning will be given even when Increased sensitivity has been selected.
186 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Symbols and messages in the display Symbol Message Lane departure warning On/Off
-
Lane Depart Warn
Available
-
Lane Depart Warn
Unavailable
Camera blocked See manual
Driver Alert Sys Service required
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Driver Alert System*
Description The function is switched on or off. The text disappears after 5 seconds.
The function is monitoring the road's marker lines.
Speed is below 37 mph (60 km/h) or if the road lacks clear marker lines.
04
The camera is temporarily not functioning, due to snow, ice, or dirt on the windshield. Clean the area of the windshield in front of the camera. See page 163 for information on the camera's limitations.
The system is not functioning. Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician if the message remains in the display.
Settings Settings for Lane Departure Warning can be made in the menu system under Car settings
Lane Departure Warning. See page 122 for more information on the menu system.
On at startup: This selection puts the function in standby mode each time the engine is
started. Otherwise, the system will be in the mode that it was in when the engine was switched off.
Increased sensitivity: This selection increases the function's sensitivity. Warnings will be given at an earlier stage and fewer limitations apply.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 187
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Park assist*
Introduction The park assist system is designed to assist you when driving into parking spaces, garages, etc. It utilizes four ultrasound sensors located in one or both bumpers to measure the distance to a vehicle, object, or a person who may be close to the front or rear of your vehicle.
This system is available in the rear bumper only, or in both the front and rear bumpers.
Function
Activating/deactivating The system is activated automatically when the vehicle is started.
± Press the Park assist button on the center console to temporarily deactivate the system(s).
> The indicator light in the button will go out when the system has been deactivated.
04
Park assist utilizes four ultrasound sensors in the bumper(s) to measure the distance to a
Park assist will be automatically reactivated the next time the engine is started, or if the button
vehicle, object, or a person who may be close
is pressed (the indicator light in the button will
to the front or rear of your vehicle. An audible signal and symbols in the audio system's display indicate the distance to the object
Park assist button
The system is activated automatically when the vehicle is started. The indicator light in the but-
illuminate). NOTE
WARNING
ton in the center console illuminates when the system is on.
· Front park assist is disengaged auto-
matically when the parking brake is
Park Assist is an information system, NOT a safety system. This system is designed to be a supplementary aid when parking the vehicle. It is not, however, intended to replace the driver's attention and judgement.
· The front park assist system is active from
the time the engine is started until the vehicle exceeds a speed of approximately 10 mph (15 km/h). It is also active when the vehicle is backing up.
applied.
· If the vehicle is equipped with front and
rear park assist, both systems will be deactivated by pressing the button.
· Rear park assist is active when the engine
is running and reverse gear has been
selected.
188 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Park assist*
Signals from the park assist system
1
Active
2
Active
3
Active
Views in the display
Visual indicator The audio system's display gives an overview of the vehicle's position in relation to a detected object. The markers in the display indicate that one or more of the four sensors has detected an object. The greater the number of markers, the closer the vehicle is to the object.
Display in a vehicle with rear park assist only. Here, an object has been detected by both of the right rear sensors.
Display in a vehicle with both front and rear park assist. The solid marker in this example indicates that an object is closer than approximately 1 foot (30 cm) to the right front sensor.
Display in a vehicle with both front and rear park assist. Reverse gear is selected and no objects have been detected in front of or behind the vehicle.
Rear park assist
Audible signal
The Park Assist system uses an intermittent
tone that pulses faster as you come close to an
object, and becomes constant when you are
within approximately 1 ft (30 cm) of an object
in front of or behind the vehicle (example 2 in
the illustration). If there are objects within this
04
distance both behind and in front of the vehicle,
the tone alternates between front and rear speakers.
If the volume of another source from the audio system is high, this will be automatically lowered.
The distance monitored behind the vehicle is approximately 5 ft (1.5 m). The audible signal comes from the rear speakers.
The system must be deactivated when towing a trailer, carrying bicycles in a rear-mounted
carrier, etc, which could trigger the rear park
assist system's sensors.
NOTE
Rear park assist is deactivated automatically when towing a trailer if Volvo genuine trailer wiring is used.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
`` 189
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Park assist*
Front park assist 04
CAUTION
In certain circumstances, the park assist system may give unexpected warning signals that can be caused by external sound sources that use the same ultrasound frequencies as the system. This may include such things as the horns of other vehicles, wet tires on asphalt, pneumatic brakes, motorcycle exhaust pipes, etc. This does not indicate a fault in the system.
Cleaning the sensors
The distance monitored in front of the vehicle is approximately 2.5 ft (0.8 m). The audible signal comes from the audio system's front speakers.
It may not be possible to combine auxiliary headlights and front park assist since these lights could trigger the system's sensors.
Faults in the system
If the information symbol illuminates and Park Assist syst Service required is shown on the information display, this indicates that the system is not functioning properly and has been disengaged. Consult a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
Location of the front sensors
G031402
Location of the rear sensors
The sensors must be cleaned regularly to ensure that they work properly. Clean them with water and a suitable car washing detergent.
Ice and snow covering the sensors may cause incorrect warning signals.
NOTE
If the sensors are obstructed by e.g., dirt, snow, or ice, this could result in false warning signals from the park assist system.
190 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Park Assist Camera (PAC)*
Introduction The Park Assist Camera uses the display on the dashboard to show the area behind the car while you are backing up.
PAC also shows guiding lines in the on-screen image to indicate the direction that the vehicle will take as it moves rearward, which helps simplify parallel parking, backing into a tight space or when attaching a trailer to the vehicle.
NOTE
PAC can only be installed on vehicles equipped with the Volvo's own navigation system VNS.
WARNING
· PAC is designed to be a supplementary
aid when parking the vehicle. It is not, however, intended to replace the driver's attention and judgment.
· The camera has blind spots where it
cannot detect objects or people behind the vehicle.
· Pay particular attention to people or ani-
mals that are close to the vehicle.
Function
Ambient lighting conditions The camera automatically monitors the ambient lighting conditions behind the vehicle and constantly adjusts sensitivity to light. This may cause the brightness and quality of the image on the screen to vary slightly. Sensitivity to light is increased in dark conditions or in bad weather, which may affect image quality.
If the image on the screen seems too dark,
brightness can be increased with the thumb
wheel on the lighting panel.
04
The driver sees what is behind the vehicle and if a person or animal should suddenly appear from the side.
PAC is mounted on the tailgate, near the opening handle.
The camera has built-in electronics that help reduce the "fish-eye" effect so that the image shown on the screen is as natural as possible. This may cause some objects on the screen to "lean," which is normal.
WARNING
Objects seen on the screen may be closer than they appear to be.
NOTE
In order to function properly, the camera lens should always be kept clean. This is particularly important in bad weather. Keep the lens free of dirt, ice or snow.
Using PAC
Activation PAC is activated when the gear selector is moved to R if the system is set to Automatic under Parking camera settings in the menu system.
If the Volvo Navigation System (VNS) is in use, PAC will automatically override the navigation system to show the camera's image on the screen instead of navigation information, for as long as reverse gear is selected.
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 191
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Park Assist Camera (PAC)*
Deactivation
see path the vehicle will take, even if he/she
Move the gear selector from R to another posi- turns the steering wheel while backing up.
tion. There is a slight delay in the PAC system,
which means that the view from behind the
NOTE
vehicle will remain on the screen for approximately 15 seconds after the gear selector has been moved from the R position or until the vehicle reaches a forward speed of 6 mph
When backing up with a trailer, the guiding lines show the path that the vehicle will take, not the trailer.
(10 km/h). The screen will then revert to the mode that it was in before R was selected and
WARNING
04
will, for example, display navigation system information.
Keep in mind that the image on the screen only shows the area behind the vehicle. The
Guiding lines
driver must always watch for people, animals, other vehicles, etc., near the sides of
the vehicle when turning while backing up.
Sidelines
The sidelines indicate approximately 4 inches (10 cm) of free space from the outer edge of the door mirrors to the inside of the sideline.
These sidelines extend 6.5 ft (2 meters) behind the vehicle.
Intersecting lines The short lines that intersect the sidelines show the distance rearward from the bumper.
· Red line: the distance is 1 ft (0.3 meters) · Yellow line: the distance is 5 ft (1.5 meters)
Vehicles equipped with Park Assist
G000000 G031931
The lines on the screen are projected as if they were a path on the ground behind the vehicle and are affected by the way in which the steering wheel is turned. This enables the driver to
192 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
If the vehicle is equipped with the optional Park Assist system, the colored markers in the display indicate the distance to an object, for example, when parallel parking.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Marker (color)
Green Yellow
Red
Distance to object
> 5 ft (1.5 m)
51 ft (0.31.5)
01 ft (00.3)
If any of the rear park assist sensors detect an object that is less than 1.3 ft (0.4 m) from the vehicle and which is outside of the PAC camera's field of view, a "rear-view mirror" icon will appear on the screen. Check the mirrors for any objects near the vehicle.
Settings To make PAC system settings, press the MENU button in the center console control panel and go to Main menu Car settings
and select one of the following:
Parking camera settings
· Mark Park Assist lines to display the side-
lines while backing up.
· Mark Distance information to display the
intersecting lines while backing up.
Activating the system
· Mark Automatic to activate PAC each
time reverse gear is selected.
· Mark Off to turn off PAC completely.
Limitations Even if it appears that a fairly small section of the screen image is obstructed, this may mean that a relatively large area behind the vehicle is hidden and objects there may not be detected until they are very near the vehicle.
NOTE
Bicycle carriers or other accessories mounted on the tailgate may obstruct the camera's field of view.
Keep in mind
· Keep the camera's lens free of dirt, ice and
snow. Remove ice and snow carefully to avoid scratching the lens.
· Clean the lens regularly with warm water
and a suitable car washing detergent.
Park Assist Camera (PAC)*
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 193
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Blind Spot Information System*
Introduction
WARNING
NOTE
G021426 G021427
· BLIS is an information system, NOT a
warning or safety system.
· BLIS does not eliminate the need for
you to visually confirm the conditions around you, and the need for you to turn
The door panel indicator light illuminates on the side of the vehicle where the system has detected another vehicle. If your vehicle is passed on both sides at the same time, both lights will illuminate.
your head and shoulders to make sure
that you can safely change lanes.
BLIS has an integrated function that alerts the
· As the driver, you have full responsibility
for changing lanes in a safe manner.
driver if a fault should occur with the system. For example, if one or both of the system's
04
cameras are obscured, a message (see the
BLIS camera Indicator light
The system is based on digital camera technology. The cameras are located beneath the side-view mirrors.
When one (or both) of the cameras have
table on page 197) will appear in the information display in the instrument panel. If this occurs, clean the camera lenses. If necessary, the system can be temporarily switched off (for instructions, see page 196).
BLIS symbol
detected a vehicle in the blind area (up to
The Blind Spot Information System (BLIS) is an information system that indicates the presence of another vehicle moving in the same direction as your vehicle in the side-view mirror's "blind area."
approximately 10 ft. (3 meters) from the side of your vehicle, and up to approximately 31 ft. (9.5 meters) behind the side-view mirror), see the illustration, the indicator light in the door panel illuminates. The light will glow continuously to alert the driver of the vehicle in the
CAUTION
blind area.
The BLIS system should only be repaired by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
Areas monitored by BLIS Distance A = approx. 31 ft. (9.5 meters), Distance B = approx. 10 ft. (3 meters)
194 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Blind Spot Information System*
When does BLIS function
Darkness
WARNING
The system functions when your vehicle is moving at speeds above 6 mph (10 km/h).
BLIS reacts to the headlights of surrounding vehicles. In order to be detected by BLIS, a vehicle in the blind area must have its head-
· BLIS does not react to cyclists or
mopeds.
When you pass another vehicle:
lights on. This means, for example, that the
· BLIS does not react to vehicles that are
The system reacts when you pass another
system will not detect a trailer without head-
standing still.
vehicle at a speed of up to 6 mph (10 km/h) faster than that vehicle.
lights that is being towed behind a car or truck.
· The function of the BLIS cameras may
be affected by intense light, or when
When you are passed by another vehicle: The system reacts if your vehicle is passed by another vehicle at a speed of up to 43 mph (70 km/h) faster than your vehicle.
driving at night in areas where there are
no external sources of light (e.g., street
lights, other vehicles, etc.). In such
cases, the system may react as if the
04
cameras were obscured.
WARNING · BLIS does not function in sharp curves.
· In both of the above mentioned condi-
tions, a message will appear in the infor-
mation display.
· BLIS does not function when your vehi-
cle is backing up.
· If you are towing a wide trailer, this may
prevent the BLIS cameras from detecting other vehicles in adjacent lanes.
How BLIS functions in daylight and darkness
Daylight BLIS reacts to the shape of surrounding vehicles. The system is designed to help detect motor vehicles such as cars, trucks, buses, motorcycles, etc.
· When driving in such conditions, the
system's function will be limited or it may be temporarily switched off, see page 196 for instructions.
· When the message is no longer dis-
played, BLIS will return to normal function.
· The BLIS cameras have the same limi-
tation as the human eye. In other words, their "vision is impaired" by adverse weather conditions such as heavy snowfall, dense fog, etc.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
`` 195
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Blind Spot Information System*
Limitations
CAUTION
In certain situations, the BLIS indicator light(s) may illuminate even when there are no other vehicles in the area monitored by the system.
· Clean the lenses carefully to avoid
scratching.
· The lenses are electrically heated to
NOTE
help melt ice or snow. If necessary, gently brush away snow from the lenses.
If the BLIS indicator lights illuminate occa-
sionally even when there are no other vehi-
cles in the blind area, this does not indicate a fault in the system.
The vehicle's own shadow against a large, light,
Switching BLIS on and off
smooth surface such as barriers between lanes on
04
In the event of a fault, Blind spot syst.
a highway
service required will be displayed.
The following are several examples of situations in which the BLIS indicator light(s) may illuminate even when there are no other vehicles in the area monitored by the system.
Light reflected from a wet road surface
Sunlight directly in the camera when the sun is low on the horizon
Cleaning the BLIS camera lenses In order to function optimally, the BLIS camera lenses must be kept clean. They can be wiped clean with a soft cloth or wet sponge.
BLIS is automatically activated when the ignition is switched on. The indicator lights will provide confirmation by flashing 3 times.
· The system can be switched off by press-
ing the BLIS button in the center console (see the illustration). The indicator light in the button goes out when the system is
196 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Blind Spot Information System*
switched off, and a text message is displayed.
· BLIS can be switched on again by pressing
Text in the dis- System status play
the button. The indicator light in the button
Blind-spot info
BLIS system off
will illuminate and a new text message will
system off
be displayed. Press the READ button (see page 124) to erase the message.
BLIS system messages
Blind spot syst. reduced function
The BLIS cameras' function has been reduced by e.g., fog,
Text in the dis- System status
or strong sunlight
play
directly into the
camea. The camera
04
Blind spot syst.
BLIS not functioning
will reset itself when
service required properly. Contact an
these conditions
authorized Volvo
have changed.
service technician.
Blind spot syst. camera blocked
BLIS camera obscured. Clean the lenses.
Blind-spot info system ON
BLIS system on
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 197
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Passenger compartment convenience Storage spaces
04
198
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Passenger compartment convenience
Compartment in door panel
Storage pocket on the front edge of the front seat cushions Glove compartment
Storage compartment, 12-volt socket and AUX input/USB connector* Jacket holder
Rear seat cup holders
Storage pocket
Tunnel console
Glove compartment
04
Jacket holder The jacket hanger is located on the inboard side of the front passenger's seat head restraint. It is only intended for hanging light garments.
Storage compartment (for CDs, etc.) under armrest, AUX input/USB connector.
Includes cup holder for driver and passenger, 12-volt socket and small storage compartment.
Cigarette lighter and ashtray* Your Volvo retailer has lighters and ashtrays available as accessories.
The owner's manual and maps can be kept here. There are also holders for pens and fuel cards. The glove compartment can be locked manually with the key blade, see page 64.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
`` 199
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Passenger compartment convenience
Vanity mirror
12-volt sockets
04
Vanity mirror with lighting The light comes on automatically when the cover is lifted.
G021438
12-volt socket in the front tunnel console
G031435
socket to supply current, the ignition must be in at least mode I, see page 79.
WARNING
Always keep the sockets covered when not in use.
12-volt socket in the cargo area*
12-volt socket in the rear center console
The electrical socket can be used for 12-volt accessories such as cell phone chargers and coolers. The maximum current is 10 A. For the
G021440
Fold down the cover to access the electrical socket.
NOTE
The 12-volt socket in the cargo area provides electrical current even when the ignition is switched off. Using the socket while the engine is not running will drain the battery.
200 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
04
201
Driving recommendations..................................................................... 204 Refueling............................................................................................... 208 Loading................................................................................................. 212 Cargo area ........................................................................................... 215 Towing a trailer...................................................................................... 219 Emergency towing................................................................................ 221
202
DURING YOUR TRIP
05
05 During your trip
Driving recommendations
General information
Economical driving conserves natural resources Better driving economy may be obtained by thinking ahead, avoiding rapid starts and stops and adjusting the speed of your vehicle to immediate traffic conditions.
Observe the following rules:
· Bring the engine to normal operating tem-
perature as soon as possible by driving with a light foot on the accelerator pedal for
· Remove snow tires when threat of snow or
ice has ended.
· Note that roof racks, ski racks, etc,
increase air resistance and also fuel consumption.
· At highway driving speeds, fuel consump-
tion will be lower with the air conditioning on and the windows closed than with the air conditioning off and the windows open.
· Using the onboard trip computer's fuel
consumption modes can help you learn how to drive more economically.
WARNING
Driving with the tailgate open: Driving with the tailgate open could lead to poisonous exhaust gases entering the passenger compartment. If the tailgate must be kept open for any reason, proceed as follows:
· Close the windows
· Set the ventilation system control to air
flow to floor, windshield and side windows and the blower control to its highest setting.
the first few minutes of operation. A cold
Other factors that decrease gas mileage
engine uses more fuel and is subject to
are:
05
increased wear.
· Dirty air cleaner
· Whenever possible, avoid using the vehicle
for driving short distances. This does not
· Dirty engine oil and clogged oil filter
allow the engine to reach normal operating · Dragging brakes
temperature.
· Incorrect front end alignment
Weight distribution affects handling At the specified curb weight your vehicle has a tendency to understeer, which means that the steering wheel has to be turned more than might seem appropriate for the curvature of a bend. This ensures good stability and reduces the risk of rear wheel skid. Remember that
· Drive carefully and avoid rapid acceleration Some of the above mentioned items and others these properties can alter with the vehicle load.
and hard braking.
are checked at the standard maintenance
The heavier the load in the cargo area, the less
· Use the transmission's Drive (D) position
intervals.
the tendency to understeer.
as often as possible and avoid using kickdown.
Handling, roadholding
· Do not exceed posted speed limits.
· Avoid carrying unnecessary items (extra
load) in the vehicle.
Vehicle load, tire design and inflation pressure all affect vehicle handling. Therefore, check that the tires are inflated to the recommended pressure according to the vehicle load. See the
· Maintain correct tire pressure. Check tire
"Tire pressure" section. Loads should be dis-
pressure regularly (when tires are cold).
tributed so that capacity weight or maximum
permissible axle loads are not exceeded.
204
05 During your trip
Driving recommendations
Driving through water
· The vehicle can be driven through water up
to a depth of approximately 10 in. (25 cm), at a maximum speed of 6 mph (10 km/h).
· Take particular care when driving through
flowing water.
· Clean the electrical connections for trailer
wiring after driving in mud or water.
CAUTION
· Engine damage will occur if water is
drawn into the air cleaner.
· If the vehicle is driven through water
deeper than 10 in (25 cm), water may enter the differential and the transmission. This reduces the oil's lubricating capacity and may shorten the service
WARNING
The cooling fan may start or continue to operate (for up to 6 minutes) after the engine has been switched off.
· Remove any auxiliary lights from in front of
the grille when driving in hot weather conditions.
· When driving through water, maintain low
speed and do not stop in the water.
life of these components.
· Do not allow the vehicle to stand in
· Do not exceed engine speeds of 4500 rpm
if driving with a trailer in hilly terrain. The oil
WARNING
After driving through water, press lightly on the brake pedal to ensure that the brakes are functioning normally. Water or mud can make the brake linings slippery, resulting in delayed braking effect.
water up to the door sills longer than absolutely necessary. This could result in electrical malfunctions.
· If the engine has been stopped while the
vehicle is in water, do not attempt to restart it. Have the vehicle towed out of the water.
temperature could become too high.
Conserving electrical current
Keep the following in mind to help minimize
battery drain:
05
· When the engine is not running, avoid
using ignition mode II. Many electrical sys-
tems (the audio system, the optional navi-
Engine and cooling system Under special conditions, for example when driving in hilly terrain, extreme heat or with heavy loads, there is a risk that the engine and cooling system will overheat. Proceed as follows to avoid overheating the engine.
gation system, power windows, etc) will function in ignition modes 0 and I. These modes reduce drain on the battery.
· Please keep in mind that using systems,
accessories, etc., that consume a great deal of current when the engine is not running could result in the battery being com-
· Maintain a low speed when driving with a
pletely drained.
trailer up long, steep hills.
· Do not turn the engine off immediately
· The optional 12 volt socket in the cargo
area provides electrical current even with
when stopping after a hard drive.
`` 205
05 During your trip
Driving recommendations
the ignition switched off, which drains the · Check all lights, including high beams.
cold-weather starting as well as decreas-
battery.
· The optional 12 volt socket in the cargo
area provides electrical current even with the ignition switched off, which drains the battery.
Before a long distance trip It is always worthwhile to have your vehicle checked by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician before driving long distances. Your retailer will also be able to supply you with bulbs, fuses, spark plugs and wiper blades for your use in the event that problems occur.
· Reflective warning triangles are legally
required in some states/provinces.
· Have a word with a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician if you intend to drive in countries where it may be difficult to obtain the correct fuel.
· Consider your destination. If you will be
driving through an area where snow or ice are likely to occur, consider snow tires.
Cold weather precautions If you wish to check your vehicle before the approach of cold weather, the following advice
ing fuel consumption while the engine is warming up. For winter use, 5W-30 oil, particularly the synthetic type, is recommended. Be sure to use good quality oil but do not use cold-weather oil for hard driving or in warm weather, see page 287 for more information on engine oil.
NOTE
Synthetic oil is not used when the oil is changed at the normal maintenance intervals except at owner request and at additional charge.
As a minimum, the following items should be
is worth noting:
05
checked before any long trip:
· Check that engine runs smoothly and that
fuel consumption is normal.
· Check for fuel, oil, and fluid leakage · Have the transmission oil level checked. · Check condition of drive belts.
· Make sure that the engine coolant contains
50 percent antifreeze. Any other mixture will reduce freeze protection. This gives protection against freezing down to 31 °F (35 °C). The use of "recycled" antifreeze is not approved by Volvo. Different types of antifreeze must not be mixed.
· The load placed on the battery is greater
during the winter since the windshield wipers, lighting, etc. are used more often. Moreover, the capacity of the battery decreases as the temperature drops. In very cold weather, a poorly charged battery can freeze and be damaged. It is therefore advisable to check the state of charge
· Check state of the battery's charge.
· Volvo recommends using only genuine
more frequently and spray an anti-rust oil
· Examine tires carefully (the spare tire as
Volvo antifreeze in your vehicle's radiator.
on the battery posts.
well), and replace those that are worn. Check tire pressures.
· The brakes, front wheel alignment, and
steering gear should be checked by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician only.
· Try to keep the fuel tank well filled this
helps prevent the formation of condensation in the tank. In addition, in extremely cold weather conditions it is worthwhile to add fuel line de-icer before refueling.
· The viscosity of the engine oil is important.
Oil with low viscosity (thinner oil) improves
· Volvo recommends the use of snow tires
on all four wheels for winter driving, see page 264.
· To prevent the washer fluid reservoir from
freezing, add washer solvents containing antifreeze. This is important since dirt is often splashed on the windshield during
206
winter driving, requiring the frequent use of the washers and wipers. Volvo Washer Solvent should be diluted as follows: Down to 14 °F (10 °C): 1 part washer solvent and 4 parts water Down to 5 °F (15 °C): 1 part washer solvent and 3 parts water Down to 0 °F (18 °C): 1 part washer solvent and 2 parts water Down to 18 °F (28 °C): 1 part washer solvent and 1 part water.
· Use Volvo Teflon Lock Spray in the locks.
· Avoid using de-icing sprays as they can
cause damage to the locks.
05 During your trip
Driving recommendations
05
207
05 During your trip
Refueling
Fuel requirements
ness of the emission control system and could sonal air quality standards, some areas require
Deposit control gasoline (detergent additives) Volvo recommends the use of detergent gasoline to control engine deposits. Detergent
result in loss of emission warranty coverage. State and local vehicle inspection programs will make detection of misfueling easier, possibly resulting in emission test failure for misfueled vehicles.
the use of "oxygenated" fuel.
Volvo allows the use of the following "oxygenated" fuels; however, the octane ratings listed on page 209 must still be met.
gasoline is effective in keeping injectors and
Alcohol Ethanol
intake valves clean. Consistent use of deposit control gasolines will help ensure good drivability and fuel economy. If you are not sure whether the gasoline contains deposit control additives, check with the service station operator.
NOTE
Some U.S. and Canadian gasolines contain an octane enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). If such fuels are used, your Emission Control System performance may be affec-
Fuels containing up to 10% ethanol by volume may be used. Ethanol may also be referred to as Ethyl alcohol, or "Gasohol".
Ethers MTBE: Fuels containing up to 15% MTBE may be used.
NOTE
05
Volvo does not recommend the use of exter-
nal fuel injector cleaning systems.
ted, and the Check Engine Light (malfunction indicator light) located on your instrument panel may light. If this occurs, please return your vehicle to a trained and qualified Volvo service technician for service.
Methanol Do not use gasolines containing methanol (methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). This practice can result in vehicle performance deterioration and can damage critical parts in the fuel sys-
Unleaded fuel Each Volvo has a three-way catalytic converter and must use only unleaded gasoline. U.S. and Canadian regulations require that pumps delivering unleaded gasoline be labelled "UNLEADED". Only these pumps have nozzles which fit your vehicle's filler inlet. It is unlawful to dispense leaded fuel into a vehicle labelled "unleaded gasoline only". Leaded gasoline damages the three-way catalytic converter and the heated oxygen sensor system. Repeated use of leaded gasoline will lessen the effective-
Gasoline containing alcohol and ethers, "Oxygenated fuels" Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing "oxygenates" which are usually alcohols or ethers. In some areas, state or local laws require that the service pump be marked indicating use of alcohols or ethers. However, there are areas in which the pumps are unmarked. If you are not sure whether there is alcohol or ethers in the gasoline you buy, check with the service station operator. To meet sea-
tem. Such damage may not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
208
05 During your trip
Refueling
Octane rating Minimum octane
engine's capacity, and for the smoothest possible operation.
NOTE
When switching to higher octane fuel or changing gasoline brands, it may be necessary to fill the tank more than once before a difference in engine operation is noticeable.
Use of Additives With the exception of gas line antifreeze during winter months, do not add solvents, thickeners, or other store-bought additives to your vehicle's fuel, cooling, or lubricating systems. Overuse may damage your engine, and some of these additives contain organically volatile chemicals. Do not needlessly expose yourself to these chemicals.
Fuel Formulations Do not use gasoline that contains lead as a
WARNING
knock inhibitor, and do not use lead additives.
Never carry a cell phone that is switched
G028920
Typical pump octane label
Besides damaging the exhaust emission con-
on while refueling your vehicle. If the phone
trol systems on your vehicle, lead has been
rings, this may cause a spark that could
strongly linked to certain forms of cancer.
ignite gasoline fumes, resulting in fire and
injury.
05
Volvo recommends premium fuel for best performance, but using 87 octane or above will not affect engine reliability.
Volvo engines are designed to achieve rated horsepower, torque, and fuel economy performance using premium 91 octane fuel.
Demanding driving In demanding driving conditions, such as operating the vehicle in hot weather, towing a trailer, or driving for extended periods at higher altitudes than normal, it may be advisable to switch to higher octane fuel (91 or higher) or to
Many fuels contain benzene as a solvent. Unburned benzene has been strongly linked to certain forms of cancer. If you live in an area where you must fill your own gas tank, take precautions. These may include:
· standing upwind away from the filler nozzle
while refueling
· refueling only at gas stations with vapor
recovery systems that fully seal the mouth of the filler neck during refueling
· wearing neoprene gloves while handling a
fuel filler nozzle.
WARNING
Carbon monoxide is a poisonous, colorless, and odorless gas. It is present in all exhaust gases. If you ever smell exhaust fumes inside the vehicle, make sure the passenger compartment is ventilated, and immediately return the vehicle to a trained and qualified Volvo service technician for correction.
change gasoline brands to fully utilize your
`` 209
05 During your trip
Refueling
Opening/closing the fuel filler door
· Be sure the fuel filler door is not obstructed
and is completely closed after refueling.
If necessary, the fuel filler door can be opened manually:
· Open the fuel filler cap slowly during hot
weather.
Close the fuel filler door by pressing it a click indicates that it is closed.
1. Open the side hatch in the cargo compartment (on the same side as the fuel filler door).
2. Grasp the green cord with a handle.
CAUTION
· Avoid spilling gasoline during refueling.
In addition to causing damage to the
environment, gasolines containing
alcohol can cause damage to painted
surfaces, which may not be covered
The fuel filler door is located on the right rear
05
fender (indicated by an arrow beside the fuel
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
tank symbol on the information display
)
With the ignition switched off, press the button
Manually opening the fuel filler door
on the lighting panel to unlock the fuel filler
door. Please note that the fuel filler door will
remain unlocked until the vehicle begins to
move forward. An audible click will be heard
when the fuel filler door relocks.
3. Pull the cord straight rearward until the fuel filler door clicks open.
Opening/closing the fuel cap
· If you intend to leave your vehicle while it
is being refueled, this feature enables you to lock the doors/tailgate while leaving the fuel filler door unlocked.
· You can also keep the vehicle locked if you
remain inside it during refueling. The central locking button does not lock the fuel filler door.
Fuel vapor expands in hot weather. Open the filler cap slowly.
After refueling, close the fuel filler cap by turning it clockwise until it clicks into place.
210
05 During your trip
Refueling
CAUTION
· Do not refuel with the engine running1.
Turn the ignition off or to position I. If the ignition is on, an incorrect reading could occur in the fuel gauge.
· Avoid overfilling the fuel tank. Do not
press the handle on the filler nozzle more than one extra time. Too much fuel in the tank in hot weather conditions can cause the fuel to overflow. Overfilling could also cause damage to the emission control systems.
avoid malfunctions that could damage the three-way catalytic converter.
· Do not park your vehicle over combustible
materials, such as grass or leaves, which can come into contact with the hot exhaust system and cause such materials to ignite under certain wind and weather conditions.
· Excessive starter cranking (in excess of
one minute), or an intermittently firing or flooded engine can cause three-way catalytic converter or exhaust system overheating.
Heated oxygen sensors The heated oxygen sensors monitor the oxygen content of the exhaust gases. Readings are fed into a control module that continuously monitors engine functions and controls fuel injection. The ratio of fuel to air into the engine is continuously adjusted for efficient combustion to help reduce harmful emissions.
· Remember that tampering or unauthorized
Emission controls
modifications to the engine, the Engine Control Module, or the vehicle may be ille-
05
Three-way catalytic converter
gal and can cause three-way catalytic con-
· Keep your engine properly tuned. Certain
engine malfunctions, particularly involving
verter or exhaust system overheating. This includes: altering fuel injection settings or
the electrical, fuel or distributor ignition
components, altering emission system
systems, may cause unusually high three-
components or location or removing com-
way catalytic converter temperatures. Do
ponents, and/or repeated use of leaded
not continue to operate your vehicle if you
fuel.
detect engine misfire, noticeable loss of
power or other unusual operating condi-
NOTE
tions, such as engine overheating or backfiring. A properly tuned engine will help
Unleaded fuel is required for vehicles with three-way catalytic converters.
1 If the fuel filler cap is not closed tightly or if the engine is running when the vehicle is refueled, the Check Engine Light (malfunction indicator lamp) may indicate a fault. However, your vehicle's performance will not be affected. Use only Volvo original or approved fuel filler caps.
211
05 During your trip
Loading
Introduction
The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is determined by factors such as the number of passengers, the amount of cargo, the weight of any accessories that may be installed, etc.
Power tailgate
CAUTION
Be sure that there is adequate space above and behind the vehicle before opening the tailgate automatically.
To increase loading space, the rear seat backrests can be folded down, See page 84.
NOTE
When loading the cargo area, keep the following in mind:
If the tailgate has been opened and closed continuously for more than 90 seconds, the automatic function will be deactivated to
· Load objects in the cargo area against the
backrest whenever possible.
· Unstable loads can be secured to the load
G031965
avoid overloading the electrical system. The automatic function can be used again after approximately 10 minutes.
05
anchoring eyelets with straps or web lashings to help keep them from shifting.
Automatic opening The power tailgate can be opened automati-
Automatic closing The power tailgate can be closed by pressing
· Stop the engine and apply the parking
cally in the three ways:
brake when loading or unloading long
the
button on the tailgate (see the illus-
objects. The gear selector can be knocked · By pressing and holding the
but- tration) or by pressing it down.
out of position by long loads, which could
ton on the lighting panel until the tailgate
set the vehicle in motion.
begins to open.
NOTE
· By pressing and holding the
button
on the remote key until the tailgate begins
to open.
If the tailgate is pressed down e.g., by the weight of snow or strong wind, it will close automatically.
· By pulling the outer handle on the tailgate.
The taillights illuminate automatically when the automatic open function is used.
WARNING
Be sure that no one is near the tailgate when it is opened or closed automatically. The tailgate should never be obstructed in any way when it is operated.
212
05 During your trip
Interrupting automatic opening/closing Automatic opening or closing the tailgate can be interrupted in four ways:
· By pressing the
button on the
lighting panel.
· By pressing the
button on the
remote key for several seconds.
· By pressing the button on the lower edge
of the tailgate.
· By pulling the outer handle on the tailgate
a second time.
If one of these actions is taken:
· While the tailgate is being opened, the
electrical function will be switched off and the tailgate will be released from the electrical system.
· While the tailgate is being closed, it will
return to the fully open position.
Pinch protection If the tailgate is obstructed while it is being operated, the pinch protection function is activated.
· If the tailgate is being opened, the electri-
cal function will be switched off and the tailgate will be released from the electrical system.
· If the tailgate is being closed, it will move
in the opposite direction.
Operating the tailgate manually The power tailgate can be disconnected from the vehicle's electrical system by quickly pulling the outer handle twice. The tailgate can then be opened/closed manually. Load anchoring eyelets
The load anchoring eyelets on both sides of the vehicle are used to fasten straps, etc., to help anchor items in the cargo area.
Loading
WARNING · Cover sharp edges on long loads to help
prevent injury to occupants. Secure the load to help prevent shifting during sudden stops.
· Always secure large and heavy objects
with a seat belt or cargo retaining straps.
· Always secure the load to help prevent
it from moving in the event of sudden stops.
· Switch off the engine, apply the parking
brake and put the gear selector in P when loading and unloading the vehicle.
05
`` 213
05 During your trip
Loading
Grocery bag holder*
Roof loads
Using load carriers Load carriers are available as Volvo accessories. Observe the following points when in use:
· The vehicle's wind resistance and fuel con-
sumption will increase with the size of the load.
· Drive smoothly. Avoid rapid starts, fast
cornering and hard braking.
· To avoid damaging your vehicle and to
achieve maximum safety when driving, we recommend using the load carriers that Volvo has developed especially for your vehicle.
· Volvo-approved removable roof racks are
G017745
designed to carry the maximum allowable
roof load for this vehicle: 220 lbs (100 kg).
Grocery bag holder under the floor of the cargo
For non-Volvo roof racks, check the man-
area
ufacturer's weight limits for the rack.
05
The grocery bag holder holds shopping bags
· Never exceed the rack manufacturer's
in place.
1. Open the hatch in the floor of the cargo area.
weigh limits and never exceed the maximum rated roof load of 220 lbs (100 kg).
· Avoid single-point loads. Distribute loads
evenly.
2. Secure the shopping bags with the strap.
· Place heavier cargo at the bottom of the
load.
· Secure the cargo correctly with appropri-
ate tie-down equipment.
· Check periodically that the load carriers
and load are properly secured.
· Remember that the vehicle's center of
gravity and handling change when you
carry a load on the roof.
214 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
05 During your trip
Cargo area
Steel cargo grid*
Your vehicle can be equipped with a steel grid that helps prevent objects in the cargo area from moving forward into the passenger compartment. Folding the grid up/down Grasp the lowering edge of the grid and pull it rearward/upward, or push it downward/forward.
NOTE
If the steel grid is to be used with the optional cargo area cover, the grid must be folded down before the cargo area cover is put in place.
G031978
Installing the steel cargo grid In order to install the steel grid, the rear seat backrests must be completely folded down, see page 84 for instructions.
NOTE
· The steel cargo grid is easiest to install
by two people, and should be folded down.
· When installing the grid, the handle
should be on the front side of the grid (see illustrations ).
· The rear seat backrests must be folded
down when installing the steel cargo grid, see page 84.
Do the same on the opposite side of the vehicle.
05
G018367
G018368
Put the handle in the installation position, see the illustration. Press lightly on the handle in order to turn it to this position, see the arrow. Press in the piston toward the grid and press it into the attachment bracket near the ceiling.
Turn the handle 90° . Press lightly as shown in illustration if necessary. Attach the grid by moving the handle 90°.
Installing the cargo grid
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 215
G018369
05 During your trip
Cargo area
Cargo area cover*
Removing the cover 1. Press one of the end pieces of the cover
inward.
2. Pull the cover carefully upward and outward. The other end will release automatically from its retaining bracket.
Cargo net*
Folding down the cargo area cover's rear flap The cargo area cover's rear flap points horizontally when the cover is retracted (rolled up). To fold it down:
G031977 G034213
Use
± Pull the flap slightly rearward past its supports and fold it down.
Cargo net mounted in rear position
05 · Pull the cover over the cargo and hook it
into the holes in the rear cargo area pillars.
NOTE
Your vehicle can be equipped with a cargo net made of strong nylon fabric that helps prevent
objects in the cargo area from moving forward
· To retract (roll up) the cover, release it from
On models equipped with this cover, it
into the passenger compartment.
the holes and guide it toward the rear seat
should be removed before a child seat is
backrest.
attached to the child restraint anchors.
The net can be attached in two different places:
Installing the cover Press the end piece on one side of the cargo area cover into the retaining bracket in the side panel of the cargo area.
· Rear position: behind the rear seat back-
rest
· Front position: behind the front seat backr-
ests
Do the same on the opposite side.
Press both sides of the cover until they click into place.
> Check that both ends of the cover are securely locked in place.
216 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
05 During your trip
Cargo area
WARNING
· Be sure that the cargo net's upper
attachment hooks are properly inserted in the brackets and that the lower straps are correctly attached and pulled taut.
· A damaged cargo net should never be
used.
· Objects in the cargo area should be
securely anchored, even if the cargo net is correctly installed and in use.
Mounting the cargo net
Cargo net in rear position
Cargo net in front position
The cargo net is easiest to put in place through one of the rear doors.
1. Fold out the cargo net and be sure that the upper hinged rod is straight and locked in
4. Mounting in the rear position: With the net's rod attached to the rear upper brackets, hook the lower straps in the floor eyelets in the cargo area. Pull the net strap taut.
Mounting in the front position: With the net's rod attached to the front upper brack- 05 ets, hook the lower straps in the eyelets in the front seat rails. Attaching the net is eas-
position.
ier if the front seat backrests are upright
2. Insert one end of the rod into the front or
and the seats are moved slightly forward.
rear bracket (near the ceiling). Be sure that
If the front seats are moved rearward, they
the lock on the lower strap is facing toward
should not press hard against the net.
you.
3. Insert the other end of the rod in the oppo-
CAUTION
site bracket.
Be sure to press the end hooks on the rod as far forward as possible in the brackets.
Pressure from the front seats against the cargo net could damage the net and/or its brackets.
5. Pull the net strap taut.
`` 217
05 During your trip
Cargo area
Removing and storing the cargo net
Press the release buttons on the locks on
05
the straps and pull out a small section of
the strap.
Press in the catches on the straps' hooks and remove the hooks from the eyelet.
Fold up the net's rod at the center and roll up the net.
When not in use, the cargo net can be stored under floor of the cargo area.
218
05 During your trip
Introduction Volvo recommends the use of Volvo trailer hitches that are specially designed for the vehicle.
NOTE
See page 284 for the maximum trailer and tongue weights recommended by Volvo.
· Observe the legal requirements of the
state/province in which the vehicles are
· All Volvo models are equipped with
energy-absorbing shock-mounted bumpers. Trailer hitch installation should not interfere with the proper operation of this bumper system.
Trailer towing does not normally present any particular problems, but take into consideration:
· Increase tire pressure to recommended
full. See the tire inflation tables on pages 260 and 260.
· When your vehicle is new, avoid towing
heavy trailers during the first 620 miles (1,000 km).
· Maximum speed when towing a trailer:
50 mph (80 km/h).
· Engine and transmission are subject to
increased loads. Therefore, engine coolant temperature should be closely watched
when driving in hot climates or hilly terrain. Use a lower gear and turn off the air conditioner if the temperature gauge needle enters the red range.
· If the automatic transmission begins to
overheat, a message will be displayed in the text window.
· Avoid overload and other abusive opera-
tion.
· Hauling a trailer affects handling, durabil-
ity, and economy.
· It is necessary to balance trailer brakes
with the towing vehicle brakes to provide a safe stop (check and observe state/local regulations).
· Do not connect the trailer's brake system
directly to the vehicle's brake system.
· More frequent vehicle maintenance is
required.
· Remove the ball and drawbar assembly
when the hitch is not being used.
· Volvo recommends the use of synthetic
engine oil when towing a trailer over long distances or in mountainous areas.
Towing a trailer
WARNING
· Bumper-attached trailer hitches must
not be used on Volvos, nor should safety chains be attached to the bumper.
· Trailer hitches attaching to the vehicle
rear axle must not be used.
· Never connect a trailer's hydraulic
brake system directly to the vehicle brake system, nor a trailer's lighting system directly to the vehicle lighting system. Consult your nearest authorized Volvo retailer for correct installation.
· When towing a trailer, the trailer's safety
05
wire must be correctly fastened to the
hole or hook provided in the trailer hitch
on the vehicle. The safety wire should
never be fastened to or wound around
the drawbar ball.
`` 219
05 During your trip
Towing a trailer
NOTE
Detachable trailer hitch (accessory)
· When parking the vehicle with a trailer
on a hill, apply the parking brake before putting the gear selector in P. Always follow the trailer manufacturer's recommendations for wheel chocking.
· When starting on a hill, put the gear
selector in D before releasing the parking brake. See also page 118 for more detailed information about starting off on a hill while towing a trailer.
· If you use the manual (Geartronic) shift
positions while towing a trailer, make
sure the gear you select does not put
05
too much strain on the engine (using too
high a gear).
C
DE B
A Ball holder Locking bolt
G010496
4. Slide the locking bolt through the hitch assembly/ball holder.
5. Insert the cotter pin in the hole at the end of the locking bolt.
Removing the ball holder 1. Remove the cotter pin from the locking bolt
and slide the locking bolt out of the ball holder/hitch assembly.
2. Pull the ball holder out of the hitch assembly.
NOTE
A cover for the hitch assembly is also included in the kit.
· The drawbar assembly/trailer hitch may
be rated for trailers heavier than the vehicle is designed to tow. Please adhere to Volvo's recommended trailer weights.
Cotter pin Hitch assembly Safety wire attachment
· Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines of
more than 15 %.
Trailer cable An adapter is required if the vehicle's trailer hitch has a 13-pin connector and the trailer has 7 pins. Use an adapter cable approved by Volvo. Make sure the cable does not drag on the ground.
Installing the ball holder 1. If necessary, remove the cotter pin from
the locking bolt and slide the locking bolt out of the hitch assembly.
2. Slide the ball holder into the hitch assembly.
3. Align the hole in the ball holder with the one in the hitch assembly.
220
05 During your trip
Emergency towing
Towing eyelet
on the right sides of either the front or rear bumper (see illustration).
CAUTION
If the vehicle is being towed on a flat bed truck, the towing eyelets must not be used to pull the vehicle up onto the flat bed.
Location of the towing eyelet
NOTE
On certain models equipped with a trailer hitch, the towing eyelet cannot be screwed into the hole in the rear bumper. The towing rope should be attached to the trailer hitch instead. For this reason, the detachable section of the trailer hitch should be safely stowed in the vehicle at all times.
Attaching the towing eyelet
The towing eyelet is located under the floor of the cargo area, with the spare tire. This eyelet must be screwed into the positions provided
Attaching the towing eyelet
Use a coin to pry open the lower edge of the cover.
Screw the towing eyelet in place, first by hand and then using the tire iron until it is securely in place.
After the vehicle has been towed, the eyelet should be removed and returned to its storage location.
1 On vehicles with the optional keyless drive, the remote key must be in the passenger compartment.
Press the cover for the attachment point back into position.
WARNING
· Remember that the power brakes and
power steering will not function when engine is not running. The braking and steering systems will function but considerably higher pressure will be required on the brake pedal and greater steering effort must be exerted.
· The towing eyelets must not be used for
pulling the vehicle out of a ditch or for
any similar purpose involving severe
strain. Do not use the towing eyelets to
pull the vehicle up onto a flat bed tow
05
truck.
Precautions when the vehicle is in tow
· The steering wheel must be unlocked. The
remote key must be in the ignition slot1.
· Attach jumper cables (see page 108) to
provide current for releasing the optional electric parking brake and to move the gear selector from the P position.
· The gear selector must be in position N.
· Maximum speed: 50 mph (80 km/h). Do not
exceed the maximum allowable towing speed.
`` 221
05 During your trip
Emergency towing
· Maximum distance with front wheels on
ground: 50 miles (80 km).
· While the vehicle is being towed, try to
keep the tow rope taut at all times.
· The vehicle should only be towed in the
forward direction.
NOTE
During towing, ignition mode II should be used so that the lighting can be switched on.
CAUTION
Vehicles with AWD (All Wheel Drive) with the
05
front wheels off the ground should not be
towed at speeds above 50 mph (70 km/h) or
for distances longer than 30 miles (50 km).
CAUTION
· Please check with state and local
authorities before attempting this type of towing, as vehicles being towed are subject to regulations regarding maximum towing speed, length and type of towing device, lighting, etc.
· If the vehicle's battery is dead, do not
attempt to start the vehicle by pushing or pulling it as this will damage the three-way catalytic converter(s). The engine must be jump started using an auxiliary battery (see page 108).
· If the vehicle is being towed on a flat bed
truck, the towing eyelets must not be used to pull the vehicle up onto the flat bed or to secure the vehicle on the flat bed. Consult the tow truck operator.
Towing vehicles with front wheel drive/ All Wheel Drive Volvo recommends the use of flat bed equipment.
· If wheel lift equipment must be used,
please use extreme caution to help avoid damage to the vehicle. In this case, the vehicle should be towed with the rear wheels on the ground if at all possible.
· If it is absolutely necessary to tow the vehi-
cle with the front wheels on the ground,
please refer to the towing information on page 221.
CAUTION
· Sling-type equipment applied at the
front will damage radiator and air conditioning lines.
· It is equally important not to use sling-
type equipment at the rear or apply lifting equipment inside the rear wheels; serious damage to the rear axle may result.
· If the vehicle is being towed on a flat bed
truck, the towing eyelets must not be used to secure the vehicle on the flat bed. Consult the tow truck operator.
222
05 During your trip
05
223
Volvo maintenance................................................................................ 226 Maintaining your car............................................................................. 227 Hood and engine compartment............................................................ 229 Engine oil............................................................................................... 230 Fluids..................................................................................................... 232 Replacing bulbs.................................................................................... 234 Wiper blades and washer fluid.............................................................. 242 Battery................................................................................................... 244 Fuses..................................................................................................... 247 Wheels and tires................................................................................... 255 Vehicle care........................................................................................... 276 Label information.................................................................................. 281 Specifications........................................................................................ 283 Volvo programs..................................................................................... 290
224
G020922
MAINTENANCE AND SPECIFICATIONS
06
06 Maintenance and specifications
Volvo maintenance
Introduction
recommended that receipts for vehicle emis-
prehensive periodic maintenance schedule up
Volvo advises you to follow the maintenance program outlined in the Warranty and Service Records Information booklet. This maintenance program contains inspections and services necessary for the proper function of your
sion maintenance be retained in case questions arise concerning maintenance. Inspection and maintenance should also be performed anytime a malfunction is observed or suspected.
to 150,000 miles (240,000 km) of vehicle maintenance. The schedule includes components that affect vehicle emissions. This page describes some of the emission-related components.
vehicle. The maintenance services contain several checks that require special tools and training, and therefore must be performed by a qualified technician. To keep your Volvo in top condition, specify time-tested and proven Genuine Volvo Parts and Accessories.
The Federal Clean Air Act U.S The Federal Clean Air Act requires vehicle manufacturers to furnish written instructions to
Applicable warranties U.S/Canada In accordance with applicable U.S. and Canadian regulations, the following list of warranties is provided.
· New Vehicle Limited Warranty · Parts and Accessories Limited Warranty · Corrosion Protection Limited Warranty · Seat Belt and Supplemental Restraint Sys-
Vehicle Event Data (Black Box) Your vehicle's driving and safety systems employ computers that monitor, and share with each other, information about your vehicle's operation. One or more of these computers may store what they monitor, either during normal vehicle operation or in a crash or nearcrash event. Stored information may be read and used by:
the ultimate purchaser to assure the proper
tems Limited Warranty
· Volvo Car Corporation
06
servicing and function of the components that control emissions. These services, which are listed in the "Warranty and Service Records Information" booklet, are not covered by the
· Emission Design and Defect Warranty · Emission Performance Warranty
These are the federal warranties; other warran-
· service and repair facilities · law enforcement or government agencies · others who may assert a legal right to
warranty. You will be required to pay for labor ties are provided as required by state/provin-
know, or who obtain your consent to know
and material used.
cial law. Refer to your separate Warranty and
such information.
Service Records Information booklet for
Maintenance
detailed information concerning each of the
Your Volvo passed several major inspections
warranties.
before it was delivered to you, in accordance with Volvo specifications. The maintenance procedures outlined in the Warranty and Serv-
Periodic maintenance helps minimize emissions
ice Records Information booklet, many of
Periodic maintenance will help keep your vehi-
which will positively affect your vehicle's emis- cle running well. Your Warranty and Service
sions, should be performed as indicated. It is
Records Information booklet provides a com-
226
06 Maintenance and specifications
Maintaining your car
Owner maintenance
Periodic maintenance requirements and intervals are described in your vehicle's Warranty and Service Records Information booklet.
The following points can be carried out between the normally scheduled maintenance services.
Each time the car is refueled:
· Check the engine oil level. · Clean the windshield, windshield wipers,
headlights, and tail lights.
Monthly:
· Check cold tire pressure in all tires. Inspect
the tires for wear.
· Check that engine coolant and other fluid
levels are between the indicated "min" and "max" markings.
· Clean interior glass surfaces with a glass
cleaner and soft paper towels.
· Wipe driver information displays with a soft
cloth.
· Visually inspect battery terminals for cor-
rosion. Corrosion may indicate a loose terminal connector, or a battery near the end of its useful service life. Consult your Volvo retailer for additional information.
As needed: Wash the car, including the undercarriage, to reduce wear that can be caused by a buildup of dirt, and corrosion that can be caused by salt residues. Clean leaves and twigs from air intake vents at the base of the windshield, and from other places where they may collect.
NOTE
Complete service information for qualified technicians is available online for purchase or subscription at www.volvotechinfo.com.
Hoisting the vehicle
If a garage jack is used to lift the vehicle, the two jack attachments points should be used.
They are specially reinforced to bear the weight of the vehicle. A garage jack can also be placed under the front of the engine support frame. Take care not to damage the splash guard under the engine. Ensure that the jack is positioned so that the vehicle cannot slide off it. Always use axle stands or similar structures.
If a two-post hoist is used to lift the vehicle, the front and rear lift arm pads should be centered under the reinforced lift plates on the inboard edge of the sill rail (see illustration).
Emission inspection readiness
What is an Onboard Diagnostic System
(OBD II)?
OBD II is part of your vehicle's computerized
engine management system. It stores diagnos-
tic information about your vehicle's emission
controls. It can light the Check Engine light
06
(MIL) if it detects an emission control "fault." A
"fault" is a component or system that is not
performing within an expected range. A fault
may be permanent or temporary. OBD II will
store a message about any fault.
How do states use OBD II for emission inspections? Many states connect a computer directly to a vehicle's OBD II system. The inspector can then read "faults." In some states, this type of
`` 227
06 Maintenance and specifications
Maintaining your car
inspection has replaced the tailpipe emission test.
How can my vehicle fail OBD II emission inspection? Your vehicle can fail OBD II emission inspection for any of the following reasons.
way driving is typically needed to allow OBD II to reach readiness. Your Volvo retailer can provide you with more information on planning a trip.
· Maintain your vehicle in accordance with
your vehicle's maintenance schedule.
· If your Check Engine (MIL) light is lit, your
vehicle may fail inspection.
· If your vehicle's Check Engine light was lit,
but went out without any action on your part, OBD II will still have a recorded fault. Your vehicle may pass or fail, depending on the inspection practices in your area.
· If you had recent service that required dis-
connecting the battery, OBD II diagnostic information may be incomplete and "not ready" for inspection. A vehicle that is not ready may fail inspection.
06 How can I prepare for my next OBD II
emission inspection?
· If your Check Engine (MIL) light is lit or
was lit but went out without service, have your vehicle diagnosed and, if necessary, serviced by a qualified Volvo technician.
· If you recently had service for a lit Check
Engine light, or if you had service that required disconnecting the battery, a period of driving is necessary to bring the OBD II system to "ready" for inspection. A half-hour trip of mixed stop-and-go/high-
228
06 Maintenance and specifications
Opening and closing the hood
Engine compartment, overview
Pull the lever located under the left side of the dash to release the hood lock.
Lift the hood slightly. Press the release control (located under the right front edge of the hood) to the left, and lift the hood
WARNING
Check that the hood locks properly when closed.
G031911
The appearance of the engine compartment may vary depending on engine model.
Coolant expansion tank Power steering fluid reservoir Engine oil dipstick Radiator Filler cap for engine oil Cover over brake fluid reservoir Battery Relay and fuse box Washer fluid reservoir Air cleaner
Hood and engine compartment
WARNING
The cooling fan may start or continue to operate (for up to 6 minutes) after the engine has been switched off.
WARNING
The ignition should always be completely switched off before performing any operations in the engine compartment.
The distributor ignition system operates at very high voltages. Special safety precautions must be followed to prevent injury. Always turn the ignition off when:
· Replacing distributor ignition compo-
nents e.g. plugs, coil, etc.
· Do not touch any part of the distributor
ignition system while the engine is run-
ning. This may result in unintended
movements and body injury.
06
229
06 Maintenance and specifications
Engine oil
Checking the engine oil The oil level should be checked every time the vehicle is refueled. This is especially important during the period up to the first scheduled maintenance service.
· See page 287 for oil specifications. · Refer to the Warranty and Service Records
Information booklet for information on the oil change intervals.
Volvo recommends Castrol oil products.
Checking and adding oil
CAUTION
· Not checking the oil level regularly can
Location of the filler cap and dipstick
result in serious engine damage if the oil level becomes too low.
NOTE
· Oil that is lower than the specified qual-
Before checking the oil:
ity can damage the engine.
· The car should be parked on a level sur-
06
· Volvo does not recommend the use of
oil additives.
face when the oil is checked.
· If the engine is warm, wait for at least
· Always add oil of the same type and
viscosity as already used.
· Never fill oil above the MAX mark. This
10 15 minutes after the engine has been switched off before checking the oil.
could cause an increase in oil consump-
tion.
The oil level must be between the MIN and MAX marks on the dipstick
Checking the oil 1. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a lint-
free rag.
2. Reinsert the dipstick, pull it out, and check the oil level. The level must be between the MIN and MAX marks.
3. Add oil if necessary. If the level is close to the MIN mark, add approximately 0.5 US quarts (0.5 liters) of oil.
4. Recheck the level and add more oil if necessary until the level is near the MAX mark.
G021737
230
WARNING
Do not allow oil to spill onto or come into contact with hot exhaust pipe surfaces.
NOTE
Synthetic oil is not used when the oil is changed at the normal maintenance intervals except at owner request and at additional charge. Please consult your Volvo retailer.
06 Maintenance and specifications
Engine oil
06
231
06 Maintenance and specifications
Fluids Coolant
Location of the coolant reservoir
Normally, the coolant does not need to be changed. If the system must be drained, consult a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
06
See page 288 for information on cooling sys-
tem capacities.
CAUTION
· If necessary, top up the cooling system
with Volvo Genuine Coolant/Antifreeze only (a 50/50 mix of water and antifreeze).
· Different types of antifreeze/coolant
may not be mixed.
· If the cooling system is drained, it
should be flushed with clean water or premixed anti-freeze before it is refilled with the correct mixture of water/antifreeze.
· The cooling system must always be
kept filled to the correct level, and the level must be between the MIN and MAX marks. If it is not kept filled, there can be high local temperatures in the engine which could result in damage. Check coolant regularly!
· Do not top up with water only. This
reduces the rust-protective and antifreeze qualities of the coolant and has a lower boiling point. It can also cause damage to the cooling system if it should freeze.
· Do not use chlorinated tap water in the
vehicles cooling system.
WARNING · Never remove the radiator cap while the
engine is warm. Wait until the vehicle cools.
· If it is necessary to top off the coolant
when the engine is warm, unscrew the expansion tank cap slowly so that the overpressure dissipates.
Brake fluid
Location of the brake fluid reservoir Checking the level The fluid reservoir is concealed under the round cover at the rear of the engine compartment. The round cover must be removed first before the reservoir cap can be accessed.
232
06 Maintenance and specifications
Fluids
The brake fluid should always be between the MIN and MAX marks on the inside of the reservoir. Check, without removing the cap, that there is sufficient fluid in the reservoir.
Fluid type: DOT 4+ boiling point >536 °F
(280 °C), P/N 9437433
Replace: The fluid should be replaced according to the intervals specified in the Warranty and Service Records Information booklet.
When driving under extremely hard conditions (mountain driving, etc), it may be necessary to replace the fluid more often. Consult a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
Always entrust brake fluid changing to a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
Filling 1. Turn and open the cover. 2. Unscrew the reservoir cap and fill the fluid.
The level must be between the MIN and MAX marks.
Power steering fluid
WARNING
If a problem should occur in the power steering system or if the vehicle has no electrical current and must be towed, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. However, keep in mind that greater effort will be required to turn the steering wheel.
CAUTION
Keep the area around the power steering fluid reservoir clean when checking.
WARNING
· If the fluid level is below the MIN mark
06
in the reservoir or if a brake-related
Check the level frequently. The fluid does not
message is shown in the information
require changing. The fluid level must be
display: DO NOT DRIVE. Have the car
between the MIN and MAX marks. For capaci-
towed to a trained and qualified Volvo
ties and recommended fluid grade, see
service technician and have the brake
page 288.
system inspected.
· Dot 4+ should never be mixed with any
other type of brake fluid.
233
06 Maintenance and specifications
Replacing bulbs
Introduction All bulb specifications are listed on page 240. The following bulbs should only be replaced by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician:
· Dome lighting · Reading lights · Glove compartment lighting · Turn signals in the door mirror · Approach lighting in the door mirror · Brake/fog/taillights · Rear side parking lights · Active Bending Lights and LED bulbs
WARNING
· Active Bending Lights* due to the high
voltage used by these headlights, these bulbs should only be replaced by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
· Turn off the lights and remove the
remote key from the ignition before changing any bulbs.
Headlight housing
NOTE
For information regarding any other bulbs
06
not mentioned in this section, please contact your Volvo retailer or a trained and
authorized Volvo service technician.
WARNING
· The engine should not be running when
changing bulbs.
· When changing in the headlight hous-
ing, if the engine has been running just prior to replacing bulbs, please be aware that components in the engine compartment will be hot.
The entire headlight housing must be lifted out when replacing all front bulbs (except for the fog lights).
CAUTION
Never touch the glass of bulbs with your fingers. Grease and oils from your fingers vaporize in the heat and will leave a deposit on the reflector, which will damage it.
G010325
234 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
06 Maintenance and specifications
Replacing bulbs
NOTE
· Always switch off the ignition before
starting to replace a bulb.
· The optional Active Bending Light bulbs
contain trace amounts of mercury. These bulbs should always be disposed of by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
Removing the headlight housing 1. Switch off the ignition by pressing quickly
on the START/STOP ENGINE button and remove the remote key from the ignition slot1.
Unplug the wiring connector by holding down the clip with your thumb.
Pull out the connector with the other hand. 4. Lift out the housing and place it on a soft surface to avoid scratching the lens. 5. Replace the defective bulb(s).
Reinserting the headlight housing
2. Reinstall the headlight housing and locking pins. Check that they are correctly inserted. The headlight housing must be properly inserted and secured in place before the lighting is switched on or the remote key is inserted into the ignition slot.
3. Check that the lights function properly.
The headlight wiring must be connected and the housing must be securely in place before the ignition is switched on.
Removing the cover to access the headlights and parking lights
2. (Upper illustration under "Headlight housing")
Withdraw the headlight housing's lock-
ing pins.
06
Pull the headlight housing straight out .
CAUTION
When disconnecting the connector, pull on the connector itself and not on the wiring.
3. (Lower illustration under "Headlight housing")
When reinserting the housing, be sure that the long locking pin (to the left in the illustration) is securely in place in both of its retaining clamps.
1. Plug in the connector until it clicks into place.
1 Does not apply to vehicles with the optional keyless drive.
`` 235
06 Maintenance and specifications
Replacing bulbs
NOTE
Before starting to replace a bulb, see page 234.
1. Open the retaining clamps by pressing them to the sides.
2. Pull the cover straight out. Reinstall the cover in the reverse order.
Low beam, Halogen
3. Detach the bulb by pressing the upper section of the retaining spring downward and to the side.
4. Unplug the connector from the bulb. 5. Replace the bulb and reinsert it into the
headlight housing. 6. Put the cover back into position and rein-
stall the headlight housing.
High beam, Halogen
3. Disconnect the wiring connector from the bulb holder.
4. Pull the bulb holder straight out of the headlight housing.
5. Pull the defective bulb out of the socket.
6. Press the new bulb into the socket until it snaps into place. It can only be secured in one position.
7. Press the bulb holder into position in the headlight housing.
8. Reconnect the wiring connector to the bulb holder.
9. Put the cover back into position and reinstall the headlight housing.
06
G021746
1. Remove the headlight housing from the vehicle (see page 234).
2. Remove the cover over the bulbs.
1. Remove the headlight housing from the vehicle (see page 234).
2. Remove the cover over the bulbs (see page 235).
236
Extra high beam2
06 Maintenance and specifications
Replacing bulbs
7. Reconnect the wiring connector to the bulb holder.
8. Put the cover back into position and reinstall the headlight housing.
Turn signals
5. Press the new bulb into the holder and turn it clockwise.
6. Reinsert the bulb holder into the headlight housing and turn it clockwise.
7. Reinstall the headlight housing.
Side marker lights
1. Remove the headlight housing from the vehicle (see page 234).
2. Remove the cover over the bulbs (see page 235).
3. Disconnect the wiring connector from the
bulb holder.
1. Remove the headlight housing from the
06
4. Remove the bulb holder from the headlight housing by pulling it straight out.
vehicle (see page 234). 2. Remove the bulb holder by turning it coun-
NOTE
5. Insert a new bulb in the holder until it snaps in place. It can only be inserted in one way.
terclockwise and pulling it out of the headlight housing.
Before starting to replace a bulb, see page 234.
6. Press the bulb holder into position in the headlight housing.
3. Pull out the holder to access the bulb.
4. Remove the burned out bulb by pressing it in slightly and turning it counterclockwise.
1. Remove the headlight housing from the vehicle (see page 234).
2 Models with optional Active Bending Lights only.
`` 237
06 Maintenance and specifications
Replacing bulbs
2. Remove the bulb holder by turning it counterclockwise and pulling it out of the headlight housing.
3. Pull out the burned out bulb and install a new one. It can only be inserted in one position.
4. Reinsert the bulb holder into the headlight housing and turn it clockwise.
5. Reinstall the headlight housing.
Front fog lights
2. Unscrew the fog light housing screw and pull out the fog light.
3. Turn the bulb counterclockwise and pull it out.
4. Insert a new bulb and turn it clockwise. 5. Reinstall the bulb holder. The TOP mark on
the bulb holder must always be upward. 6. Tighten the fog light housing screw and
reinstall the lens.
Rear fog light
2. Remove the burned out bulb by pressing it in and turning it counterclockwise.
3. Insert a new bulb, press it in and turn it clockwise.
4. Reinsert the bulb holder and turn it clockwise.
Location of taillight bulbs
06
Remove the fog light lens by pulling out the upper corner that is closest to the grille.
1. Pull the lens straight out toward the center of the car using a tool as shown in the illustration.
The rear fog light (located on the driver's side of the vehicle) can be reached from behind the bumper
1. Remove the bulb holder by turning it counterclockwise.
Taillight lens, right side Parking/side marker lights (LED) Side reflector Brake light Backup light Turn signal Brake lights (LED)
238
06 Maintenance and specifications
NOTE
If an error message remains in the display after a faulty bulb has been replaced, contact an authorized Volvo workshop.
Brake lights and taillights
Replacing bulbs
3. Remove the burned out bulb by pressing it in and turning it counterclockwise.
4. Insert a new bulb, press it in and turn it clockwise.
5. Reinsert the bulb holder and turn it clockwise.
Footwell lighting
License plate lighting
The brake lights and taillights are replaced from inside the cargo area.
NOTE
Before starting to replace a bulb, see page 234.
1. Open the panel. 2. Remove the bulb holder by turning it coun-
terclockwise.
1. Remove the screws with a screwdriver.
2. Carefully detach the entire bulb housing and pull it out.
3. Replace the bulb.
4. Reinsert the entire bulb housing and screw it into place.
1. Insert a screwdriver at the short end of the lens closest to the tunnel console (the center of the vehicle) and turn gently so that the lens comes loose. (Applies to both lights).
2. Turn carefully until the lens comes loose.
06
3. Replace the bulb.
4. Press the lens back into place.
`` 239
06 Maintenance and specifications
Replacing bulbs
Cargo area lighting
Vanity mirror lighting Removing the mirror glass
2. Press the three lower lugs back into position.
Specification, bulbs
Lighting function
Output/volt- Bulb age (W)
Active Bend- 65
H9
ing Lights
(extra high
beam)
G031942
NOTE
Before starting to replace a bulb, see page 234.
1. Insert a screwdriver underneath the lower edge, in the center, turn and carefully pry up the lug on the edge.
06
1. Insert a screwdriver and gently turn so that the bulb housing comes loose.
2. Insert the screwdriver underneath the edge on the left and right sides (by the black
rubber sections), and pry carefully so that
2. Replace the bulb.
the glass comes loose in the lower edge.
3. Check that the bulb illuminates and press it back into the bulb housing.
3. Carefully detach and lift aside the entire mirror glass and cover.
4. Replace the bulb.
Reinstalling the mirror glass 1. Press the three lugs at top edge of the mir-
ror glass back into position.
Low beam
55
(halogen)
High beam
65
(halogen)
Front turn sig- 21 nals
Front fog
35
lights
Footwell light- 5 ing, cargo area lighting, license plate lighting
Vanity mirror 1.2
H7
H9
PY21W
H8
Festoon bulb SV5.5
Festoon bulb SV5.5
240
Lighting function
Front side marker lights
Glove compartment lighting
Output/volt- Bulb age (W)
5
W3W
5
Festoon
bulb
SV8.5
06 Maintenance and specifications
Replacing bulbs
06
241
06 Maintenance and specifications
Wiper blades and washer fluid Wiper blades
The wipers will return to the normal position when the vehicle is started.
Replacing the windshield wiper blades
The windshield wiper blades are different lengths. The blade on the driver's side is longer than the one on the passenger side.
Service position The wiper blades must be in the service (verti06 cal) position for replacement or washing. 1. Switch off the ignition (ignition mode 0, see
page 79) and keep the remote key in the ignition slot1. 2. Move the right steering wheel lever up and hold it for at least 1 second. The wipers will then move to the vertical position on the windshield.
1 Does not apply to vehicles with the optional keyless drive.
242
With the wipers in the service position, fold out the wiper arm from the windshield. Press the button on the wiper blade attachment and pull the wiper blade straight out, parallel with the wiper arm.
Slide in the new wiper blade until it clicks into place.
Check that the blade is securely in place.
Cleaning Keeping the windshield and wiper blades clean helps improve visibility and prolongs the service life of the wiper blades. Clean the wiper blades with a stiff-bristle brush and lukewarm soap solution or car washing detergent.
Replacing the tailgate wiper blade
06 Maintenance and specifications
Filling washer fluid
Wiper blades and washer fluid
G032770
1. Fold the wiper arm outward.
2. Grasp the inner section of wiper blade (at the arrow).
3. Pull out the blade to release it from the wiper arm.
4. Press the new wiper blade into place and check that it seats securely.
5. Fold the wiper arm back toward the tailgate window.
Location of the washer fluid reservoir
The windshield and headlight washers share a common reservoir.
The washer fluid reservoir is located on the driver's side of the engine compartment. During cold weather, the reservoir should be filled with windshield washer solvent containing antifreeze. For capacities, see page 288.
06
243
06 Maintenance and specifications
Battery Warning symbols on the battery
Wear protective goggles.
Keep away from children.
Avoid smoking, open flames, and/or sparks.
See the owner's manual.
06 Contains corrosive acid.
Risk of explosion
NOTE
A used battery should be disposed of in an environmentally responsible manner. Consult your Volvo retailer or take the battery to a recycling station.
Handling · Check that the battery cables are correctly
connected and tightened.
· Never disconnect the battery when the
engine is running (for example, when replacing the battery).
· If the battery is fully discharged a number
of times, this may shorten its service life.
· The service life of a battery is affected by
factors such as driving conditions and climate. Extreme cold may also further decrease the battery's starting capacity.
· Because the battery's starting capacity
decreases with time, it may be necessary to recharge it if the vehicle is not driven for an extended period of time or if the vehicle is usually only driven short distances.
Never use a quick charger to charge the battery.
WARNING
· Never expose the battery to open flame
or electric spark.
· Do not smoke near the battery. · Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do
not allow battery fluid to contact eyes, skin, fabrics or painted surfaces. If contact occurs, flush the affected area immediately with water. Obtain medical help immediately if eyes are affected.
NOTE
The life of the battery is shortened if it becomes discharged repeatedly.
Maintenance · Use a screw driver to open the caps or
cover and a flashlight to inspect the level.
· If necessary, add distilled water. The level
should never be above the indicator.
· The fluid level should be checked if the
battery has been recharged.
· After inspection, be sure the cap over each
battery cell or the cover is securely in place.
· Check that the battery cables are correctly
connected and properly tightened.
244
· Never disconnect the battery when the
engine is running, or when the key is in the ignition. This could damage the vehicle's electrical system.
· The battery should be disconnected from
the vehicle when a battery charger is used directly on the battery.
· To help keep the battery in good condition,
the vehicle should be driven for at least 15 minutes a week or connected to a charger with an automatic charging function.
· If the battery is fully discharged a number
of times, this may shorten its service life. Keeping the battery fully charged helps prolong its service life.
· The service life of a battery is affected by
factors such as driving conditions and climate. Extreme cold may also further decrease the battery's starting capacity.
· Because the battery's starting capacity
decreases with time, it may be necessary to recharge it if the vehicle is not driven for an extended period of time or if the vehicle is usually only driven short distances.
·
CAUTION
· Always use distilled or deionized water
(battery water).
· Never fill above the level mark in the cell.
Changing
06 Maintenance and specifications
Battery
WARNING
06
Connect and disconnect the positive and negative cables in the correct sequence.
Removal Switch off the ignition and wait at least 5 minutes before disconnecting the battery so
`` 245
06 Maintenance and specifications
Battery
that all information in the vehicle's electrical system can be stored in the control modules.
Open the clips on the front cover and remove the cover.
Release the rubber moulding so that the rear cover is free.
Remove the rear cover by pulling it away.
Detach the black negative cable.
G021771
Detach the red positive cable
Detach the ventilation hose from the battery
2. Move the battery inward and to the side until it reaches the rear edge of the box.
Loosen the screw holding the battery clamp.
3. Screw in the battery with the screw in the clamp.
Move the battery to the side and lift it up.
4. Connect the ventilation hose.
06
WARNING
5. Connect the red positive cable. 6. Connect the black negative cable.
PROPOSITION 65 WARNING!
7. Press in the rear cover. (See Removal).
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals known to the state of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling.
8. Reinstall the cold section moulding. (See Removal).
9. Reinstall the front cover and secure it with the clips. (See Removal).
Installation 1. Lower the battery into the battery box.
246
06 Maintenance and specifications
Replacing fuses There are relay/fuse boxes located in the engine compartment, the passenger compartment, and the cargo area.
If an electrical component fails to function, this may be due to a blown fuse. The easiest way to see if a fuse is blown is to remove it.
To do so:
1. Pull the fuse straight out. If a fuse is difficult to remove, special fuse removal tools are located on the inside of the fuse box covers.
2. From the side, examine the curved metal wire in the fuse to see if it is intact.
If the wire is broken, insert a new fuse of the same color and amperage (written on the fuse).
If fuses burn out repeatedly, have the electrical system inspected by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
WARNING
Never use metal objects or fuses with higher amperage than those stated on the following pages. Doing so could seriously damage or overload the vehicle's electrical system.
Location of the fuse boxes
Under the glove compartment Engine compartment Cargo area
Fuses
06
`` 247
06 Maintenance and specifications
Fuses Engine compartment
06
248
Engine compartment, upper
Engine compartment, front
Engine compartment, lower
Positions These fuses are all located in the engine compartment box. Fuses in are located under
.
NOTE · Fuses 16 33 and 35 41 may be
changed at any time when necessary.
· Fuses 1 15, 34 and 42 44 are relays/
circuit breakers and should only be removed or replaced by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
· There is a special fuse removal tool on
the underside of the cover.
Function
A
Circuit breaker
50
Circuit breaker
50
Circuit breaker
60
Circuit breaker
60
06 Maintenance and specifications
Fuses
Function
A
Circuit breaker
50
Windshield wipers
30
Climate system blower
40
ABS pump
40
ABS valves
20
Active Bending Lights. Head- 10 light leveling*
Central electrical module
20
Radar. ACC control module* 5
Speed-dependent power
5
steering
Function
A
Engine Control Module (ECM), 10 transmission, SRS
Heated washer nozzles
10
Vacuum pump I5T
20
Lighting panel
5
Headlight washers
15
12-volt socket, front and rear 15 seat
Laminated panoramic roof*, 10 ceiling console/ECC*
Engine compartment box
5
Auxiliary lights*
20
06
Horn
15
Engine Control Module (ECM) 10
Control module, automatic
15
transmission
Compressor A/C
15
Coils
5
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
`` 249
06 Maintenance and specifications
Fuses
Function
A
Starter motor relay
30
Ignition coils
20
Engine Control Module (ECM), 10 throttle
Injection system
15
Engine valves
10
EVAP/heated oxygen sensor/ 15 Injection
Crank case ventilation heater 20
Fuel leakage detection
5
06
-
Cooling fan
80
250
Under the glove compartment
06 Maintenance and specifications
Fuses
Fold aside the iupholstery covering the fuse box.
1. Press the cover's lock and fold it up.
2. The fuses are accessible.
Positions
Function
A
Rain sensor*
5
SRS system
10
ABS brakes. Electric parking 5 brake
Function Accelerator pedal, heated seats* ICM display, CD & Radio Steering wheel module High beam
A
Function
A
7.5
Laminated panoramic roof* 20
06
Backup lights
7.5
15
Front fog light*
15
7.5
Windshield washers
15
Adaptive cruise control ACC* 10 15
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
`` 251
06 Maintenance and specifications
Fuses
Function
A
Overhead courtesy lighting, 7.5 Control panel driver's door/ Power passenger seat*
Information display
5
Power driver's seat*
5
Tailgate wiper
15
Remote key receiver, Alarm 5 sensors
Fuel pump
20
Electric steering column lock 20
06
Lock, tank/tailgate
10
Alarm siren. ECC
5
START/STOP ENGINE button 5
Brake light switch
5
252 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Cargo area
06 Maintenance and specifications
Fuses
Located behind the upholstery on the left side of the cargo area
Positions
Module tion
(black). Func- A
Switches in driver's door
25
Switches in passenger's door 25
Switches in rear door, driver's 25 side
Module tion
(black). Func- A
12-V socket in cargo area
15
Rear window defroster
30
-
Switches in rear door, pas- 25
Trailer socket 2*
15
senger's side
Module (black). Func- A
tion
06
Power driver's seat*
25
Trailer socket 1*
40
Power tailgate*
30
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
`` 253
06 Maintenance and specifications
Fuses
Module (white). Func- A tion
Park assist, Park assist cam- 5 era*
Control module Four C*
15
Heated driver's seat*
15
Heated passenger's seat*
15
Rear seat heater, passenger's 15 side*
AWD control module
10
Rear seat heater, driver's
15
side*
06
Power passenger's seat*
25
Keyless drive*
20
Electric parking brake driv- 30 er's side*
-
Module (blue). Func- A tion
Navigation system display* 10
Subwoofer*
25
SIRIUS satellite radio*
5
Audio amplifier*
25
Audio system
15
Bluetooth Hands-free system 5
Reserve
254 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
06 Maintenance and specifications
Wheels and tires
Introduction Your vehicle is equipped with tires according to the vehicle's tire information placard on the B-pillar (the structural member at the side of the vehicle, at the rear of the driver's door opening), or on the inside of the fuel filler door on Canadian models.
CAUTION
Some Volvo models are equipped with an Ultra High Performance tire and wheel combination designed to provide maximum dry pavement performance with consideration for hydroplaning resistance. As such, they may be more susceptible to road hazard damage and, depending on driving conditions, may achieve a tread life of less than 20,000 miles (30,000 km). Even if this vehicle is equipped with Volvo's advanced AWD or DSTC system, these tires are not designed for winter driving, and should be replaced with winter tires when weather conditions dictate.
The tires have good road holding characteristics and offer good handling on dry and wet surfaces. It should be noted however that the tires have been developed to give these features on snow/ice-free surfaces.
Certain models are equipped with "all-season" tires, which provide a somewhat higher degree
of road holding on slippery surfaces than tires without the "all-season" rating. However, for optimum road holding on icy or snow-covered roads, we recommend suitable winter tires on all four wheels. When replacing tires, be sure that the new tires are the same size designation, type (radial) and preferably from the same manufacturer, on all four wheels. Otherwise there is a risk of altering the car's roadholding and handling characteristics. New Tires
Remember that tires are perishable goods. As of 2000, the manufacturing week and year (Department of Transportation (DOT) stamp) will be indicated with 4 digits (e.g. 1502 means that the tire illustrated was manufactured during week 15 of 2002).
G021823
Tire age Tires degrade over time, even when they are not being used. It is recommended that tires generally be replaced after 6 years of normal service. Heat caused by hot climates, frequent high loading conditions or Ultra Violet (U.V) exposure can accelerate the aging process.
You should replace the spare tire when you replace the other road tires due to the aging of the spare.
A tire's age can be determined by the DOT stamp on the sidewall (see the illustration).
A tire with e.g., visible cracks or discoloration should be replaced immediately.
Improving tire economy
· Maintain correct tire pressure. For the tire
pressure tables, see pages 260 and 260.
· Drive smoothly: avoid fast starts, hard
06
braking and tire screeching.
· Tire wear increases with speed.
· Correct front wheel alignment is very
important.
· Unbalanced wheels impair tire economy
and driving comfort.
· Tires must maintain the same direction of
rotation throughout their lifetime.
· When replacing tires, the tires with the
most tread should be mounted on the rear
`` 255
06 Maintenance and specifications
Wheels and tires
wheels to reduce the chance of oversteer during hard braking.
· Hitting curbs or potholes can damage the
tires and/or wheels permanently.
Summer and winter tires
· The tires with the most tread should always
be at the rear (to reduce the risk of skidding).
· Contact a Volvo workshop if you are
unsure about the tread depth.
Storing wheels and tires When storing complete wheels (tires mounted on rims), they should be suspended off the floor or placed on their sides on the floor.
Tires not mounted on rims should be stored on their sides or standing upright, but should not be suspended.
WARNING
· The wheel and tire sizes for your Volvo
are specified to meet stringent stability and handling requirements. Unapproved wheel/tire size combinations can negatively affect your vehicle's stability and handling. Approved tire sizes are shown in the tire inflation pressure tables on pages 260 and 260.
· Any damage caused by installation of
unapproved wheel/tire size combinations will not be covered by your new vehicle warranty. Volvo assumes no
responsibility for death, injury, or
CAUTION
expenses that may result from such
G021778
Tires should preferably be stored in a cool,
installations.
dry, dark place, and should never be stored
The arrows shows the direction of rotation of the tire 06
· When switching between summer and
in close proximity to solvents, gasoline, oils, etc.
Tire wear Tire rotation
winter tires, mark the tires to indicate
Tire wear is affected by a number of factors
where they were mounted on the car, e.g.,
such as tire inflation, ambient temperature,
LF = left front, RR = right rear
driving style, etc. Your vehicle is driven mainly
· Tires with tread designed to roll in only one
by the front tires, which will wear faster.
direction are marked with an arrow on the sidewall.
If the tires are rotated, they should only be moved from front to back or vice versa. They
· Incorrectly mounted tires impair the car's
should never be rotated left to right/right to left.
braking properties and ability to force aside rain, snow and slush.
However, tire rotation, done at the recommended intervals, is one way of helping to keep
256
06 Maintenance and specifications
Wheels and tires
tread wear as even as possible and will help you get maximum mileage from your tires.
Ideally, tire rotation should be done the first time after approximately 3,000 miles (5, 000 km) and thereafter at 6,000 mile (10,000 km) intervals.
Tire rotation should only be performed if front/ rear tire wear is fairly even and tread height is above 1/16" (1.6 mm).
Tread wear indicator
Tire inflation
G021829 G032521
NOTE
Tire rotation is not included in regularly
scheduled maintenance and is performed only at customer request, at additional charge.
The tires have wear indicator strips running across or parallel to the tread. The letters TWI are printed on the side of the tire. When approximately 1/16" (1.6 mm) is left on the
Tire inflation placard on U.S. models
Tire inflation Check tire inflation pressure regularly.
Your Volvo retailer can also provide guidance tread, these strips become visible and indicate Tables listing the recommended inflation pres-
based on your particular driving circumstan-
that the tire should be replaced. Tires with less sure for your vehicle can be found on pages
ces.
than 1/16" (1.6 mm) tread offer very poor trac- 260 and 260. A tire inflation pressure placard
06
tion.
is also located on the driver's side B-pillar (the
structural member at the side of the vehicle, at
When replacing worn tires, it is recommended that the tire be identical in type (radial) and size
the rear of the driver's door opening). This placard indicates the designation of the factory-
as the one being replaced. Using a tire of the same make (manufacturer) will prevent altera-
mounted tires on your vehicle, as well as load limits and inflation pressure.
tion of the driving characteristics of the vehicle.
`` 257
06 Maintenance and specifications
Wheels and tires
NOTE
· The placards shown indicate inflation
pressure for the tires installed on the vehicle at the factory only.
· A certain amount of air seepage from
the tires occurs naturally and tire pressure fluctuates with seasonal changes in temperature. Always check tire pressure regularly.
WARNING
· Under-inflation is the most common
cause of tire failure and may result in severe tire cracking, tread separation, or "blow-out," with unexpected loss of vehicle control and increased risk of injury.
· Under-inflated tires reduce the load car-
rying capacity of your vehicle.
the vehicle's tire information placard or certification label.
Checking tire pressure
Cold tires Inflation pressure should be checked when the tires are cold.
The tires are considered to be cold when they have the same temperature as the surrounding (ambient) air.
· Use a tire gauge to check the tire inflation
This temperature is normally reached after the
pressure, including the spare, at least once
vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours.
a month and before long trips. You are strongly urged to buy a reliable tire pressure gauge, as automatic service station gauges may be inaccurate.
· Use the recommended cold inflation pres-
sure for optimum tire performance and
06
wear.
· Under-inflation or over-inflation may cause
uneven treadwear patterns.
G032522
After driving a distance of approximately 1 mile (1.6 km), the tires are considered to be hot. If you have to drive farther than this distance to pump your tire(s), check and record the tire pressure first and add the appropriate air pressure when you get to the pump.
If checking tire pressure when the tire is hot, never "bleed" or reduce air pressure. The tires are hot from driving and it is normal for pres-
NOTE
A certain amount of air seepage from the tires occurs naturally and tire pressure fluctuates with seasonal changes in tempera-
Tire inflation placard on Canadian models
When weather temperature changes occur, tire inflation pressures also change. A 10-degree temperature drop causes a corresponding
sures to increase above recommended cold pressures. A hot tire at or below recommended cold inflation pressure could be significantly under-inflated.
ture. Always check tire pressure regularly.
drop of 1 psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure. Check
your tire pressures frequently and adjust them
to the proper pressure, which can be found on
258
06 Maintenance and specifications
Wheels and tires
To check inflation pressure: 1. Remove the cap from the valve on one tire,
then firmly press the tire gauge onto the valve.
2. Add air to reach the recommended air pressure.
3. Replace the valve cap.
4. Repeat this procedure for each tire, including the spare.
Tire specifications
Speed ratings The speed ratings in the table translate as follow:
Speed ratings
M
81 mph (130 km/h)
Q
100 mph (160 km/h)
Load ratings
91
1365 lbs (615 kg)
93
1433 lbs (650 kg)
99
1709 lbs (755 kg)
See also page 261 for an explanation of the designations on the sidewall of the tire.
5. Visually inspect the tires to make sure there
T
are no nails or other objects embedded
that could puncture the tire and cause an
H
air leak. V
6. Check the sidewalls to make sure there are
no gouges, cuts, bulges or other irregular-
W
ities. Y
118 mph (190 km/h) 130 mph (210 km/h) 149 mph (240 km/h) 168 mph (270 km/h) 186 mph (300 km/h)
NOTE
Load ratings
06
· If you overfill the tire, release air by
The speed ratings in the table translate as fol-
pushing on the metal stem in the center
low:
of the valve. Then recheck the pressure
with your tire gauge.
· Some spare tires require higher inflation
pressure than the other tires. Consult the tire inflation tables or see the inflation pressure placard.
`` 259
06 Maintenance and specifications
Wheels and tires
Tire inflation pressure table U.S. models The following tire pressures are recommended by Volvo for your vehicle. Refer to the tire inflation placard for information specific to the tires installed on your vehicle at the factory.
Tire size
Cold tire pressure for up to 5 persons
Front psi/kPa
Rear psi/kPa
235/65R17 235/60R18 235/55R19
35/240
35/240
T125/80R17
61/420
61/420
Tire inflation pressure table Canadian models
The following tire pressures are recommended by Volvo for your vehicle. Refer to the tire inflation placard for information specific to the tires installed on your vehicle at the factory.
06
Tire size
Cold tire pressure for up to 5 persons
Optional tire pressure for up to 3 persons
Front psi/kPa
Rear psi/kPa
Front psi/kPa
Rear psi/kPa
235/65R17 235/60R18 235/55R19
39/267
39/267
35/240
35/240
T 125/80 R 17
61/420
61/420
61/420
61/420
260
06 Maintenance and specifications
Wheels and tires
Tire designations
5679
8
G010753
4 10
3
2 11
1 12
Federal law mandates that tire manufacturers place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires (see the illustration).
The following information is listed on the tire sidewall:
The tire designation:
NOTE
Please be aware that the following tire designation is an example only and that this particular tire may not be available on your vehicle.
1. 215: the width of the tire (in millimeters) from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. The larger the number, the wider the tire.
2. 65: The ratio of the tire's height to its width.
3. R: Radial tire.
4. 15: The diameter of the wheel rim (in inches).
5. 95: The tire's load index. In this example, a load index of 95 equals a maximum load of 1521 lbs (690 kg).
6. H: The tire's speed rating, or the maximum speed at which the tire is designed to be driven for extended periods of time, carrying a permissible load for the vehicle, and with correct inflation pressure. For example, H indicates a speed rating of 130 mph (210 km/h).
NOTE
This information may not appear on the tire because it is not required by law.
7. M+S or M/ S = Mud and Snow, AT = All Terrain, AS = All Season
8. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN): This begins with the letters "DOT" and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards. The next two numbers or letters are the plant code where it was manufactured, the next two are the tire size code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was built. For example, 2501 means the 25th week of 2001. The numbers in between are marketing codes used at the manufacturer's discretion. This information helps a tire manufacturer identify a tire for safety recall purposes.
9. Tire Ply Composition and Material
Used: Indicates the number of plies indi-
cates or the number of layers of rubber-
06
coated fabric in the tire tread and sidewall.
Tire manufacturers also must indicate the
ply materials in the tire and the sidewall,
which include steel, nylon, polyester, and
others.
10. Maximum Load: Indicates the maximum load in pounds and kilograms that can be carried by the tire. Refer to the vehicle's tire information placard located on the B-Pillar for the correct tire pressure for your vehicle.
``
261
06 Maintenance and specifications
Wheels and tires
11. Treadwear, Traction, and Temperature · Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metric
sure that should ever be put in the tire. This
grades: See page 264 for more informa-
tires designed to carry a heavier maximum
limit is set by the tire manufacturer.
tion.
12. Maximum permissible inflation pressure: the greatest amount of air pressure that should ever be put in the tire. This limit is set by the tire manufacturer.
load at 41 psi [43 psi (2.9 bar) for Metric tires]. Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire's load carrying capability.
· kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air pres-
sure.
· Recommended tire inflation pressure:
inflation pressure, established by Volvo, which is based on the type of tires that are mounted on a vehicle at the factory. This inflation pressure is affected by the number of occupants in the vehicle, the amount of
Glossary of tire terminology
· PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard
unit of air pressure.
cargo, and the speed at which the vehicle will be driven for a prolonged period. This
The tire suppliers may have additional markings, notes or warnings such as standard load, radial tubeless, etc.
· B-pillar: The structural member at the side
of the vehicle behind the front door.
information can be found on the tire inflation placard(s) located on the driver's side B-pillar and in the tire inflation table in this
· Tire information placard: A placard
showing the OE (Original Equipment) tire
· Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire next
to the rim.
chapter.
· Cold tires: The tires are considered to be
sizes, recommended inflation pressure,
· Sidewall of the tire: Area between the
cold when they have the same temperature
and the maximum weight the vehicle can
bead area and the tread.
as the surrounding (ambient) air. This tem-
carry.
· Tread area of the tire: Area of the perim-
perature is normally reached after the vehi-
· Tire Identification Number (TIN): A num-
eter of the tire that contacts the road when
cle has been parked for at least 3 hours.
06
ber on the sidewall of each tire providing
mounted on the vehicle.
information about the tire brand and man- · Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a tire or Vehicle loading
ufacturing plant, tire size and date of man-
a tire and tube assembly upon which the
Properly loading your vehicle will provide maxi-
ufacturer.
tire beads are seated.
mum return of vehicle design performance.
· Inflation pressure: A measure of the
amount of air in a tire.
· Standard load: A class of P-metric or Met-
ric tires designed to carry a maximum load at 35 psi [37 psi (2.5 bar) for Metric tires]. Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tires load carrying capability.
· Maximum load rating: a figure indicating
the maximum load in pounds and kilograms that can be carried by the tire. This rating is established by the tire manufacturer.
· Maximum permissible inflation
pressure: the greatest amount of air pres-
Before loading your vehicle, familiarize yourself with the following terms for determining your vehicle's weight ratings, with or without a trailer, from the vehicle's Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS/ CMVSS) label, and the vehicle's tire information placard:
262
06 Maintenance and specifications
Wheels and tires
Curb weight The weight of the vehicle including a full tank of fuel and all standard equipment. It does not include passengers, cargo, or optional equipment.
Capacity weight All weight added to the curb weight, including
NOTE
· The location of the various labels in your
vehicle can be found on page 281.
· A table listing important weight limits for
your vehicle can be found on page 284.
load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 750 (5 × 150) = 650 lbs.)
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
cargo and optional equipment. When towing, trailer hitch tongue load is also part of cargo weight.
NOTE
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 1. Locate the statement "the combined
weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX pounds" on your vehi-
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual1 to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
For trailer towing information, please refer to
cle's placard.
the section "Towing a trailer", see
WARNING
page 219.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in
· Exceeding the permissible axle weight,
your vehicle.
gross vehicle weight, or any other
Permissible axle weight
weight rating limits can cause tire over-
The maximum allowable weight that can be
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
heating resulting in permanent defor-
carried by a single axle (front or rear). These
and passengers from XXX kilograms or
mation or catastrophic failure.
06
numbers are shown on the Federal/Canadian
XXX pounds.
· Do not use replacement tires with lower
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS/
4. The resulting figure equals the available
load carrying capacities than the tires
CMVSS) label. The total load on each axle must never exceed its maximum permissible weight.
Gross vehicle weight (GVW) The vehicle's curb weight + cargo + passengers.
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage
that were original equipment on the vehicle because this will lower the vehicle's GVW rating. Replacement tires with a higher limit than the originals do not increase the vehicle's GVW rating limitations.
1 See "Introduction" on page 219.
`` 263
06 Maintenance and specifications
Wheels and tires
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
may have poor traction performance. The trac-
WARNING
ALL PASSENGER VEHICLE TIRES MUST CONFORM TO FEDERAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS IN ADDITION TO THESE
tion grade assigned to this tire is based on braking (straight-ahead) traction tests and is not a measure of cornering (turning) traction.
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, under-
GRADES
inflation, or excessive loading, either sepa-
Quality grades can be found, where applicable, on the tire sidewall between the tread
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
rately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and tire failure.
shoulder and maximum section width. For example:
based on braking (straight-ahead) traction tests and is not a measure of cornering (turning) traction.
Snow chains, snow tires, studded tires
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
Snow chains
TREADWEAR
TEMPERATURE
Snow chains can be used on your Volvo with
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
The temperature grades are AA (the highest),
the following restrictions:
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified gov-
A, B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dis-
· Snow chains should be installed on front
wheels only. Use only Volvo approved
ernment test course. For example, a tire gra-
sipate heat when tested under controlled con-
snow chains.
06
ded 150 would wear one and one half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and many depart significantly from the norm due to variation in driving habits, maintenance practices and differences
ditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a minimum level of performance that all passenger vehicle tires must meet under the
· If accessory, aftermarket or "custom" tires
and wheels are installed and are of a size different than the original tires and wheels, chains in some cases CANNOT be used. Sufficient clearances between chains and brakes, suspension and body components must be maintained.
in road characteristics and climate.
Federal Motor Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of per-
· Some strap-on type chains will interfere
TRACTION
formance on the laboratory test wheel than the
with brake components and therefore
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are minimum required by law.
CANNOT be used.
AA, A, B, and C, as measured under controlled
· All Wheel Drive models: Snow chains
conditions on specified government test sur-
should only be installed on the front
faces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C
wheels.
264
06 Maintenance and specifications
Wheels and tires
Consult your Volvo retailer for additional snow
advised to fit suitable winter tires to help
Temporary Spare
chain information.
retain the highest degree of traction.
The spare tire in your vehicle3 is called a "Tem-
CAUTION
· Check local regulations regarding the
use of snow chains before installing.
· Use single-sided snow chains only. · Always follow the chain manufacturer's
· It is important to install winter tires on all
four wheels to help retain traction during cornering, braking, and accelerating. Failure to do so could reduce traction to an unsafe level or adversely affect handling.
· Do not mix tires of different design as this
could also negatively affect overall tire road
porary Spare".
Recommended tire pressure (see the placard on the B-pillar or on the fuel filler door) should be maintained irrespective of which position on the vehicle the temporary spare tire is used on.
In the event of damage to this tire, a new one
installation instructions carefully. Install
grip.
can be purchased from your Volvo retailer.
chains as tightly as possible and retighten periodically.
· Winter tires wear more quickly on dry roads
in warm weather. They should be removed
WARNING
· Never exceed the chain manufacturer's
specified maximum speed limit. (Under no circumstances should you exceed 31 mph (50 km/h).
when the winter driving season has ended.
· Studded tires should be run-in
300 600 miles (500 1000 km) during which the vehicle should be driven as
Current legislation prohibits the use of the "Temporary Spare" tire other than as a temporary replacement for a punctured tire. It must be replaced as soon as possible by a
· Avoid bumps, holes or sharp turns
smoothly as possible to give the studs the
standard tire. Road holding and handling
when driving with snow chains.
opportunity to seat properly in the tires.
may be affected with the "Temporary
· The handling of the vehicle can be
adversely affected when driving with
The tires should have the same rotational direction throughout their entire lifetime.
Spare" in use. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
06
chains. Avoid fast or sharp turns as well
as locked wheel braking.
NOTE
CAUTION
Snow tires, studded tires2
Tires for winter use:
· Owners who live in or regularly commute
through areas with sustained periods of snow or icy driving conditions are strongly
Please consult state or provincial regulations restricting the use of studded winter tires before installing such tires.
The vehicle must not be driven with wheels of different dimensions or with a spare tire other than the one that came with the vehicle. The use of different size wheels can seriously damage your car's transmission.
2 Where permitted 3 Not on models equipped with the Tire sealing system.
`` 265
06 Maintenance and specifications
Wheels and tires
Changing a wheel
WARNING
Current legislation prohibits the use of the "Temporary Spare" tire other than as a temporary replacement for a punctured tire. It must be replaced as soon as possible by a standard tire. Road holding and handling may be affected with the "Temporary Spare" in use.
After use The foam block and spare wheel must be replaced in the reverse order. Note the arrow on the upper foam block. It should point forward.
CAUTION
The vehicle must never be driven with more than one temporary spare wheel.
Location of jack and tools
Spare wheel
The spare wheel is located in the spare wheel well with the rim side down. There are two foam
The spare wheel (Temporary spare) is only
blocks, one under the spare wheel and one
intended for temporary use. Replace the spare wheel with a normal wheel as soon as possible.
over/inside. The upper one contains all tools.
Removing the wheel cover
06
The car's handling may be altered by the use of the spare wheel. The correct tire pressure for
The same bolt runs through to secure the spare wheel and the foam blocks.
Changing a tire: 1. Apply the parking brake.
the spare wheel is stated in the tire pressure tables on pages 260 and 260.
Taking out the spare wheel 1. Fold the rear edge of the floor mat forward.
2. Put the gear selector in P.
3. Block the wheels that are on the ground
2. Open the floor hatch.
with wooden blocks or large stones.
3. Undo the retaining bolt.
4. Remove the wheel cover (where applica-
4. Lift out the foam block with tools. 5. Lift out the spare wheel.
ble) using the lug wrench in the tool bag.With the vehicle still on the ground, use the lug wrench to loosen the wheel
The other two blocks can remain in the wheel
well.
266
06 Maintenance and specifications
Wheels and tires
nuts 1/2 1 turns by exerting downward pressure.
5. Turn the nuts counterclockwise to loosen.
WARNING
· The jack must correctly engage the jack
attachment.
· Be sure the jack is on a firm, level, non-
slippery surface.
· Never allow any part of your body to be
extended under a vehicle supported by
a jack.
· Use the jack intended for the vehicle
when changing a tire. For any other job,
use stands to support the vehicle.
WARNING
· Apply the parking brake and put the
gear selector in the Park (P) position.
There are two attachment points near the
· Block the wheels standing on the
6. There are two jack attachment points on each side of the vehicle. Position the jack correctly in the attachment (see illustration above) and crank while simultaneously guiding the base of the jack to the ground. The base of the jack must be flat on a level, firm, non-slippery surface. Before raising the vehicle, check that the jack is still correctly positioned in the attachment.
rear of the vehicle. Only the rear-most attachment point is intended for the jack (see the illustration).
8. Raise the vehicle until the wheel to be changed is lifted off the ground.
9. Unscrew the wheel nuts completely and carefully remove the wheel so as not to damage the threads on the studs.
ground, use rigid wooden blocks or large stones.
· The jack should be kept well-greased
and clean, and should not be damaged. 06
· No objects should be placed between
the base of jack and the ground, or between the jack and the attachment bar on the vehicle.
7. Raise the vehicle until the wheel to be changed is lifted off the ground.
Re-installing the wheel 1. Clean the contact surfaces on the wheel
and hub.
2. Lift the wheel and place it on the hub.
`` 267
06 Maintenance and specifications
Wheels and tires
Tire Sealing System*
Accessing the tire sealing system The tire sealing system is stowed under the floor of the cargo area. To access it:
1. Lift the floor hatch in the cargo area.
2. Remove the screw holding the tire sealing system's retaining bracket.
3. Lift out the tire sealing system.
G022916
Tighten the lug nuts
3. Install the wheel nuts and tighten hand-
tight. Using the lug wrench, tighten cross- Introduction
wise until all nuts are snug.
Certain models are equipped with a tire sealing
system that enables you to temporarily seal a
4. Lower the vehicle to the ground and alter- hole in the tread surface and re-inflate a flat tire,
nately tighten the bolts crosswise to
or to adjust a tire's inflation pressure.
103 ft. lbs. (140 Nm).
06
The system consists of an air compressor, a
5. Install the wheel cover (where applicable). container for the sealing compound, wiring to
connect the system to the vehicle's electrical
system via one of the 12-volt sockets, and a
hose used to connect the system to the tire's
inflation valve.
The 12-volt sockets are located in the front tunnel console, on the rear side of the center console in the rear seat and in the cargo area*, see page 200.
NOTE
· The tire sealing system is only intended
to seal holes on the tire's tread area, not the sidewall.
· Tires with large holes or tears cannot be
repaired with the tire sealing system.
· After use, stow the tire sealing system
properly to help prevent rattling.
268 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
06 Maintenance and specifications
WARNING
· After using the tire sealing system, the
vehicle should not be driven farther than approximately 120 miles (200 km).
· Have the tire inspected by a trained and
qualified Volvo service technician as soon as possible to determine if it can be permanently repaired or must be replaced.
· The vehicle should not be driven faster
than 50 mph (80 km/h) while using a tire that has been temporarily repaired with the tire sealing system.
· After using the tire sealing system, drive
carefully and avoid abrupt steering maneuvers and sudden stops.
Tire sealing systemoverview
Speed limit sticker On/Off switch Electrical wire Bottle holder (orange cover) Protective hose cover Air release knob Hose Bottle with sealing compound Air pressure gauge
Wheels and tires
WARNING
Please keep the following points in mind when using the tire sealing system:
· The sealing compound bottle (no. 8 in
the illustration) contains 1.2-Ethanol and natural rubber-latex. These substances are harmful if swallowed.
· The contents of this bottle may cause
allergic skin reactions or otherwise be potentially harmful to the skin, the central nervous system, and the eyes.
Precautions:
· Keep out of reach of children.
· Do not ingest the contents.
· Avoid prolonged or repeated contact
with the skin.
· Hands should be washed thoroughly
after handling.
06
First aid:
· Skin: Wash affected areas of skin with
soap and water. Get medical attention if symptoms occur.
· Eyes: Flush with plenty of water for least
15 minutes, occasionally lifting the
`` 269
06 Maintenance and specifications
Wheels and tires
upper and lower eyelids. Get medical attention if symptoms occur.
· Inhalation: Move the person to fresh air.
If irritation persists, get medical attention.
Tire sealing systemtemporarily repairing a flat tire
06
Temporarily repairing a flat tire is done in two stages:
· Stage 1: The hole is sealed by pumping
sealing compound into the tire. The car is then driven a short distance to distribute the sealing compound in the tire.
NOTE
Do not remove any foreign objects (nails, etc.) from the tire before using the sealing system.
· Stage 2: The tire's inflation pressure is
checked and adjusted if necessary.
WARNING · Never leave the tire sealing system
unattended when it is operating.
· Keep the tire sealing system away from
children.
· Be sure the vehicle is parked safely off
the road and away from moving traffic.
· Apply the parking brake.
Stage 1: Sealing the hole 1. Open the cover on the tire sealing kit.
2. Peel off the speed limit sticker and affix it to the steering wheel hub where it will be clearly visible to the driver.
3. Ensure that the on/off switch is in position 0 (the 0 side of the switch should be pressed down).
WARNING
Contact with the sealing compound may cause skin irritation. If contact occurs, wash the affected area immediately with soap and water.
4. Unscrew the orange cover over the bottle holder and unscrew the cap on the bottle of sealing compound.
NOTE
Do not break the seal on the bottle. This occurs automatically when the bottle is screwed into the holder.
5. Screw the bottle into the bottle holder.
G014338
270
06 Maintenance and specifications
Wheels and tires
WARNING
WARNING
CAUTION
The bottle is equipped with a catch to keep it securely in place and help prevent sealing compound leakage. Once in place, the bottle cannot be unscrewed. This must be done by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
6. Remove the valve cap from the tire's inflation valve and screw the tire sealing system's hose connector onto the valve as tightly as possible by hand.
· Never stand next to the tire being inflated
when the compressor is in operation.
· If cracks, bubbles, etc. form on the tire,
switch off the compressor immediately.
· If there is visible damage to the sidewall
or the rim, the tire cannot be repaired. The vehicle should not be driven if this occurs. Contact a towing service or Volvo On Call Roadside Assistance if applicable.
The compressor should not be used for more than 10 minutes at a time to avoid overheating.
WARNING
If the pressure remains below 22 psi (1.8 bar) after approximately seven minutes, turn off the compressor. In this case, the hole is too large to be sealed and the vehicle should not be driven.
7. Connect the electrical wire to the nearest 12-volt socket in the vehicle.
8. Start the vehicle's engine.
NOTE
The air pressure gauge will temporarily show an increase in pressure to approxi-
11. Switch off the compressor and disconnect the electrical wire from the 12-volt socket.
12. Unscrew the hose from the tire's inflation
WARNING
The vehicle´s engine should be running when the tire sealing system is used to avoid battery drain. Therefore, be sure the vehicle is parked in a well ventilated place, or outdoors, before using the system.
mately 88 psi (6 bar) while the sealing com-
valve and reinstall the valve cap.
pound is being pumped into the tire. The pressure should return to a normal level after approximately 30 seconds.
13. Immediately drive the vehicle for approxi-
mately 2 miles (3 km) at a maximum speed 06 of 50 mph (80 km/h) to distribute the seal-
10. Within seven minutes, inflate the tire to
ing compound in the tire.
between 22--44 psi (1.8--3.0 bar). Switch
off the compressor briefly to get a clear
9. Start the tire sealing system's compressor
reading from the pressure gauge.
by pressing the on/off switch to position I.
`` 271
06 Maintenance and specifications
Wheels and tires
CAUTION
If your vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS), the use of the sealing compound may lead to incorrect tire pressure readings or in rare cases, damage to the tire pressure sensor. Use the tire sealing system to check and adjust the damaged tire's inflation pressure.
NOTE
WARNING
If heavy vibrations, unsteady steering behavior, or noises should occur while driving, reduce speed and park the vehicle in a safe place. Recheck the tire for bumps, cracks, or other visible damage, and recheck its inflation pressure. If the pressure is below 19 psi (1.3 bar), do not continue driving. Have the vehicle towed to a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
Replacing the sealing compound container The sealing compound container must be replaced if:
· the tire sealing system has been used to
repair a tire
· the container's expiration date has passed
(see the date on decal).
NOTE
· Safely stow the tire sealing system in a
Stage 2: Checking inflation pressure
· After use, the sealing compound bottle,
convenient place as it will soon be used
1. Connect the tire sealing system as descri-
the hose, and certain other system
again to check the tire's inflation pres-
bed in stage 1.
components must be replaced. Please
sure.
· The empty bottle of sealing compound
2. Refer to the inflation pressure tablesfor the correct inflation pressure. If the tire needs
consult your Volvo retailer for replacement parts.
06
cannot be removed from the bottle holder. Consult a trained and qualified Volvo service technician to have the bottle removed and properly disposed of.
to be inflated, start the tire sealing system's compressor. If necessary, release air from the tire by turning the air release knob counterclockwise.
· If the sealing compound bottle's expi-
ration date has passed, please take it to a Volvo retailer or a recycling station that can properly dispose of harmful substances.
CAUTION
The compressor should not be used for more than 10 minutes at a time to avoid overheating.
WARNING
If you interrupt your trip for more than 1 hour, check the inflation pressure in the damaged tire again before continuing.
272
06 Maintenance and specifications
Wheels and tires
Inflating tires
7. Check the tire's inflation pressure on the
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
The tire sealing system can be used to inflate the tires. To do so:
1. Park the car in a safe place.
2. The compressor should be switched off. Ensure that the on/off switch is in position
0 (the 0 side of the switch should be pressed down).
3. Take out the electrical wire and hose.
gauge. Switch off the compressor briefly to get a clear reading from the pressure gauge.
8. Refer to the tire inflation tables for the correct inflation pressure. If the tire needs to be inflated, start the tire sealing system's compressor (press the on/off switch to position I). If necessary, release air from the tire by turning the air release knob counterclockwise.
(TPMS)U.S models only
NOTE
USA FCC ID: KR5S122780002
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
4. Remove the valve cap from the tire's infla-
cause undesired operation.
tion valve and screw the hose connector
CAUTION
onto the valve as tightly as possible by hand.
The compressor should not be used for more than 10 minutes at a time to avoid
The tire pressure monitoring system uses sensors mounted in the tire valves to check infla-
5. Connect the electrical wire to the nearest
overheating.
tion pressure levels. When the vehicle is mov-
12-volt socket in the vehicle.
ing at a speed of approximately 20 mph
6. Start the vehicle's engine. WARNING
9. Turn off the compressor (press the on/off switch to position 0) when the correct inflation pressure has been reached.
(30 km/h) or faster, these sensors transmit inflation pressure data to a receiver located in the vehicle.
06
· The vehicle's engine should be running
when the tire sealing system is used to
10. Unscrew the hose from the tire's inflation valve and reinstall the valve cap.
When low inflation pressure is detected, TPMS will light up the tire pressure warning light ( ) (also referred to as a telltale) in the
avoid battery drain. Therefore, be sure
11. Disconnect the electrical wire from the
instrument panel and will display one of the
the vehicle is parked in a well ventilated place, or outdoors, before using the system.
12-volt socket.
following messages in the text window: LOW TIRE PRESS. CHECK TIRES or VERY LOW TIRE PRESSURE.
· Children should never be left unattended
in the vehicle when the engine is running.
`` 273
06 Maintenance and specifications
Wheels and tires
NOTE
If a fault occurs in TPMS, the tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute and TIRE PRESS SYST
er's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
NOTE
TPMS indicates low tire pressure but does not replace normal tire maintenance. For information on correct tire pressure, please
SERVICE REQUIRED will be displayed.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
refer to the Tire inflation pressure tables or consult your Volvo retailer.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
the system is not operating properly. The
should be checked monthly when cold and
TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with Erasing warning messages
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended the low tire pressure telltale. When the system When a low tire pressure warning message has
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for been displayed, and the tire pressure warning
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your
approximately one minute and then remain
light has come on:
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the
continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the mal-
1. Use a tire pressure gauge to check the inflation pressure of all four tires.
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
function indicator is illuminated, the system
2. Re-inflate the tire(s) to the correct pressure
may not be able to detect or signal low tire
(consult the tire pressure placard or the
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may
tables on pages 260 and 260.
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring occur for a variety of reasons, including the
system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres- installation of replacement or alternate tires or 3. In certain cases, it may be necessary to
06
sure telltale when one or more of your tires is
wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS
significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when from functioning properly. Always check the
drive the vehicle for several minutes at a speed of 20 mph (30 km/h) or faster. This
the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one
will erase the warning text and the warning
should stop and check your tires as soon as
or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
light will go out.
possible, and inflate them to the proper pres- ensure that the replacement or alternate tires
sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated
and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to
WARNING
tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel
function properly.
Incorrect inflation pressure could lead to tire failure, resulting in a loss of control of the
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle.
vehicle's handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driv-
274
06 Maintenance and specifications
Changing wheels with TPMS Please note the following when changing or replacing the factory installed TPMS wheels/ tires on the vehicle:
· Only the factory-mounted wheels are
equipped with TPMS sensors in the valves.
· If the vehicle is equipped with a temporary
spare tire, this tire does not have a TPMS sensor.
· If wheels without TPMS sensors are moun-
ted on the vehicle, TIRE PRESS SYST SERVICE REQUIRED will be displayed each time the vehicle is driven above 25 mph (40 km/h) for 10 minutes or more.
· Once TPMS sensors are properly installed,
the warning message should not reappear. If the message is still displayed, drive the vehicle for several minutes at a speed of 20 mph (30 km/h) or faster to erase the message.
· Volvo recommends that TPMS sensors be
fitted on all wheels used on the vehicle. Volvo does not recommend moving sensors back and forth between sets of wheels.
NOTE
· If you change to tires with a different
recommended inflation pressure, the TPMS system must be recalibrated to these tires. This must be done by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
· If a tire is changed, or if the TPMS sen-
sor is moved to another wheel, the sensor's seal, nut, and valve core should be replaced.
· When installing TPMS sensors, the
vehicle must be parked for at least 15 minutes with the ignition off. if the vehicle is driven within 15 minutes, a TPMS error message will be displayed.
CAUTION
When inflating tires with TPMS valves, press the pump's mouthpiece straight onto the valve to help avoid bending or otherwise damaging the valve.
Wheels and tires
06
275
06 Maintenance and specifications
Vehicle care
Washing the car
· Tar spots can be removed with tar remover
after the car has been washed.
CAUTION
WARNING
Be sure that the compressor is not connected to a 12-volt socket while replacing the container.
· A stiff-bristle brush and lukewarm soapy
water can be used to clean the wiper blades. Frequent cleaning of the windshield and wiper blades improves visibility considerably and also helps prolong the
· During high pressure washing, the
spray mouthpiece must never be closer to the vehicle than 13" (30 cm). Do not spray into the locks.
· Dirt, snow, etc., on the headlights can
service life of the wiper blades.
reduce lighting capacity considerably.
The following points should be kept in mind when washing and cleaning the car:
· Wash off the dirt from the underside (wheel
housings, fenders, etc).
Clean the headlights regularly, for example when refueling.
· The car should be washed at regular inter-
vals since dirt, dust, insects and tar spots
adhere to the paint and may cause dam-
· In areas of high industrial fallout, more fre-
quent washing is recommended.
Special laminated panoramic roof cautions:
· Always close the laminated panoramic
age. To help prevent corrosion, it is particularly important to wash the car frequently
NOTE
roof and sun shade before washing your vehicle.
in the wintertime.
· Avoid washing your car in direct sunlight.
Doing so may cause detergents and wax
to dry out and become abrasive. To avoid
06
scratching, use lukewarm water to soften
the dirt before you wash with a soft
When washing the car, remember to remove dirt from the drain holes in the doors and sills.
CAUTION
· Never use abrasive cleaning agents on
the laminated panoramic roof.
· Never use wax on the rubber seals
around the laminated panoramic roof.
sponge, and plenty of sudsy water.
· Avoid waxing or polishing plastic or rub-
Exterior components
· Bird droppings: Remove from paintwork
as soon as possible. Otherwise the finish
ber components
· Polishing chromed strips can wear
Volvo recommends the use of special cleaning products, available at your Volvo retailer, for
may be permanently damaged.
away or damage the surface
cleaning colored plastic, rubber, or ornamental
· A detergent can be used to facilitate the
softening of dirt and oil.
· Dry the car with a clean chamois and
remember to clean the drain holes in the doors and rocker panels.
· Polishes containing abrasive sub-
stances should not be used
components such as chromed strips on the exterior of your vehicle. The instructions for using these products should be followed carefully. Solvents or stain removers should not be used.
276
06 Maintenance and specifications
Vehicle care
CAUTION
· Avoid waxing or polishing plastic or rub-
ber components
· Polishing chromed strips can wear
away or damage the surface
· Polishes containing abrasive sub-
stances should not be used
Automatic car wash
· We do NOT recommend washing your car
in an automatic wash during the first six months (because the paint will not have hardened sufficiently).
· An automatic wash is a simple and quick
way to clean your car, but it is worth remembering that it may not be as thorough as when you yourself go over the car with sponge and water. Keeping the underbody clean is most important, especially in the winter. Some automatic washers do not have facilities for washing the underbody.
CAUTION
· Before driving into an automatic car
wash, turn off the optional rain sensor to avoid damaging the windshield wipers.
· Make sure that side view mirrors, auxil-
iary lamps, etc, are secure, and that any antenna(s) are retracted or removed. Otherwise there is risk of the machine dislodging them.
· Chromed wheels: Clean chrome-
plated wheels using the same detergents used for the body of the vehicle. Aggressive wheel-cleaning agents can permanently stain chrome-plated wheels.
WARNING
· When the vehicle is driven immediately
after being washed, apply the brakes, including the parking brake, several times in order to remove any moisture from the brake linings.
· Engine cleaning agents should not be
used when the engine is warm. This constitutes a fire risk.
Exterior lighting Condensation may form temporarily on the inside of the lenses of exterior lights such as headlights, fog lights, or taillights. This is nor-
mal and the lights are designed to withstand moisture. Normally, condensation will dissipate after the lights have been on for a short time.
Polishing and waxing
· Normally, polishing is not required during
the first year after delivery, however, wax-
ing may be beneficial.
· Before applying polish or wax the vehicle
must be washed and dried. Tar spots can be removed with kerosene or tar remover. Difficult spots may require a fine rubbing compound.
· After polishing use liquid or paste wax.
· Several commercially available products
contain both polish and wax.
· Waxing alone does not substitute for pol-
ishing a dull surface.
06
· A wide range of polymer-based waxes can
be purchased today. These waxes are easy
to use and produce a long-lasting, high-
gloss finish that protects the bodywork
against oxidation, road dirt and fading.
· Do not polish or wax your vehicle in direct
sunlight (the surface of the vehicle should
not be warmer than 113 °F (45 °C).
`` 277
06 Maintenance and specifications
Vehicle care
CAUTION
Volvo does not recommend the use of longlife or durable paint protection coatings, some of which may claim to prevent pitting,
sunlight, grease and dirt can break down the protection. Staining, cracking, scuffing, and fading can result.
Volvo offers an easy-to-use, non-greasy
4. Dry the stain with soft paper towels or a towel, and allow the leather to dry completely.
Protecting leather upholstery
fading, oxidation, etc. These coatings have
leather care kit formulated to clean and beau- 1. Put a small amount of protectant cream on
not been tested by Volvo for compatibility with your vehicle's clear coat. Some of them may cause the clear coat to soften, crack, or cloud. Damage caused by application of paint protection coatings may not be covered under your vehicle's paint warranty.
Cleaning the interior
tify your vehicle's leather, and to renew the protective qualities of its finish. The cleaner removes dirt and oil buildup. The light cream protectant restores a barrier against soil and sunlight.
Volvo also offers a special leather softener that should be applied after the cleaner and protectant. It leaves leather soft and smooth, and
a cloth and apply a thin coating of cream to the upholstery with light circular movements.
2. Allow the leather to dry for 20 minutes.
This will help the leather resist staining and protect against sunlight's harmful UV rays.
Only use cleaning agents and car care prod-
reduces friction between leather and other fin-
ucts recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly
ishes in the vehicle.
and follow the instructions included with the car care product.
Volvo recommends cleaning, protecting and conditioning your vehicle's leather two to four
Upholstery care
times a year. Ask your Volvo retailer about
06
Fabric
Leather Care Kit 951 0251 and Leather Softener 943 7429.
Clean with soapy water or a detergent. For
more difficult spots caused by oil, ice cream,
Cleaning leather upholstery
shoe polish, grease, etc., use a clothing/fabric 1. Pour leather cleaner on a damp sponge
stain remover. Consult your Volvo retailer.
and squeeze it until the cleaner foams.
AlcanteraTM suede-like material Suede-like upholstery can be cleaned with a soft cloth and mild soap solution.
Leather care Volvo's leather upholstery is manufactured with a protectant to repel soiling. Over time,
2. Apply the foam to the stain by moving the sponge with circular movements.
3. Dampen the stain thoroughly with the sponge. Let the sponge absorb the stain, do not rub.
278
06 Maintenance and specifications
Vehicle care
CAUTION
· Under no circumstances should gaso-
line, naphtha or similar cleaning agents be used on the plastic or the leather since these can cause damage.
gent. For best protection in winter, Volvo recommends the use of Volvo rubber floor mats. Consult your Volvo retailer.
Spots on interior plastic, metal, or wood surfaces
Paint repairs require special equipment and skill. Contact your Volvo retailer for any extensive damage.
Minor scratches can be repaired by using Volvo touch-up paint.
· Take extra care when removing stains
such as ink or lipstick since the coloring can spread.
· Use solvents sparingly. Too much sol-
vent can damage the seat padding.
Cleaning interior plastic components should be done with a cleaning agent specially designed for this purpose. Consult your Volvo retailer.
Color code Make sure you have the right color. The color code number is stated on the model plate.
Minor stone chips and scratches
· Start from the outside of the stain and
Touching up paintwork
Material:
work toward the center.
· Primer can
· Sharp objects (e.g. pencils or pens in a
pocket) or Velcro fasteners on clothing may damage the textile upholstery.
· Clothing that is not colorfast, such as
new jeans or suede garments, may stain the upholstery.
· Paint touch-up pen · Brush · Masking tape
If the stone chip has not gone down to the bare metal and an undamaged color coat remains,
you can add paint immediately after removing 06
Cleaning the seat belts
dirt.
Clean only with lukewarm water and a mild soap solution.
NOTE
Cleaning floor mats
Paint code on the model plate1
When touching up the vehicle, it should be clean and dry. The surface temperature
The floor mats should be vacuumed or brushed Paint damage requires immediate attention to
should be above 60 °F (15 °C).
clean regularly, especially during winter when avoid rusting. Make it a habit to check the finish
they should be taken out for drying. Spots on regularly, for instance washing the vehicle.
textile mats can be removed with a mild deter- Touch-up if necessary.
1 see page 281 for the location of the model plate.
`` 279
06 Maintenance and specifications
Vehicle care
Minor scratches on the surface If the stone chip has not penetrated down to the metal and an undamaged layer of paint remains, the touch-up paint can be applied as soon as the spot has been cleaned.
Repairing stone chips
4. If there is a longer scratch, you may want to protect surrounding paint by masking it off
5. After a few days, polish the touched-up areas. Use a soft rag and a small amount of polish.
G021832
06 1. Place a strip of masking tape over the damaged surface. Pull the tape off so that any loose flakes of paint adhere to it. 2. Thoroughly mix the primer and apply it with a small brush. 3. When the primer surface is dry, the paint can be applied using a brush. Mix the paint thoroughly; apply several thin paint coats and let dry after each application.
280
Location of labels
06 Maintenance and specifications
Label information
06
`` 281
06 Maintenance and specifications
Label information
List of labels
Model plate. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). Codes for color and upholstery, etc.
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS) specifications (USA) and Ministry of Transport (CMVSS) standards (Canada). Your Volvo is designed to meet all applicable safety standards, as evidenced by the certification label on the driver's side B-pillar (the structural member at the side of the vehicle, at the rear of the driver's door opening). For further information regarding these regulations, please consult your Volvo retailer.
Loads and Tire
Pressures. The appearance of the decal
will vary, depending on the market for
which the vehicle is intended. See also
06
page 257.
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). The VIN plate is located on the top left surface of the dashboard. The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) should always be quoted in all correspondence concerning your vehicle with the retailer and when ordering parts.
Vehicle Emission Control Information. Your Volvo is designed to meet all applicable emission standards, as evidenced by the certification label on the underside of the hood. For further information regarding these regulations, please consult your Volvo retailer.
282
Dimensions
06 Maintenance and specifications
Specifications
Dimension
A
Wheelbase
B
Length
C
Load length, floor, seatback down
D
Load length, floor
E
Height
F
Load height
G
Track, front
In. (mm) 109.2 (2774) 182.2 (4628) 70.4 (1789) 38.3 (972) 67.4 (1713) 31.6 (802) 64.3 (1632)
06
`` 283
06 Maintenance and specifications
Specifications
Dimension
H
Track, rear
I
Load width, floor
J
Width
K
Width, incl. door mirrors
Weights Category Gross vehicle weight
Capacity weight
06
Permissible axle weights, front
Permissible axle weights, rear
Curb weight Max. roof load
USA 6-cyl. FWDA: 5200 lbs 6-cyl. AWDB: 5355 lbs 6-cyl. turbo AWD: 5380 lbs 950 lbs (all models) 6-cyl. FWD: 2740 lbs 6-cyl. AWD: 2800 lbs 6-cyl. turbo AWD: 2840 lbs 6-cyl. FWD: 2545 lbs 6-cyl. AWD: 2640 lbs 6-cyl. turbo AWD: 2645 lbs 3920 4140 lbs 220 lbs
284
In. (mm) 62.4 (1586) 42.9 (1090) 74.4 (1891) 84.3 (2142)
Canada 6-cyl. AWD:2430 kg 6-cyl. turbo AWD:2440 kg 430 kg (all models 6-cyl. AWD:1270 kg 6-cyl. turbo AWD:1290 kg 6-cyl. AWD:1200 kg 6-cyl. turbo AWD:1200 kg 1770 1900 kg 100 kg
Category Max. trailer weights
Max. tongue weight
A FWD = Front Wheel Drive B AWD = All Wheel Drive
Engine specifications Specification/Model Engine designation Output (kW/rps) Output (hp/rpm) Torque (Nm/rps) Torque (ft. lbs./rpm) No. of cylinders Bore (in/mm) Stroke (in/mm)
06 Maintenance and specifications
USA Without brakes: 1650 lbs With brakes, 1 7/8" ball: 2,000 lbs With brakes, 2" ball: 3,300 lbs 165 lbs
Specifications
Canada Without brakes: 750 kg With brakes, 1 7/8" ball: 900 kg With brakes, 2" ball: 1500 kg 75 kg
3.2 6-cyl. B6324S 175/103 235/6200 320/53 236/3200 6 3.31/84 3.78/96
3.2 6-cyl. B6324S2 168/103 225/6200 300/57 221/3400 6 3.31/84 3.78/96
3.0TA
B6304T2
210/93
281/5600
400/25 80
06
295/1500 4800
6
3.23/82
3.67/93.2
`` 285
06 Maintenance and specifications
Specifications
Specification/Model
3.2 6-cyl.
Displacement
3.19 liters (194.8 cu. in.)
Compression ratio
10.8:1
A This engine may not be available on all markets
3.2 6-cyl. 3.19 liters (194.8 cu. in.) 10.3:1
3.0TA 2.95 liters (175 cu. in.) 9.3:1
06
286
06 Maintenance and specifications
Specifications
Engine oil
Engine oil must meet the minimum ILSAC specification GF-4, API SL, or ACEA A1/B1. Lower quality oils may not offer the same fuel economy, engine performance, or engine protection.
good fuel economy and engine protection. See the viscosity chart.
American Petroleum Institute (API) symbol
Volvo recommends Castrol.
Depending on your driving habits, premium or synthetic oils may provide superior fuel economy and engine protection. Consult your Volvo retailer for recommendations on premium or synthetic oils.
G023491 G022917
Oil additives must not be used.
Synthetic oil is not used when the oil is
Viscosity chart
The API Service Symbol "donut" is divided into
changed at the normal maintenance services. Extreme engine operation
three parts:
This oil is only used at customer request, at additional charge. Please consult your Volvo retailer.
Oil viscosity Incorrect viscosity oil can shorten engine life under normal use. SAE 5W-30 will provide
Synthetic oils meeting SAE 0W-30 or 0W-40
· The upper section describes the oil's per-
and complying with oil quality requirements are
formance level.
recommended for driving in areas of sustained temperature extremes (hot or cold), when tow-
· The center identifies the oil's viscosity.
06
ing a trailer over long distances, and for pro-
· The lower section indicates whether the oil
longed driving in mountainous areas.
has demonstrated energy-conserving
properties in a standard test in comparison
to a reference oil.
`` 287
06 Maintenance and specifications
Specifications
Oil volume Engine model
3.2 (6-cyl.) 3.0T (6 cyl.)
Other fluids and lubricants Fluid Transmission oilA Coolant
Air conditioning 06
Brake fluid Power steering
B6324S/S2 B6304T2
System Automatic (TF-80SC) 3.2 (6-cyl.) 3.0T All models
Oil volume between MIN and Volume (incl. filter) MAX
1.27 US qts (1.2 liters)
7.82 US qts (7.4 liters)
1.27 US qts (1.2 liters)
7.82 US qts (7.4 liters)
Volume 5.8 US qts (5.5 liters) 9.4 US qts. (8.9 liters) 9.4 US qts. (8.9 liters) 1.8 lbs (800 g)
0.63 US qts (0.6 liters) 1.26 US qts (1.2 liters)
Specification
Transmission fluid BOT 341
Coolant with corrosion inhibitor mixed with water (50/50 mix), see packaging.
Refrigerant: R134a (HFC134a), PAG oil
DOT 4+
Power steering fluid WSS M2C204-A2 or equivalent product.
288
06 Maintenance and specifications
Specifications
Fluid
System
Volume
Specification
Washer fluid
6.8 US qts (6.5 liters) 4.7 US qts (4.5 litersB)
Use a washer antifreeze recommended by Volvo, mixed with water.
Fuel tank volume
3.0T/3.2 6 cyl.
18.5 US gallons (70 liters)
A Under normal driving conditions the transmission oil does not need changing during its service life. However, it may be necessary under adverse driving conditions. B Models without headlight washers
Electrical system
General information 12 volt system with a voltage-regulated alternator. Single pole system in which the chassis and engine block are used as conductors. The negative terminal is connected to the chassis.
WARNING
PROPOSITION 65 WARNING!
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals known to the state of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling.
Performance, battery
CAUTION
06
Engine
3.2 6-cyl./3.0T
If the battery is replaced, replace it with a
Voltage (V)
12
battery of the same cold start capacity and
Cold start capacity (A) 520 700
reserve capacity as the original (see the decal on the battery).
Reserve capacity (min) 100 135
289
06 Maintenance and specifications
Volvo programs
Volvo On Call Roadside Assistance Your new Volvo comes with a four year ON CALL roadside assistance. Additional information, features, and benefits are described in a separate information package in your glove compartment.
If you require assistance, dial:
In the U.S. 1-800-638-6586 (1-800-63VOLVO)
In Canada 1-800-263-0475
Technician certification
In addition to Volvo factory training, Volvo sup-
ports certification by the National Institute for
Automotive Service Excellence (A.S.E.). Certified technicians have demonstrated a high
degree of competence in specific areas.
06
Besides passing exams, each technician must
also have worked in the field for two or more
years before a certificate is issued. These professional technicians are best able to analyze
vehicle problems and perform the necessary maintenance procedures to keep your Volvo at
peak operating condition.
290
06 Maintenance and specifications
06
291
07 Index
1, 2, 3 ...
B Anti-lock brake system............................ 113 warning light......................................... 74
12-volt sockets........................................ 200
A
ABS (anti-lock brake system).................. 113 Accessory installation warning.................. 10 Active chassis system............................. 158 Active yaw control................................... 156
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)................. 113
Approach lighting................................ 56, 93
Audio system audio functions................................... 134 CD player/changer.............................. 144 HD digital radio................................... 138 overview.............................................. 133 radio functions.................................... 135 Sirius satellite radio............................ 141
Battery changing............................................. 245 maintenance............................... 244, 245 remote key, replacing........................... 59 specifications...................................... 289 warning symbols................................. 244
Black box............................................. 9, 226
Blind Spot Information System (BLIS)....................................... 194, 195, 196
Adaptive cruise control.................... 173, 175
sound settings.................................... 134 Bluetooth cell phone connection............. 147
Airbags disconnecting the front passenger's
steering wheel keypad........................ 133 USB/iPod connector........................ 136
Booster cushion, integrated...................... 47 Booster cushions....................................... 43
side................................................. 24, 25 Auto-dim rearview mirror......................... 100 Brake lights................................................ 90
front...................................................... 20 inflatable curtain................................... 30 side impact........................................... 28
Automatic locking retractor....................... 36
Automatic transmission Geartronic........................................... 111
Brake system checking fluid level............................. 232 emergency brake assistance.............. 114
Air conditioning........................................ 129
general description..................... 110, 111
fluid..................................................... 288
07
Air distribution.......................................... 127
Air distribution table................................. 131
oil........................................................ 288 shiftlock override................................ 111
general information............................. 113 Hill Descent Control............................ 115
Axle weight.............................................. 262 Air vents................................................... 127
warning light......................................... 76
All Wheel Drive......................................... 112
Bulbs cargo area lighting.............................. 240
Anti-freeze....................................... 206, 232
footwell lighting................................... 239
headlights........................... 234, 235, 236
292
07 Index
introduction......................................... 234 license plate lights...................... 239, 240 side marker lights............................... 237 specifications...................................... 240 taillight................................................ 238
C
Camera, Park Assist................................ 191 Capacity weight....................................... 262
Child restraint systems.............................. 37 booster cushions.................................. 43 convertible seats.................................. 41 infant seats........................................... 39 ISOFIX/LATCH anchors........................ 44 top tether anchors................................ 45
Child safety.......................................... 35, 36 booster cushions.................................. 43 child restraint systems.......................... 37 convertible seats.................................. 41 infant seats........................................... 39
Coolant............................................ 232, 288 Cooling system, general information....... 205 Courtesy lighting........................................ 92 Crash mode............................................... 34 Cruise control.................................. 159, 160
adaptive.............................................. 173 Curb weight............................................. 262 Current, conserving................................. 205
Cargo area changing bulbs................................... 240 steel grid............................................. 215
Cargo area cover..................................... 216
Child safety locks...................................... 50 City SafetyTM............................................ 167 Climate system........................................ 130
air distribution............................. 127, 131
D
Defroster.................................................. 130 Detachable key blade................................ 59
Cargo area net......................................... 216
air vents.............................................. 127 Dimensions.............................................. 283
Catalytic converter................................... 211 CD player/changer................................... 144 Cell phone, hands-free connection......... 147
Interior Air Quality System.................. 127 introduction......................................... 126 passenger compartment filter............ 126 refrigerant........................................... 126
Disconnecting the front passenger's airbag....................................................... 24, 25
Dome lighting............................................. 92
Central locking system, introduction......... 54 Clock, setting............................................. 78 Door mirrors............................................... 99
07
Chains...................................................... 264 Cold weather driving................................ 206 Driver distraction warning.......................... 10
Check engine light..................................... 74 Collision warning system......................... 161 Driving economically................................ 204
Child restraints
Compass in rearview mirror..................... 155 Driving in cold weather............................ 206
recalls and registration......................... 46 Conserving electrical current................... 205 Driving through water.............................. 205
Convertible seats....................................... 41
293
07 Index
E
G Eyelets for anchoring loads..................... 213
ECC................................................. 129, 130
Gasoline requirements............................. 209
F Economical driving.................................. 204
Gas tank volume...................................... 288
Electric parking brake.............................. 117 Electronic Climate Control....... 128, 129, 130
air distribution table............................ 131 Interior Air Quality System.................. 130 Emergency brake lights............................. 90 Emergency locking retractor...................... 36 Emergency starting.................................. 108 Emergency towing........................... 221, 222
Federal Clean Air Act............................... 226 Fluid specifications.................................. 288 Fog lights
front...................................................... 75 front/rear............................................... 90 rear...................................................... 238 Four C (active chassis system)................ 158 Front airbags.............................................. 20
Gauges...................................................... 73 Geartronic................................................ 111 Geartronic automatic transmission.......... 111 Generator warning light............................. 76 Glossary of tire terminology..................... 262 Grocery bag holder.................................. 214 Gross vehicle weight............................... 262
Emission inspection readiness................ 227
disconnecting passenger's side air-
Engine
H bag.................................................. 24, 25
overheating........................................... 76 Front fog lights..................................... 75, 90
specifications...................................... 285 Front park assist.............................. 188, 190 Hazard warning flashers............................ 91
starting................................................ 106 switching off....................................... 108
Front seats........................................... 81, 83
HD digital radio........................................ 138 Headlights
Engine compartment overview................ 229 Fuel filler cap........................................... 210
07 Engine oil
Fuel filler door, opening........................... 210
Active Bending Lights........................... 89 changing bulbs........................... 235, 236
checking............................................. 230 Fuel level warning light.............................. 75
high/low beams.................................... 88
low pressure warning light.............. 75, 76 Fuel requirements............................ 208, 209
high beam flash.................................... 88
specifications...................................... 287 volumes.............................................. 288
Environment............................................... 11
Fuel tank volume..................................... 288 Fuses............................... 247, 248, 251, 253
Headlight washers..................................... 95 Head restraints, rear seat.......................... 85 Heartbeat sensor (alarm system)......... 57, 58
294
07 Index
Heated oxygen sensors........................... 211 Heated rear seats.................................... 129 High beams................................................ 88
indicator light........................................ 75 Hill Descent Control................................. 115 Hoisting the vehicle................................. 227 Home safe lighting..................................... 92 Hood, opening/closing............................ 229 Horn........................................................... 87
Instrument lighting..................................... 88 Instrument overview............................ 72, 73 Instrument panel...................................... 124 Integrated two-stage booster cushion...... 47 Interior Air Quality System....................... 127 Interior lighting........................................... 92 iPod connector (audio system)............. 136 ISOFIX anchors.......................................... 44
L
Labels list of................................................... 282 location of........................................... 281
Laminated panoramic roof...................... 101 LATCH anchors......................................... 44 Leather care............................................. 278 Lighting panel............................................ 88 Load anchoring eyelets........................... 213
I
J
Loading the vehicle.......................... 212, 262 roof loads............................................ 214
Jack
Locking the vehicle.................................... 56
Ignition modes........................................... 79 Immobilizer.......................................... 54, 55 Important information.................................. 8
attaching............................................. 266 location of........................................... 266
Jump starting........................................... 108
Locks, child safety..................................... 50 Low beams................................................ 88 Low fuel level warning light........................ 75
Indicator lights......................... 73, 74, 75, 76
Low oil pressure warning light................... 76
Infant seats................................................ 39
K
Inflatable Curtain........................................ 30
07
M Inflation pressure............................. 257, 258 Key blade............................................. 54, 59
Inflation pressure tables.......................... 260 Information lights..................... 73, 74, 75, 76 Information symbol.................................... 75 Inspection readiness................................ 227
Keyless drive general description............................... 61 starting the vehicle............................. 106
Main instrument panel............................. 124
Maintenance............................................ 226 hoisting the vehicle............................. 227 performed by the owner..................... 227
295
07 Index
Malfunction indicator light......................... 74 Menu system........................................... 122
Odometer, trip........................................... 78 Oil
Power mirrors............................................ 99 defroster............................................. 100
overview.............................................. 122
specifications...................................... 287 Power steering
Messages in the instrument panel........... 124
Mirrors defroster............................................. 100
volumes.............................................. 288 On Call Roadside Assistance.................. 290 Overhead courtesy lighting........................ 92
fluid..................................................... 233 speed-dependent............................... 158
Power steering fluid................................. 288
power door........................................... 99 rearview, auto-dim function................ 100 retractable............................................. 99 vanity.................................................. 200
Motor oil checking............................................. 230 specifications...................................... 287 volumes.............................................. 288
Overheating, engine................................... 76 Oxygen sensors, heated.......................... 211
P
Paint, touching up.................................... 279 Park assist....................................... 188, 190 Park Assist Camera................................. 191
Power tailgate.......................................... 212 Power windows......................................... 97
laminated glass..................................... 98 Pregnancy, using seat belts during........... 18 PROPOSITION 65 WARNING..................................... 11, 108, 246, 289
R
N
Net in cargo area..................................... 216
Parking brake electric, applying/releasing................. 117 warning light......................................... 76
Radio Sirius satellite radio............................ 141
Radio functions........................................ 135
Parking lights............................................. 89
07
HD digital radio................................... 138
Personal Car Communicator, unique func-
O
Rain sensor................................................ 94 tions........................................................... 57
Occupant safety........................................ 14 Occupant weight sensor...................... 24, 25 Octane recommendations....................... 209
Polishing.................................................. 277
Power front seat memory function................................... 82 with keyless drive................................. 83
READ button............................................ 124 Rear fog light..................................... 90, 238 Rear park assist............................... 188, 190 Rear seat head restraints........................... 85
296
07 Index
Rear seats center head restraint............................. 85 folding................................................... 84 heated................................................. 129
Rearview mirror auto-dim function............................... 100 compass............................................. 155
Reporting safety defects............................ 15 Roadside Assistance............................... 290 Rollover Protection System (ROPS).......... 33 Roll Stability Control (RSC)........................ 33 Roof loads............................................... 214
Seats, front.......................................... 81, 82 Side door mirrors....................................... 99 Side impact airbags................................... 28 Side marker lights, changing bulbs......... 237 Sirius satellite radio.................................. 141 Snow chains............................................ 264
Rear window defroster............................ 100
S Recalls, child restraints.............................. 46
Snow tires................................................ 264 Sound settings, audio system................. 134
Refrigerant............................................... 288 Safety, occupant........................................ 14 Spare tire................................................. 265
Refueling.......................................... 208, 209 Safety defects, reporting........................... 15 Speed-dependent steering...................... 158
fuel filler cap....................................... 210 fuel filler door...................................... 210 fuel tank volume................................. 288
Registering child restraints........................ 46
Remote key................................................ 54 approach lighting.................................. 56 immobilizer..................................... 54, 55
Seat belt reminder................................................ 17
Seat belts Automatic locking retractor/Emergency locking retractor.................................... 36 buckling................................................ 16 maintenance......................................... 16
Spin control............................................. 156 SRS............................................................ 19 Stability system....................................... 156
indicator light........................................ 75 Starting the engine.................................. 106
with keyless drive............................... 106
key blade........................................ 54, 59
pretensioners........................................ 16 Starting the vehicle
key memory.......................................... 54 locking the vehicle................................ 56
reminder................................................ 16
after a crash (crash mode).................... 34 07
reminder warning light.......................... 76 Start inhibitor (immobilizer).................. 54, 55
Personal Car Communicator.......... 56, 57 replacing the battery............................. 59 unlocking the vehicle............................ 56
Remote key/PCC common functions................................ 56
securing child restraint systems.......................................... 39, 41, 43 unbuckling............................................ 16 use during pregnancy........................... 18 using..................................................... 16
Steel grid in cargo area............................ 215
Steering wheel adjusting............................................... 87 horn....................................................... 87 keypad.................................. 87, 122, 133
297
07 Index
Stone chips, touching up......................... 279 Storage spaces........................................ 198 Studded tires........................................... 264 Sunroof
laminated panoramic roof................... 101 Supplemental restraint system.................. 19
warning light......................................... 76
T
Tailgate
glossary of terms................................ 262 improving economy............................ 255 inflation pressure........................ 257, 258 inflation pressure tables..................... 260 rotation............................................... 256 snow................................................... 264 spare................................................... 265 specifications...................................... 259 storing................................................. 256 studded............................................... 264 tire pressure monitoring system......... 273 tread wear indicator............................ 257 uniform tire quality grading................. 264
Tread wear indicator................................ 257 Trip computer.......................................... 153 Trip odometers.......................................... 78 Trips, long distance................................. 206 Turn signals............................................... 91
changing bulbs................................... 237 indicator lights...................................... 75 Two-stage booster cushion....................... 47
U
driving with it open............................. 204 power operated.................................. 212 wiper/washer........................................ 95
Tailgate wipers......................................... 243
Taillights, changing bulbs........................ 238
Top tether anchors (child restraint systems).......................................................... 45
Touching up paint.................................... 279
Towing a trailer................................ 219, 220 trailer hitch.......................................... 220
Uniform Tire Quality Grading................... 264 Unlocking the vehicle................................ 56 Upholstery care....................................... 278
V Temporary spare tire............................... 265 Towing the vehicle........................... 221, 222
Three-way catalytic converter................. 211 Traction control........................................ 156
07
Tire designations..................................... 261
Trailer towing................................... 219, 220
Vanity mirror............................................ 200 changing bulbs................................... 240
Tire Pressure Monitoring System.... 273, 274
trailer hitch.......................................... 220
indicator light........................................ 75 Transmission
Vehicle dimensions.................................. 283
Tires......................................................... 255
general description..................... 110, 111 Vehicle Event Data............................... 9, 226
age...................................................... 255
oil........................................................ 288 Vehicle loading................................ 212, 262
changing from summer to winter........ 256
shiftlock override................................ 111
roof loads............................................ 214
298
Vehicle maintenance................................ 226 performed by the owner..................... 227
Vehicle weights........................................ 284 Volvo and the environment........................ 11 Volvo Inflatable Curtain.............................. 30 Volvo maintenance.................................. 226 Volvo On Call Roadside Assistance........ 290 Volvo programs....................................... 290
W
Warning flashers, hazard........................... 91 Warning lights.......................... 73, 74, 75, 76 Warning symbol......................................... 77 Warning system, collision........................ 161 Warranties................................................ 226 Washer fluid..................................... 243, 288 Washers
headlight............................................... 95 windshield............................................. 94 Water, driving through............................. 205 Waxing..................................................... 277 Weights.................................................... 284
Wheels..................................................... 255 changing............................................. 266 storing................................................. 256
Whiplash Protection System..................... 31
Windows power.................................................... 97
Windshield IR coating............................................. 96 rain sensor............................................ 94 washers................................................ 95 wipers/washers..................................... 94
Windshield washer fluid................... 243, 288
Windshield wipers.................................... 242
Wiper blades replacing tailgate wiper...................... 243 replacing windshield wipers............... 242
07 Index
07
299
07 Index
07
300
Kdakd 8Vg 8dgedgVi^dc IE &&%&& JH6 8VcVYV! 6I %.'% Eg^ciZY ^c HlZYZc! <iZWdg\ '%%.! 8deng^\]i '%%%"'%%. Kdakd 8Vg 8dgedgVi^dc
XSL Formatter V4.3 MR1 (4,3,2008,0610) for Windows Acrobat Distiller 7.0 (Windows)